AN ITALIAN CONVERSATION GRAMMAR COMPRISING THE MOST IMPORTANT RULES OF ITALIAN GRAMMAR, WITH NUMEROUS EXAMPLES AND EXERCISES THEREON, ENGLISH-ITALIAN DIALOGUES, HINTS ON ITALIAN VERSIFICATION, AND EXTRACTS IN ITALIAN POETRY, FOLLOWED BY A SHORT GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION. ALSO AN ENGLISH-ITALIAN AND ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. Throughout this Grammar the tonic accent on words is marked in darker type, and the proper pronunciations of the letters " E," "O," "S," and "Z," are indicated. BY N. PERINI, F.R.A.S., Professor of Italian at King's College, London, and at the Royal College of Music, and at Uni- versity College, Bristol, and Italian Examiner to the University of London, the Victoria University, Manchester, the Civil Service Commissioners, the Staff College, the Royal Military Academy, Woolwich, and the Society of Arts. FOURTH EDITION-CAREFULLY REVISED. LIBRAIPIE HACHETTE & C IE - LONDON: 18, KING WILLIAM STREET, CHARING CROSS, W.C. PARIS: 79, BOULEVARD SAINT-GERMAIN. BOSTON, U.S. : CARL SCHOENHOF. 1895. [ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.] DEDICATED, BY PERMISSION, TO LORD TENNYSON, POET LAUREATE. D.C.L., F.R.S., &C. 1C48076 PREFACE. IN bringing before the public this grammar, which is arranged in a way different from that generally adopted, I feel it incumbent on me to offer a few words of explanation. I have throughout adhered to the deductive method, that is, I do not set any exercise before the student, except on points previously explained. I have always regarded as mischievous the system of setting exercises beyond the knowledge of the student, and in which one-half of the words are translated ; these may be called exercises in writing, rather than exercises on grammar, and in doing them the student often loses sight of the very points the grammarian wishes to elucidate. I have made the verb the framework of the whole grammar, as it is impossible to form a sentence without it. I have also discarded the usual method of separating Accidence from Syn- tax, for it seems to me that such a separation has no existence in reality ; I have combined the two parts, and gradually in- troduced the Syntax as I thought its knowledge would be required by the student. Being convinced, as most people now are, that the best way of learning a foreign language is to translate into it from one's own language, I have added to this grammar a Short Guide to Italian Composition, comprising extracts in English prose, with notes to facilitate their translation into Italian. I have also given some hints on Italian versification, and extracts in Italian Poetry, so that the student may, at an early stage, learn how to read, and, if so disposed, commit to memory some of the VI. PREFACE. finest verses in the Italian language, and thus acquire a correct Italian accent. I have supplemented the whole with Vocabu- laries, which will enable the student not only to dispense with any other book for the first lessons, but to find without loss of time the word he wants. The meaning of the letters in darker type, which will be found in many Italian words throughout this grammar, and the directions for the proper pronunciations of the letters " E," " O," " S," and " Z," which is a very important feature in my book, are given in rules 5, 9, 48, 53, and 63. I hope that the improvements I have made in my book will increase the favour I have already received from my colleagues and from the public, and for which I am very grateful. N. PERINI. KING'S COLLEGE, LONDON. November, 1895. TABLE OF CONTENTS. INTRODUCTION i The Alphabet. Pronunciation of the Vowels. Pronunciation of the Consonants. Rules for Dividing Words into Syllables. On the Pronunciation of Words. The Written Accent. The Apostrophe. Use of Capital Letters. On Reading and Speaking Italian. Reading Exercises. LESSON I. On the Definite Article 13 On the Prepositions, "Di," "A," "Da" 14 II. On the Verb, "Avere," to have 16 III. On the Modes of Addressing People in Italian 19 On the Interrogative and Negative Forms of Verbs ... 20 IV. On the Partitive Article 22 On the Indefinite Article 23 V. On the Verb " Essere," to be 25 On the Verb " Essere," with " Ci," and " Vi " 27 VI. On the Verbs .'. 28 On the First Conjugation in "Are" 29 VII. On the Personal Pronouns 34 On the Conjunctive Personal Pronouns 35 On the Disjunctive Personal Pronouns 38 VIII. On the Double Conjunctive Pronouns 40 IX. On the Words, "Ci," "Vi,"and "Ne" 43 X. On the Second Conjugation in " Ere " 46 XI. On the Third Conjugation in " Ire" 50 XII. On Verbs conjugated Passively 54 XIII. On the Neuter Verbs 56 XIV. On the Reflective and Reciprocal Verbs 59 XV. On the Impersonal Verbs 62 XVI. On the Impersonal Verbs expressive of the State of the Weather 65 XVII. On the Irregular Verbs 66 XVIII. On the Use of the Definite and Partitive Articles ... 93 XIX. On the Use of the Indefinite Article 97 XX. On the Gender and Number of Nouns 99 XXI. On the Compound Nouns 109 XXII. On the Italian Suffixes ill On the Collective Nouns 113 Vlll. CONTENTS. LESSON XXIII. On Qualitative Adjectives 115 On "Bello," "Grande," " Buono," "Santo," "Tutto," "Mezzo," "Qgni," "Altro," " Molto," "Tanto," &c. 117 XXIV. On the Formation of Adverbs 122 On the Degrees of Comparison ... ... ... ... 123 XXV. On the Numeral Adjectives 128 XXVI. On the Possessive Adjectives 132 On the Possessive Pronouns... ... ... ... ... 136 XXVII. On the Demonstrative Adjectives 138 On the Demonstrative Pronouns 140 On the Demonstrative Personal Pronouns ... ... 141 XXVIII. On the Relative Pronouns 143 XXIX. On the Indefinite Pronouns 147 On " Niente," " Nulla," " Quanto," and " Per Quanto" ... 152 XXX. On the Infinitive Mood 154 XXXI. On the Indicative Mood 156 XXXII. On the Subjunctive Mood, and "Se" 161 XXXIII. On the Form and Use of Passive Verbs 168 XXXIV. On " Volere," " Dovere," " Potere," and " Sapere " ... 171 XXXV. On the Negation 173 XXXVI. On the Past Participle 176 XXXVII. On the Verbs "Avere," " Essere," "Andare," "Dare," "Fare," "Stare," "Sapere," "Tenere," "Volere," and " Venire " used idiomatically ... ... ... 179 XXXVIII. On the Adverbs 190 On the Words "Onde," "Bene," and " Pure" 196 XXXIX. On the Prepositions 198 XL. On the Complements of Verbs ... ... ... ... 205 XLI. On the Conjunctions and Interjections 209 Transposition of Words in Italian Sentences 212 Italian Idioms and Sayings 213 Italian Proverbs ... ... ... ... ... ... 215 English-Italian Dialogues 216 Titles and Expressions used in Italian Letters 222 A Guide to Italian Composition ... ... ... ... 224 Italian Poetry 235 English-Italian Vocabulary ... ... ... ... ... 246 Italian-English Vocabulary 259 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. INTRODUCTION ON THE PRONUNCIATION AND SPELLING- OF THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE THE ALPHABETc 1. The Italian Alphabet consists of the following twenty-one letters : A, B, C, D. E, F, G, H. I, L, M v N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, Z. * A, E, I, O. U, are vowels, and the other letters are consonants. 2. The Italian language is very nearly pronounced as it is written. There are no real diphthongs in Italian. PRONUNCIATION OF THE VOWELS. 3. A is pronounced liks the a, in artist. Ex. "amara," bitter. 4. E has two different sounds ; one like that of the e in the English word emigrant. Ex. ; 'pena," punishment, "fedele," faithful; the other a broad sound, like that of the a in the English word gate. Ex. "balestra," cross-bow, "bella," beautiful. 5. Throughout this grammar a dot is placed under the letter e, thus e, when it has the broad sound of the a in the English word gate. 6. * The Letters, K, \V, X, Y, are not made use of in spelling Italian words. The letter J was formerly used in spelling many Italian words, but it is now generally discarded ; the letter i, which has very nearly the same sound as j (see rule 7), being used instead. ON PRONUNCIATION AND SPELLING. 7. I is pronounced like the ee, in eel. Ex. " vita " life. 8. O has two different sounds ; one like that of the o, in the English word vote; as "fiore," flower, "colpo," blow, " molto," much; the other like that of the o in the English word orphan. Ex. ' ; oro,"* gold, "C9rpo," body, "txpsto," soon. 9. Throughout this grammar a dot is placed under the letter o, thus 9, when it has the broad sound of the v in the English word orphan. 10. U is pronounced like the oo, in the English word moon. Ex. " uno," one, "universo," universe, "volume," volume. PRONUNCIATION OF THE CONSONANTS. 11. The consonants B, D, F,f L, M, N, P, R,J T, and V, are pronounced in the same manner as in English. PRONUNCIATION OF THE LETTER C. C, followed by A, O, or U, has a hard sound. 12. CA is pronounced like the ca, in cart. Ex. " capo," head. 13. CO is pronounced like the co, in comet. Ex. "Colombo,'' dove. 14. CU is pronounced like the cu, in cuckoo. Ex. " cura," cure. C, followed by E or I, has a soft sound. 15. CE is pronounced like the cha, in chase. Ex. " cena," supper. 16. CI is pronounced like the chi, in chip. Ex. "cibo," food. H hardens the sound of C before E and I. 17. CHE is pronounced like theca, in cake. Ex. " cheto," quiet. 18. CHI is pronounced like the kee, in keep. Ex. " chiave," key. PRONUNCIATION OF SCE, AND SCI. 19. SCE is pronounced like the ska, in shape. Ex. " scena," scene. 20. SCI is pronounced like the shee, in sheep. Ex. " sciame," swarm. 21. * When there are two or three o's in a word, the second and third always have the same sound as the first. Ex. " mo" gold, "cronologia," chronology. 22. + The Italians always substitute / for ph, in words derived from the Greek. Ex. " filosofa," philosophy. 23. J Notice that the " r," is pronounced much more emphatically in Italian than in English. Ex. " burro," buffer. 24. Notice that in Italian the vowel u is never pronounced like the u in the English word union, but always like the two o's, in the English word moon. ON PRONUNCIATION AND SPELLING. PRONUNCIATION OF THE LETTER G. G, followed by A, O, or U, is pronounced hard. 25. GA is pronounced like the ga, in garden. Ex. " gabbia," cage. 26. GO is pronounced like the go, in goblet. Ex. "gola," throat. 27. GU is pronounced like the goo, in goose. Ex. " gufo," owl. G, followed by E or I, has a soft sound. 28. GE is pronounced like the ge, in gem. Ex. " gente," people. 29. GI* is pronounced like the gi, in gin. Ex. " giro," turn. H, hardens the sound of G before E and I. 30. GHE is pronounced like thega, in gate. Ex. " leghe," leagues. 31. GHI is pronounced like the gi, in gimlet. Ex. "laghi," lakes. PRONUNCIATION OF GLI. 32. GLI is pronounced like the illi, in postillion. Ex. " giglio," lily. 33. Notice, however, that "gli" is pronounced like the gli, in glimmer, in the words " Anglia," England, " anglicano," Anglican, " geroglifico," hieroglyphic, hieroglyphical, 5 ' negligenza," negligence, and in the verb " negligere," to neglect. PRONUNCIATION OF GN. 34. GN is pronounced like the gn, in design. Ex. " agnello," lamb. ON THE LETTER H. 35. H has no sound by itself, and may be considered as an auxiliary letter. 36. The principal use of the letter H in Italian is, as already explained in rules 17, 18, 30, 31, to give to the letters c and g a hard sound, when they are followed by e or i. 37. H is also used at the beginning of the words "ho," / have, "hai," thou hast, " ha," he has, and "hanno," they have; in which words the h is retained only to distinguish them from " o," mean- ing or, " ai," to the, "a," to or at, and " anno" year. The h is further used in the interjections " ah ! " " 9h ! " " ahi ! " " ehi ! " 38. * The student should pay great attention to the pronunciation of the letters c and g, and to bear well in mind that the i serves only to soften the sound of c, and s, in the syllables " cia," " cio," "ciu," " gia," " gio," and " giu," which must be pronounced as one, and not as two syllables. Ex. " ciarlare " to chat, "ciotto," pebble, " ciuffo," lock of hair, " gia\\o," yellow, " giorno," day, " maggiore, " " ON PRONUNCIATION AND SPELLING. PRONUNCIATION OF QUA, QUE, QUI, and QUO. 39. QUA* is pronounced like the qua, in quality. Ex." quadra, "picture. 40. QUE is pronounced like the que, in question. Ex. "questo," this* 41. QUI is pronounced like thequi, in quick. Ex. "quinto," fifth. 42. QUO is pronounced like the quo, in quotation. Ex. " qu9ta," share. PRONUNCIATION OF THE LETTER S. 43. S has two different sounds ; a sharp hissing sound, and a soft one. 44. S, at the beginning of a word, and followed by a vowel, has a hard sound, like the 5 in the English word spirit. Ex. "sito," site. 45. S, at the beginning of a word, and followed by one of the consonants c, f, p, q, t, has a hard sound, like the s in the English word spirit. Ex. " scanno," bench, " sforzo," effort, " spia," spy> " squadrone," squadron, " storpio," lame. 46. S, at the beginning of a word, and followed by one of the consonants b, d, g, I, m, n, r, v, has a soft sound, like the 5 in the English word rose. Ex. " sbaglio," mistake, " sdegno," disdain, 11 sgabello," stool, " sleale," disloyal, " smalto," enamel, " snello," nimble, "sregolato," disorderly, " svelare," to unveil. 47. S, between two vowels, has, as a rule, the soft sound of the 5 in the English word rose. Ex. " sp9so," bridegroom, " chiesa," church ; but this rule has numerous exceptions. 48. Throughout this grammar a dot is placed under the 5, thus s, when it has the soft sound of the s in the English word rose. 49. When the 5 is doubled it always has a hard, hissing sound. Ex. " rarissimo," very rare. PRONUNCIATION OF THE LETTERS Z AND ZZ. 50. Z has two sounds ; one sharp, like that of the ts in the English word wits. Ex. " zampa," paw, " zio," uncle, "amicizia," friendship, " prudenza," prudence; the other sound like that of the letter z in the English word zeal. Ex. "zelo," zeal, "garzone," youth, waiter. 51. * Notice that the letter q, in Italian, is always followed by . ON PRONUNCIATION AND SPELLING. 52. ZZ have two different sounds ; one like that of the ts in the English word wits. Ex. " piazza," square, " bellezza," beauty, " prezzo," price, " nozze," wedding, "mezzo," over-ripe; the other sound like that of the zz in the English word muzzle. Ex. " dozzina," dozen, "orizzonte," horizon, " gazza," magpie, " gazzetta," gazette, " mezzo,"* middle, means, half. 53. Throughout this grammar a dot is placed under the 2, thus z, when it has the soft sound of the z in the English word zeal; and dots are placed under the two zz, thus zz, when they have the soft sound of the zz in the English word muzzle. RULES FOR DIVIDING WORDS INTO SYLLABLES. 54. (i) One or two consonants at the beginning of a word, fol- lowed by one, two, or even three vowels, form a syllable. Ex. "ve-de-re," to see, "pre-ga-re," to pray, " fie-le," gall, " quie-to," quiet, " scuo-la," school. Except when the stress of the voice, or what is called the " Tonic Accent," falls upon one of the vowels ; in that case that vowel marks the end of the syllable. Ex. "Di-o," God, " mi-o," my. 55. (ii) A consonant between two vowels makes a syllable with the second vowel. Ex. " a-mi-co," friend, " o-no-re," honour. 56. (iii) When two consonants are in the middle of a word, one of them makes a syllable with the preceding, and the other with the following vowel. Ex. " al-ber-go," inn, " ac-cen-to," accent. But if the second of the two consonants is either I, m, n, or r, the two consonants are united to the following vowel. Ex. " mi-glio," mile, " sti-gma," stigma, " cam-pa-gna," country, " ve-dre-mo," we shall see. 57. (iv) When there are three consonants in the middle of a word, the first of them makes a syllable with the preceding, and the two others with the following vowel. Ex. "om-bra," shade, shadow, "sem-pre } " always. 58. (v) The consonant s, with any other consonants which may follow it, always form a syllable with the following vowel. Ex. " que-sto," this, " a-spet-to," aspect, " v9-stro," your. Except in compound words. Ex. " dis-a-gio," discomfort, " dis-giun-ge-re," to unconnect, &c. * Notice that the sound of the e in " mezzo," meaning middle, means, half, is broad. ON PRONUNCIATION AND SPELLING. ON THE PRONUNCIATION OF WORDS. " PAROLE PIANE," flat words. 59. In pronouncing most Italian words the stress of the voice, or what is called the " Tonic Accent " falls upon the penultimate, or last syllable but one. Ex. " prato," (the stress on the a) meadow, " felice," (the stress on the i ) happy, " parlare," (the stress on the second a) to speak, " finivamo," (the stress on the a) we ice ye finishing, " castello," (the stress on the e and the first /) castle. These words are called "parole pia.ne," fiat words. " PAROLE SDRUCCIOLE," slippery words. 60. In some words (perhaps one out of every eighteen) the tonic accent falls on the ante-penultimate, that is to say, on the last syllable but two. Ex. " tavola," table, " carcere," prison, " dpcile," docile, " vendere," to sell, " compravano," they were buying, " altissimo," very high. These words are called "parole sdrucciole," slippery words. " PAROLE BISDRUCCIOLE," very slippery words. 61. In about eighty words (third persons plural of verbs of the first conjugation, see rule 176) the tonic accent falls upon the last syllable but three. Ex. " terminano," they end, " rotolano," (21) they roll. These words are called "parole bisdrucci9le," very slippery words* " PAR9LE TRONCHE," curtailed words. 62. There are besides the " parole piane," " sdrucciole," and " bisdrucci9le," some words which have lost the final syllable, and are therefore called " parole tronche," curtailed words. The tonic accent in these words falls upon the last vowel, which is always, marked by the grave accent ( v ), and is strongly pronounced. Ex. "carita" (caritade), charity, " crede " (credeo), he believed, " fini " (finio), he finished, " parlb " (parloe), he spoke, " virtu " (virtude),. virtue. VERY IMPORTANT RULE. 63. The way adopted to indicate the " Tonic Accent," through- out this grammar is this : IN ALL THE " PAROLE SDRUCCWLE " and " BlSDRUCCtoLE," THE LETTER OR LETTERS UPON WHICH THE STRESS OF THE VOICE SHOULD FALL ARE PRINTED IN DARKER TYPE. No difference is made in the type on " parole piane," and " tronche." 64. * It is to be observed that the tonic accent in verbs never changes its place when a pronoun, or pronouns are joined to it, so that a " parola piana," by taking a pronoun after it, becomes " sdrllCciola," and when two pronouns are joined to it, it becomes "bisdrUCciola." Ex. " vendete," sell, " vendetelo,"j//?V, " vendetemelo," sell it to me. ON PRONUNCIATION AND SPELLING. THE WRITTEN ACCENT. 65. There is only one written accent in Italian orthography, namely the grave accent, marked thus ( x ), and which is written on the final vowel of the " parole tronche " (curtailed words), which have been explained in rule 62, such as " carita,"* charity, " crede," he believed, " fini," he finished, "parlo," he spoke, "virtu," virtue. 66. The grave accent is also written on the words " piu," more, "pud," he or she can, "gia," already, of course, "giu," down, below, to prevent them being mispronounced. 67. Notice that there is no need of writing the accent on mono- syllabic words, such as "re," king, "fu," (he) was, " su," on or upon ; except however on the following monosyllables, to distin- guish them from others spelt in the same manner, but written without accent, and which have a different meaning. E* means (he) is, E means and. DA means (he) gives, DA means from, by, &c. Di means day, DI means of. Di" means say (ihou.) LA means there, LA means the, (art.), and her, it, (pron.) Li means there, LI means them, (conj. pron.) NE means neither and nor, NE means of it, us, to us, (pron.) SE means one's self, (conj. pron.) SE means if. Si (short for cosi) means yes, si means one's self, (conj. pron.) TE means tea, TE means thee, (conj. pron.) ' 68. The grave accent is also used in the following words and a few others to indicate where the stress of the voice should be laid in pronouncing them : ANCORA means anchor, ANCORA means again, still, yet. BALIA, (f.), means nurse, BALtA, (m.), means magistrate, power. CANONE, means canon, rule, CANONE, means big dog. CUPIDO, means greedy, CUPIDO, means Cupid. TENDINE means tendon, TENDINE means curtains. 69. * The vowels over which the grave accent is placed must be pronounced with a broad, emphatic sound. ON PRONUNCIATION AND SPELLING. THE APOSTROPHE. 70. The apostrophe ( ' ) in Italian takes the place of a final vowel, preceding a word beginning with another vowel. Ex. " 1'albero," instead of "lo albero," the tree, " Panima," instead of " la anima," the soul, "gl'insetti," instead of " gli insetti," the insects, una " bell' opera," instead of una " bella opera," a fine work, un " grand'u9mo," instead of un " grande U9mo," a great man. 71. In a few words the apostrophe takes the place of a syllable. Ex. " un P9'," instead of " un P9CO," a little, " me'," instead of " meglio," better, "vp'," instead of "v9glio," / will, "to'," instead of " t9gli," take, " di'," instead of " dici," say. 72. It is to be observed that in poetry the apostrophe is some- times placed before a consonant, in the place of a vowel which has been left out. Ex. " E'l sospirar dell' aura infra le fronde." "\ instead of I A nd the sighing of the " E il sospirar della aura infra le fronde." f breeze among the trees. (Petrarca.) j 73. All Italian words except " il," the, "un," a or an, "in," in, " per," for, through, " con," with, " non," not, end with one of the vowels a, e, i, o, u, and this vowel indicates the gender, number, and verbal inflection of words.* USE OF CAPITAL LETTERS. 74. In Italian the names of the months, the names of the days of the week, and adjectives begin with a small letter, when not at the commencement of a sentence. Ex. Mi mando la grammatica fran- He sent me the French gram- cese lunedi. mar on Monday. 75- * Besides the words given above (in rule 73), which always end with a conso- nant, the Italians suppress the last vowel, or syllable, in many words, to avoid the monotony which would be produced by the use of too many ending vowels, so that they use "bel," instead of " bello," beautiful, " gran," instead of " grande," great, tall, large, "san," instead of " santo," saint, holy, " buon," instead of " buono," good. They also suppress the final vowel in many words, especially in the infinitive of verbs. Ex. " Aver avuto," instead of " Avere avuto," to have had, " Parlar francese," instead of " Parlare francese," to speak French. There is no rule for these curtail- ments ; the judgment and ear decide. ON PRONUNCIATION. ON READING AND SPEAKING ITALIAN. 76. Now that the student is in possession of the rules for the pronunciation of Italian words, he should read aloud to his teacher, and by himself. As far as reading goes, the Italian language is most attractive ; it offers no serious difficulty to the English student, "who, under the guidance of an able teacher can, after two or three hours' practice, read it far better than an Italian could possibly know how to read English after as many weeks' or months' practice. 77. In reading and speaking Italian, great care must be taken tO UTTER THE DOUBLE CONSONANTS bb, CC, dd, &C., DISTINCTLY ; after having pronounced the first of the two consonants, the voice is kept lingering for a short while, and then the other consonant, with its accompanying vowel, is pronounced. Ex. " avreb...be," he would have, " ec...citare," to excite (the cc sound like the chi, in chicory, because the cc are followed by i), " Z9c...colo," sandal (the cc sound like kk, because the cc are followed by 0), "ad...dio," good-bye, " ef. ..ficace," efficacious, " corag...gio," courage, " bel...lo," beautiful, "fum...mo," we were, " saran...no," they will be, " cop. ..pa," nape of the neck, "tor. ..re," tower, "b9nis...simo," very good, "dot. ..to," learned, "bev...vi," / drank, " delicatez...za," delicacy. 78. The student must also be very careful NOT TO PRONOUNCE THE WORDS SEPARATELY, but RATHER TO LET THEM RUN INTO ONE ANOTHER, except, of course, when they are divided by punctuation. 79. The student must also remember that, although the ending vowels indicate the gender, number, and verbal inflection of Italian words, yet, IN READING AND SPEAKING, THE LAST SYLLABLE OF WORDS MUST BE PRONOUNCED SOFTLY, LOWERING THE VOICE, EXCEPT WHEN THE LAST VOWEL is ACCENTED ; in this latter case all the stress of the voice must be laid on the accented vowel, without however leaving any pause between it and the word which follows. Ex. " Parlero a Carlo, e gli (32) diro la verita," / shall speak to Charles, and will tell him the truth. Which must be pronounced as if it were written thus: " ParleroaCarlo, eglidirolaverita." 80. It is characteristic of the Italians to express a great deal more emphasis than the English in pronouncing phrases in the interrogative and exclamative forms. Ex. Ha Carlo portato il mio libro ?* Has Charles brought my book ? Che bel cavallo !f What a beautiful horse ! * The voice must be gradually raised from the first to the last word in this phrase. + The emphasis must be increased from the first to the last word in this phrase. IO READING EXERCISES. READING EXERCISES. EXERCISE I. (ON CA, CO, AND CU.) Carlo (12) ha (35) trovato il libro nella (77) mia camera (63). Charles has found the book v in my room. Ho sempre (5) creduto che fosse italiano. E (69) vestito come (13) I always thought that he was an Italian. He is dressed like mio nipote. Vostro (9) padre rupn ha cura (14) della sua salute, my nephew. Your father does not take care of his health. La sua tema di mostrarmi il suo tema e ridicola. Ci sono quasi His fear of showing me his exercise is ridiculous. There are nearly venti nomi di diversi venti. Hanno fatto un foro nella porta del twenty names of different winds. They have made a hole in the door of the Foro. Quando diede il suo voto il Senato era quasi V9to (21). Forum. When he gave his vote the Senate was almost empty. EXERCISE II. (ON CE AND CI.) Tua sorella* ha una bella voce (15) di soprano. Si, tu dici (16) Your sister has a fine soprano voice. Yes, you say la verita (69). II fanciullo era nasc9sto (21) nell' armadio. Enrico the truth. The child was hidden in the cupboard. Henry e un uomof di buona natura. Hanno portato la mia cena ? (80) is a good-natured man. Have they brought my supper ? N9, non ancora. Ora il cielo e sereno. Mi piace tanto respirare No, not yet. Now the sky is bright. I am very fond of breathing 1'aria della mattina. Nell' autunno (2) 1'aurora non e mai molto the morning air. In autumn the dawn is never very lucente. Ella comincio (79) a parlare con una certa autorita. bright. She began to speak with a certain authority. EXERCISE III. (ON CHE, CHI, SCE AND SCI.) Che (17) bel libro ! (80) Di chi (18) e ? Veramente non saprei What a fine book ! Whose is it ? Really I cannot dirlo ; ma credo che sia di Odoardo. Le antiche cronache say ; but I believe it belongs to Edward. Ancient chronicles give istruiscono molto. II V9stro fanciullo non ha piu (69) paura del much instruction. Your child is no longer afraid of mio cane. Dov' e la chiave (18) della mia camera ? II facchino my dog. Where is the key of my room ? The porter 1'ha attaccata al chiodo. Mio fratello ha veduto tutte le principali has hung it on the nail. My brother has seen all the principal citta dell' Europa. La Maria ha scelto (19) un bel colore. Antonio cities of Europe. Mary has chosen a beautiful colour. Anthony sciupa (20) tutti i su9i abiti. C'erano cento uomini nella miseria. spoils all his clothes. There were a hundred men in poverty. * Notice that, in nouns and qualificative adjectives, the e followed by two // (ello, ella, elli, elle), has always the broad sound of a in the word gate. | Notice that the o preceded by a u has always the broad sound of o in the word orphan. READING EXERCISES. II EXERCISE IV. (ON GA, GO, GU, GE, GI, GHE, II gatto (25) guarda (27) sempre la gabbia dell' uccello. 19 ho The cat is always looking at the bird's cage. I have male alia gola (26). II generale (28) e un vupmo giusto (29) ; a sore throat. The general is a just man ; he compro le ghette (30), e le pago una ghinea (31). La geografia bought the gaiters and paid a guinea for them. Geography e la cronologia (21) sono gli (32) 9cchi della storia. Guglielmo e and chronology are the eyes of history. William is andato nel giardino a C9gliere dei fieri. Che bel giglio ! (80). gone into the garden to gather flowers. What a beautiful lily ! Cio accadde al tempo degli dei falsi e bugiardi. II Lago Maggiore. That happened at the time of the false and lying gods. Lago Maggiore. EXERCISE V. (ON GN, QUA, QUE, QUI, AND QUO.) I miei fratelli hanno viaggiato in Italia e in Francia durante i My brothers travelled in Italy and France during the months mesi di maggio, giugno (34) e luglio. II postiglione fu molto of May, June and July- The postilion was negligente (33) verso la mia famiglia. Chi pub sciogliere il very negligent towards my family. Who can untie the nodo ? (80). lo ; ecco 1'ho gia sci9lto. Voglio del caffe di biKma knot ? I ; see I have already untied it. I want some coffee of a good qualita (39). Giuseppe ed io siamo stati alia campagna ; abbiamo quality. Joseph and I have been in the country ; we walked camminato tre leghe (30). Questa (40) e la quinta (41) questione three leagues. This is the fifth quarn-1 that my che i miei fratelli hanno avuta insieme. Un sogno di buon augurio. brothers have had together. A dream of good omen. EXERCISE VI. (ON THE LETTER S.) Questa signora (44) ha molto spirito. Abbiamo udito uno This lady is very witty. We have heard squillo (45) di tromba. Allo sbocco (40) del fiume 1'acqua e molto a trumpet peal. At the outlet of the river the water is very turbata. Suo suocero ha mostrato troppo sdegno (46) ; cib e uno muddy. Your father-in-law has shown too much anger ; that is a sbaglio (46). II prato era smaltato (46) di fiori. Questo giovnwtto* mistake. v This meadow was full of flowers. This young man is e svelto (46). E venuto a dirmi che ha disegnato il suo quadro. active. He came to tell me that he has drawn his picture. Non e lecito di susurrare in compagnia. Tutto 1'edincio risonavaf It is not proper to whisper in company. The whole building resounded di applausi. Stefano ha disigillatof la mia lettera. with applause. Stephen has unsealed my letter. * Notice that an o followed by two tt (otto, otta, otti, ofte), has always the broad sound of o in the word orphan. t Notice that an s preceded by ri, meaning again, and di, meaning un, has the hard sound of s in the word spirit. 12 READING EXERCISES. EXERCISE VII. (ON THE 5, SHARP.) Che cosa c'e ? La casa del pievano e incendiata. II riso rallegra. What is it ? The parson's house is on fire. Laughter cheers. Mi place il riso. Ho desiderio di vederlo. Non e cosi facile di I like rice. I wish to see him. It is not so easy to punish punirlo. La Giovanna portava una vesta di raso. Egli e molto him. Joan wore a satin dress. He is very geloso.* La sua gelosia* gli sara fatale. Questo Inglesef ha jealous. His jealousy will be fatal to him. This Englishman has sposato una Francese.f Abbiamo fatte molte spese.J married a Frenchwoman. We have incurred a great deal of expense. EXERCISE VIII. (ON THE Z, AND ZZ, SHARP.) Vo altiero della sua amicizia (50,53) per me. La bellezza (52, 53) I am proud of his friendship for me. The beauty della natura. Non vanno mai in carrozza. Ho comprato quattro of nature. They never go in a carriage. I have bought four fazzoletti da naso. Ammiro la sua presenza di spirito e la sua pocket-handkerchiefs. I admire his presence of mind and costanza. Ho incontrato mio zio nella piazza di San Marco ; mi constancy. I met my uncle in the Square of Saint Mark ; he ha dato quattro biglietti per le " Nozze di Figaro." Cameriere, gave me four tickets for the "Nozze di Figaro." Waiter, portatemi una tazza di caffe nero, la zuccheriera, e una scatola di bring me a cup of black coffee, the sugar-basin, and a box of zolfanelli. Che scherzo ! Non V9glio questa pera perche e mezza. matches. What a joke ! I will not have this pear because it is over-ripe. EXERCISE IX. (ON THE Z, AND ZZ, SOFT.) La Signorina Bianchini ha una bellissima vocedi mezzo- soprano. Miss Bianchini has a beautiful light soprano voice. " Nel mezzo (53) del cammin di nostra vita " (Dante). La rappre- Midway the journey of our life. The repre- sentazione dell' ppera "La Gazza Ladra " del Rossini durb due ore sentation of the opera "La Gazza Ladra" of Rossini, lasted two hours and e mezzo. " I Promessi Sposi " del Manzoni (53) e un bellissimo a - half. "The Betrothed," of Manzoni is a very beautiful romanzo. Egli ha scelto una magnifica statua di bronzo. novel. He has chosen a magnificent bronze statue. Quest' U9mo e molto bizzarre e rozzo ; non ha il menomo zelo per il This man is very eccentric and rude ; he has not the slightest zeal for suo lavoro. L'orizzonte era del colore azzurro del piu puro zaffiro. his work. The horizon was of the azure colour of the purest sapphire. * Notice that the s in adjectives ending in oso, and words derived from them, is sharp, like the s in the word spirit. f Notice that the s in adjectives indicating nationality, ending in ese, is sharp, like the s in the word spirit, except in " Francese," French, and " Lucchese," Lucchese. \ Notice that the s in nouns ending in esa, ese, is sharp, like the s in the word spirit, except in the words " chiesa," church, " Agnese," Agnes, and a few others. ON THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 13 LESSON I. i. ON THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 81. The definite article The is translated into Italian by "il" in the singular, and "i" in the plural, before masculine nouns beginning with a consonant. Ex. " II libro,"* the book, " i libri,' the books. 82. The is translated by " lo " in the singular, and " gli " in the plural, before masculine nounsf beginning with an 5 followed by another consonant, or with a z. Ex. Lo sperone,J the spur, gli speroni, the spurs. Lo zingaro, the gipsy, gli zingari, the gipsies. 83. The is translated by "lo," or rather " 1' " in the singular, and " gli "|| in the plural, before masculine nounsf beginning with a vowel ; the " i" of "gli " may be replaced by an apostrophe before a nounf beginning with an " i." Ex. L'albero,^! the tree, gli alberi, the trees. L'id9lo, the idol, gl' id9li, the idols. 84. The is translated by " la" in the singular, and "le" in the plural, before feminine nounsf beginning with a consonant. If the feminine nounf begins with a vowel, the a in " la " is suppressed and replaced by an apostrophe ; the e in " le " may be replaced by an apostrophe before a nounf beginning with e. Ex. La penna,** the pen, le penne, the pens. L' anima, the soul, le anime, the souls. L' elegiaft the elegy, I'elegie, the elegies. 85. * There are only two genders in Italian, masculine and feminine. Nearly all nouns ending in o are masculine, and form their plural by changing o into i. "\~ Also before adjectives ; as it is a question of euphony. 86. J Nouns ending in e are of both genders, and form their plural by changing e into i. 87. The only words before which " lo " is used for the sake of euphony instead of "il " are " piu" and " meno," in the expressions "per lo piii,"/Zw the most part, and " per lo meno," at least. 88. || The only word before which " gli," " degli," " agli," c. , are used for the sake of euphony instead of " i," " dei," "ai," &c., is " A&\" gods. Ex. " Al tempo degli dei falsi e bugiardi." (Dante). During the time of the false and lying gods. T See rule 63, to understand the meaning of the letters in the darker type. 89. ** Most nouns ending in a are feminine, and form their plural by changing the a into t. tt An e, Jotted Ihus e, has a broad sound, like the a mgate. 14 ON THE PREPOSITIONS " DI," "A," "DA.' 2. ON THE PREPOSITIONS " DI," "A," "DA." THE PREPOSITION "DI." go. The preposition " di " corresponds to the preposition of. Ex. II padrone di questa casa. The master of this house. II regno di Spagna. The kingdom of Spain. II diKmio di Milano. The cathedral of Milan. 91. " D',' 1 instead of " di," is used before words beginning with an i ; when the word begins with any other vowel either " di " or " d' " may be used. Ex. II regno d' Italia. The kingdom of Italy. 92. The English possessive case, expressed by '5, as Peter's book, is rendered in Italian by inverting the position of the two words, and placing the preposition " di," between them. Ex. " II libro di Pietro." " Peter's book." THE PREPOSITION "A." 93. The preposition " a " corresponds to the prepositions to and at. Ex. Vado a Parigi. I am going to Paris. H9 parlato a Carlo. I have spoken to Charles. Mio padre e a casa. My father is at home. 94. " Ad" may be used instead of " a," before a word beginning with a vowel, especially before an a. Ex. Sono stato ad Atene. I have been to Athens. THE PREPOSITION " DA." 95. The preposition " da " is used in the sense of from. Ex. Vengo da Firenze. I come from Florence. 96. The a of " da " is never replaced by an apostrophe in Italian prose. Ex. E partito da Edimburgo. He has left Edinburgh. 97. The preposition " da " is also used in the sense of by, when preceded by a past participle. Ex. Egli e stimato da tutti. He is esteemed by everybody. 98. The preposition " da " is also used in the sense of ft for, like a.- f Ex. Carta da scrivere. Writing paper. Egli combatte (69) da eroe. He fought like a hero. * The preposition "da" has also other meanings which the student will find explained further on, pages 201 and 202. ON THE PREPOSITIONS " DI," " A," " DA," ETC. 99. When " di," " a," " da," and the prepositions " in," in, <{ con," with, "per," for, " su," on, and " fra " or " tra," among, between, are followed by the articles " il," " lo," "la," "!'," " i," " gli," " le," the two words are contracted as shown in the sub- joined table : ioo. Di il into del, and di i into dei,* of the. Ail al, a i ai, to the. Da il dal, da i j . 1 from 1 , , dai, \ u \ the. 1 by [ In il nel, in i nei, in the. Con il ,, col, con i ,, coi, with the. Peril pel, per i pei, for the. Su il ,, sul, su i ,, sui, on the. Fra il ,, fral, ,, fra i frai, among the. 101. Di lo ,, dello, ,, di gli degli, of the. Alo allo, a gH agli, to the. Da lo ,, dallo, ,, da gli , r (from ] ,, da S h 'l by j the< In lo ,, nello, ,, in gli negli, in the, &c. 102. Dila ,, della, ,, di le ,, delle, of the. Ala alia, ale alle, to the. In la ,, nella, ,, in le ,, nelle, in the, &c. 103. Di 1' dell,' di gli degli, of the. AI' all,' a gli agli, to the, &c. VOCABULARY. 11 libro, the book. 11 giardino, the garden. 11 tema,t the exercise. L'albero, the tree. La tavola, the table. 11 ramo, the branch. La d9nna, the woman. 11 pane, the bread. 11 ragazzo, the boy. L' uccello, the bird. La ragazza, the girl. La gabbia, the cage. EXERCISE I.J The boy's (92) book. The girl's exercise. The branch of the tree. The woman in the garden. The bird in the cage. The woman with the bread. The book on the table. The birds (85) among the branches of the trees. In the boys' gardens * Instead of "clei," "ai," "dai,"&c., " de'," "a'," " da'," are often used. 104. t There are only a few nouns masculine ending in a ; they form their plural in i. See rule 397. \ For the numeral adjectives see page 128. 16 ON THE VERB "AVERE.' LESSON II. ON THE VERB "AVERE," TO HAVE. INFINITIVE MOOD. PAST. Avere avuto, to have had. GERUND.* Avendo,t having. PRESENT. Avere, to have. PAST PARTICIPLE. PAST GERUND, Avuto, had. Avendo avuto, having had. INDICATIVE MOOD. IMPERFECT. PAST DEFINITE. PRESENT. I? ho,} Avevo, || Ebbi, i Tu hai, Avevi, Avesti, Egli, or esso, ) TTII cf na; Ella, or essa,) 5s- Aveva ;H 2 Ebbe ; 5 Noi abbiamo, Voi avete, Avevamo, GV, ^ Avevate, V Avemmo, ? Aveste, Eglino, or essi, ") _ M r hanno. Elleno, or esse, ) Av6vano.1i Ebbero. 105 * The Gerund in Italian always remains invariable. Besides a Gerund, most Italian verbs have a Present Participle, ending in " ente," and " end," or in " ante," and "anti." Ex. "Una finestra avente carta, invece di vetri " (Pellico). A U'indow ivhich had paper, instead of glass. But as this form of the verb is seldom used, it is not given in the verbal paradigms, in this grammar. f The e, dotted thus e, has a broad sound, like the a in gate. 106. ^ As the termination of the verb is sufficient to indicate the person and number of the subject in the sentence, the personal pronouns, used as subjects, are not expressed in Italian, except (a) to avoid ambiguity, (6) when two or more pronouns (used as subjects), are employed in the same sentence, (c) when a particular stress is to be laid on the pronoun ; so the Italian for " I have the book," is simply " Ho il libro." 107. "Egli," " ella," " eglino," "elleno," are used only in speaking of persons, whilst "esso," " essa," "essi," "esse," are employed with reference to persons, animals and things. "Eglino" and "elleno" are becoming obsolete; "essi" and " esse " being used instead of them. 108 || Both the first and the third persons singular of the Imperfect Indicative, of all verbs, formerly ended in , but now the general tendency of Italian writers is to make the termination of the first person in o, and that of the third in a ; by this means it is easier to mark the distinction between the first, and the third person singular, without the aid of the personal pronouns. 109. ^f The letter v in the third persons of the Imperfect Indicative of all verbs, except those of the first conjugation, is often omitted. Ex. " avea," " aveano." ON THE VERB " AVERE.' PAST INDEFINITE. PLUPERFECT. PAST ANTERIOR. Ho avuto, -a-i-e, &c. / have had, &>c. * Avevo avuto, &c. / had had, &=c. Ebbi avuto, &c. / had had, &*c. FUTURE. CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Avrb, Avrai, Avra ; S "^i Avrei, Avresti, Avrebbe ; 1: No first pers Abbi, Abbia ; on. I Avremo, 5 Avremmo, s Abbiamo, - Ir Avrete, Avranno. t Avreste, Avrebbero.f ]f Abbiate, Abbiano. 55 J FUTURE ANTERIOR. Avro avuto, &c. I shall have had, &*c. CONDITIONAL PAST. Avrei avuto, &c. I should have had, &c. The Past of the Imperative is seldom used. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. IMPERFECT. Che io abbia, Che tu abbia, Che \ fr I abbia ; Che abbiamo, Che abbiate, Che abbian Che or sej i9 avessi, Che or se tu avessi, ~, f or se egli ) Che l^seella \ avesse ' Che or se avessimo, Che or se aveste, Che or se | |^ | avessero. PAST. Che 19 abbia avuto, &c. That I may have had, &>c. PLUPERFECT. r Che or se io avessi avuto, &c. That or if I might have had, S=c. no. * The Past Participle in Italian is variable ; it ends in o, when it is used in connection with a noun masculine singular ; in a for the feminine singular ; in z for the masculine plural ; and in e for the feminine plural. The rules for the Past Parti- ciple are given further on. For the present the student had better to leave it invari- able, in o. in. t In poetry " avria" is often used instead of " avrei" and "avrebbe," and " avriano" instead of " avrebbero." 112. J The Italian conditional conjunction " se," if, when it precedes a verb used in the present or past tense, is followed by the Imperfect Subjunctive (followed by the Conditional Present), or by the Pluperfect Subjunctive (followed by the Conditional Past). Ex. Se io avessi del denaro, avrei If I had money, I should have degli amici. friends. Se io avessi avuto del danaro, If I had had money, I shou 1 ' 3 avrei avuto degli amici. have had friends. i8 ON THE VERB "AVERE." VOCABULARY. Carlo, Charles. Maria,* Mary. Elisabetta, Elizabeth. Guglielmo,t William. Enrico, Henry. Gi9vanni,J John. La lezione, the lesson. 11 dizionario, the dictionary. La penna, the pen. La grammatica, the grammar. La matita, the pencil. Lo (82) scrittoio, the writing-desk La lettera,|| the letter. 11 pennello, the paint-brush. La carta, the paper. L' U9mo, the man. 11 calamaio, the ink-stand. Gli uomini, the men. La lavagna, the slate. La chiave, the key. 11 temperino, the penknife. La casa, the house, E, and. Qggi, to-day. Sotto, under. Anche, also. leri, yesterday. Vicino a, near to. Gia, already. Domani, to-morrow. Accanto a, by the side of. EXERCISE II. I (106) have the dictionary. Charles has the paper. Mary had (Imp. Ind.) the pen; she had also the grammar. We had Henry's (92) writing-desk. William and John have the ink-stand. Yester- day Elizabeth had (Imp. Ind.) the letter andli the penknife ; she had already had (Pluperf. Ind.) the books. ** I shall have the lesson to-morrow. William and Charles will have the slate andtt ink-stand. The man has the key of the (102) house. The men have had (Past Ind.) the books from (95, 96) Henry. We have John's paint-brushes in the (101) writing-desk, under the table."* 113.* In speaking of women the Italians often put the definite article before their names. Ex. " La Maria." f An e, dotted thus e, has the broad sound of the a in the word gate. J An o, dotted thus o, has the broad sound of the o in the word orphan. Another word frequently used in Italian for pencil is " lapis " (the s pronounced), written the same in the singular as in the plural. || See rule 63, to understand the meaning of the letters in the darker type. 1 14. ^f Ed, instead of c, may be used before a word beginning with a vowel, for the sake of euphony. Ex. ' ' Carlo ed io. " Charles and I. '* This word was given in the previous Vocabulary, and, with all the words which occur in the exercises, is contained in the General Vocabulary at the end of this grammar. 115. ff In Italian the definite article must be repeated before each noun. ON THE MODES OF ADDRESSING PEOPLE IN ITALIAN. 19 LESSON III. i. ON THE MODES OF ADDRESSING PEOPLE IN ITALIAN. 116. The Italians have three ways of addressing one another; they employ the second person singular, " Tu," thou, or the second person plural, " Voi," you, or the third person singular, feminine, " Ella," she. 117. The second person singular, " tu," is used by parents when they speak to their children, and when husband and wife, brothers and sisters speak to one another. This form is used also when speaking to very intimate friends. Ex. Amo la tua conversazione. I like your (thy) conversation. 118. In Italian " tu " is further used, as thou is in English, in poetry, and sometimes to express anger or scorn towards the person addressed. 1 19. The second person plural " voi," is used by ladies and gentlemen towards their inferiors. It is also employed in com- merce. Ex. Voi parlate trcppo. You speak too much. 1 20. But when the Italians wish to show respect to the person they address (whether man or woman) instead of " voi," you, they use the third person singular feminine, " ella," she, which pronoun in that case stands for "Vostra Signoria " (your Lordship, or Ladyship). The words spoken are supposed to be addressed to the title and not to the person. Ex. " Ella ha il temperino," instead of " Voi avete il temperino."* You have the penknife. 121. In speaking to more than one person " loro," or "elleno" (see rule 107), they, which stand for " le Vostre Signorie," or " lor Signori," or " lor Signore " (your Lordships, or Ladyships), are used.* 122. In writing the exercises in this grammar, the student is strongly advised to write as many sentences as he can in the three forms ; that is, in the second and third persons singular, and in the second person plural, as explained in rules 117, 119, and 120, thus : Hai (tu) tuo Ha ella mandate il suo quadro all' esposizione ? Avete (voi) V9stro Have you sent your 'picture to the exhibition ? 123 * All the words in sentences employed in connection with " Ella," " Lei " and " Loro " shotild have the feminine inflection, but many people, ignoring the pro- nouns (" Ella," " Lei " and " Loro' ? ) give to words the masculine or feminine inflec- tion, according as they speak to a woman or a man, to women or men. Ex. To a iiioman : " E Ella stata invitata al ballo ? " ~| To a man : " E Ella stato irivitalo al ballo?" I Have you been To women : " Sono Loro state invitate al ballo ? " f invited to the ball ? To men : " Sono Loro stati invitati al ballo? " 20 ON THE INTERROGATIVE AND NEGATIVE FORMS OF VERBS. 2. ON THE INTERROGATIVE AND NEGATIVE FORMS OF VERBS. 124. In Italian, a verb is conjugated interrogatively, simply by placing the mark of interrogation after it ;* and, in speaking, by raising the voice towards the end of the sentence. | Ex. Avete il libro di Guglielmo ? Have you William's book ? 125. A verb is conjugated negatively, by placing the negative particle " non " before it. Ex. Carlo n9n ha 1' oriuolo. Charles has not the watch. 126. It is very important to notice that in Italian the Present of the Infinitive is used instead of the second person singular of the Imperative Mood, when the verb is used negatively. Ex. Non avere il cappello. Do not (thou) have the hat. Non abbia il cappello. 1 -^ . , ,-, -, T.J- , u . p - ,, \ Do not (you) have the hat. IN on abbiate il cappello. j 127. A verb is conjugated interrogatively-negatively, by placing the negative particle " n9n " before it, and the mark of interroga- tion at the end of the sentence ; in speaking the voice must be raised towards the end of the sentence. Ex. ha ella il libro di Carlo ? Have you not Charles' book ? VOCABULARY. II cappello, the hat. La sciarpa, the scarf. II cappellino, the bonnet. II giornale, the newspaper. L' abito,f the coat. II franc9bollo, the postage-stamp. La vesta, the dress. II danaro, the money. Si, yes. Ma, but. Q...O, either... or. No, no. Quando, when. ISfon (verb) ne...ne, neither... nor. EXERCISE III. William has Henry's (92) coat. Has Elizabeth the money ? Yes. We (106) have neither the newspaper nor the postage- stamp. Have you (122, a) Charles' grammar ? No, I have not (125) the books. When shall we have (124) the dictionary ? To-day or to-morrow. Do not have (126) the bonnet, but have the dress. * A personal pronoun is sometimes required to avoid ambiguity. Ex. " Ha egli il libro ? " Has he the book ? t When an interrogative sentence begins with an interrogative pronoun or an adverb, the tone of the voice in Italian is much the same as in English. Ex. " Perche non venne ieri ? " Why did you not come yesterday ? J See rule 63, in order to understand the meaning of the letters in the darker type. 128. The auxiliaries do, does, did, are not translated into Italian. ON THE INTERROGATIVE AND NEGATIVE FORMS OF VERBS. 21 VOCABULARY. Mio padre, my* father. 11 lorof nipote, their nephew. Mia madre, my mother. 11 signore, the gentleman, Tuo fratello, thy brother. La signora, the lady. Tua sorella. thy sister. 11 mio:}: sc9lare, my pupil. Suo figlio, his or her son. 11 tempo, the time. N9stro cugino, our cousin. La canzone, the song. \ 7 9stro zio, your uncle. L'inchiostro. the ink. Gennaio, January. Maggio, May. Settembre, September. Febbraio, February. Giugno, June. Ottobre, October. Marzo, March. Luglio, July. Novembre, November. Aprile, April. Agosto, August, Dicembre, December. Ecc9lo, ] here he is, 009!!, m. > here it is, Ecc9la, J here she is. Ecc9le, f. here they are. Prima di, before. Dopo, after. Mentre, whilst. EXERCISE IV. My sister has the ink-stand, but she has not (125) the ink. Charles has my (131) money. My brother has Henry's song. The woman had (Imp. Ind.) my mother's dress. We had already had (Pluperf. Ind.) our (129) uncle's letter. Have you (122, 124) the postage-stamp, for the (100) newspaper ? Yes, here it is. Have you William's exercises (104) ? Yes, here they are. Has John my pupil's pens (100, 131) ? Yes, here they are. I shall have (the) time for my lesson to-day. Their (130) nephew shall have my coat and hat after May.|| We shall not have my father's writing desk before to-morrow. We should have had the ink. 129. * My, thy, his, her, our, your, are translated by " mio," " tuo," " suo," " nostro," "vostro;" "mia," " tua," "sua," "nostra," "vostra," before names of kindred in the singular. Ex. " mio padre," my father. 130. t But before "loro" and when the names of kindred are in the plural, the article is used. Ex. " II loro nipote," their nephew. " I miei fratelli, my brothers. 131. I Before any nouns but names of kindred, my, thy, his, her, our, your, are translated in the singular by " il mio," " il tuo," "il suo," "il nostro," &c., and in the plural by " i miei," " i tuoi," " i suoi," "inostri," " i vostri," "iloro." Ex. " II mio scolare," my pupil. 132. "Mio," "tuo,"&c., "ilmio," "iltuo,"&c., must be repeated before each noun, when there are several. " Ecco qui mia madre e mia sorella," here are my mother and sister. || See rule 74. 22 ON THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE. LESSON IV. ON THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE. 133. The partitive articles some and any, are translated into Italian by " del," " dello," " della," to express quantity. Ex. H9 comprato della carta I have bought some paper e dell' inchiostro. and ink. 134. The partitive articles some and any are translated by"dei," " degli," " delle," to express number. Ex. Gli mandai degli abiti fran- I sent him some French cesi*e delle ar mi inglesi. clothes and English arms. 135. When some means a limited number, f it is translated either by " qualche," which is invariable, and is followed by a noun in the singular, or by " alcuno," which agrees in gender and number with the noun to which it refers. Ex. Vado a comprare qualche I am going to buy some (a few), libro spagnu9lo. Spanish books. Non aveva seco che alcuni He only had with him some amici. (a few) friends. 136. The partitive articles " del," " dello," " della," " qualche," " alcuno," " alcuni," " alcune," must be repeated before each noun, when there are several. Ex. H9 comprato della carta I have bought some paper e dei libri. and books. 137. When some and any are omitted, or could be omitted in English, the partitive articles are omitted, or could be omitted in Italian. Ex. V'erano uomini, d9nne, e There were men, women, persino fanciullu and even children. H9 veduto in Inghilterra I have seen in England cavalli bellissimi. very fine horses. 138. When in a sentence there is the partitive article " del," " della," &c., in a subsequent sentence referring to it, in Italian, the partitive article must be represented by the pronoun " ne,'* some, of it, of them ; and the verb must be repeated in full. Ex. Ha, or ha ella del denaro ? Have you any money ? Si, ne ho. Yes, I have. Avremo dell' acqua ? Shall we have some water ? Si, ne avremo. Yes, we shall. * An s dotted thus s, has the soft sound of the s in the word rose. I 39- t But when the number is very limited (few, a few] some is translated by " pochi," m., or " poche," f. Ex. Egli aveva pochi amici. He had few friends. ON THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 23 VOCABULARY. L'oro (21), gold. L'acciaio, steel. II lottone, brass. L' argento, silver. II ferro, iron. Lo stagno, tin. II platino, platina. II rame, copper. II piombo, lead. EXERCISE V. I have some (133) silver. Has your brother any iron ? Yes; he has some iron, (136) copper, and brass. Mary had (Imp. Ind.) some paper, but she had not any pens. Charles has neither the grammar, nor the dictionary. My father has some money. We have not any ink. Have we any postage-stamps? Yes, we have (138). Yesterday we had (Imp. Ind.) my uncle's dictionary. Have you (124) any pencils ? No, I have not any. Henry and William have money, but John has not any (138). ON THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 140. The indefinite article a or an is translated into Italian by " un,"* before a masculine noun beginning either with a consonant or a vowel. Ex. Un giorno felice. A happy day. Un U9mo amabile. An amiable man. 141. The indefinite article a or an is translated by " uno " before a masculine noun beginning with an 5 followed by another con- sonant, or with a z. Ex. Uno scolare diligente. A diligent pupil. Uno zio ricchissimo. A very rich uncle. 142. The indefinite article a or an is translated by " una," before a feminine noun beginning with a consonant. Ex. Una signora francese. A French lady. 143. The indefinite article a or an is translated by " un'," before a feminine noun beginning with a vowel. Ex. Un' anima sensibile. A sensitive soul. 144. When in a sentence there is an indefinite article, " un," "uno," &c., in a subsequent sentence referring to it, the indefinite article preceded by the pronoun "ne" (of them"), must be repeated, if the answer be in the affirmative ; but if the answer be negative " ne " only is expressed ; " uno " and " una " being omitted. Ex. Ha ella un dizionario ? Have you a dictionary ? Si, ne h9 uno. No, non ne ho. Yes I have. No, I have not. 145. * But when a or an are numeral adjectives they are translated by " uno " or " una." Ex. Ella ha due libri, ma io non ne ho You have two books, but I have che uno. but one. ON THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. VOCABULARY. L'aria,* air. La luce, light. Un sec9lo, Un anno, Un mese, Una settimana, Un giorno, di, Un' ora, Un minuto, Una chiesa. Un palazzo, Una strada, 11 fuoco,'f' L'acqua, fire. 11 fumo, water. 11 vento,J the smoke, the wind. Monday. Tuesday. Wednesday. Thursday. Friday. Saturday. Sunday. a room, the chair. a century. a year. a month. a week, a day. an hour, a minute. Lunedi, (69) Martedi, Merc9ledi, Venerdi, Sabato, D9menica, a church, a palace, a street. Una stanza, 1 Una camera, J La sedia, Perche ? why Perche, because. Mai ? ever ? never. N9, mai, giammai, 1 N9n (verb) mai, J Spesso, sovente, often. Sempre, always. Subito, at once. Fra P9co, very soon. EXERCISE VI. Mary has a pencil. We have a writing-desk. Have you (124) ever had a lesson from my (131) master ? Never. Charles has never had a penknife. When shall I have my dictionary ? Very soon, on|| Friday, or Saturday (74). To-morrow Elizabeth will have a dress, and Mary will have a bonnet. Henry shall not have my brother's slate. Shall we not (127) have some water ? Yes, we shall (138). William, do not (126) have (thou) any (133) fire in your (thy) room to-day. He had (Imp. Ind.) his book onlf a chair, in my cousin's garden. We shall have the book at once. * See rule 63, in order to understand the meaning of the letters in the darker type. f Notice that an o preceded by a u has always the broad sound of the o in the word orphan. \ An e, dotted thus e, has the broad sound of the a in the word gate. 146. Masters translated into Italian by " maestro," when it means a teacher, and by f< padrone," when it means a master (an owner). 147. || On is not translated into Italian before Monday, Tuesday, &c., nor before any name of time. Ex. " II primo gennaio," On the first of January. 148. ^f The preposition " su," on, upon, takes an r (" sur "), before a vowel, for the sake of euphony. Ex. L'ho trovato sur una tavola. I found it on a table. ON THE VERB "ESSERE. LESSON V. THE VERB "ESSERE," TO BE. INFINITIVE MOOD. PRESENT. PAST. Essere, to be. Essere stato,* to have been. GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PAST GERUND. Essendo, being. Stato-a-i-e, been. Essendo stato, having been. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. IMPERFECT. PAST DEFINITE. Sono, ?ro,J Fui, Sei, >--( Eri, ^ Fosti, -N E'; (69) Siamo,t Siete, 1 Era ; fa Eravamo, r> Eravate, 1 Fu; f> \ Fummo, T Foste, 1 to \ Sono. Erano. Furono. PAST INDEFINITE. PLUPERFECT. PAST ANTERIOR. Sono stato, &c. Ero stato, &c 7 have been, &c. I had been, <&c Fui stato, &c. 7 had been, &c. FUTURE. CONDITIONAL . IMPERATIVE MOOD. Saro, Sarei, . No first person. Sarai, ^ Saresti, ^ Sii, ^ to Sara ; Saremo, i^ Sarebbe ; js" Saremmo, S. Sia ; ^- Siamo, ^ Sarete, Saranno. fy Sareste, Sarebbero. fy Siate, Siano. f FUTURE ANTERIOR. CONDITIONAL PAST. The Past of the Sard stato, &c. Sarei stato, &c. Imperative is I shall have been, &>c. I should have been, &c. seldom used. 149. * Notice that the compound tenses of " Ssere," are formed by using the same verb as auxiliary, or that its past participle "stato," is variable. Ex. Sono stato, or stata (no) a Parigi. I have been to Paris. 150. + The following forms are often used in poetry : "semo," instead of "siamo, " sete," instead of " siete," "fue," instead of " fu," " furo," instead of " furono, "fia," instead of "sara," " fiano," or " fieno," instead of "saranno," "saria, instead of "sarei" and " sarebbe," " sariano," instead of " sarebbero," "fora, instead of "sarebbe" and " sarebbero," "sie," instead of "sia," and "sieno instead of "siano." % Or "era"; see rule 108. 26 ON THE VERB " ESSERE. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. IMPERFECT. Che 19 sia, Che tu sia, Che W sia ; Che siamo, Che siate, Che [|^j,] siano, PAST. Che i9 sia state, &c. That I may have been, &c. Che or se(ii2) io fossi, Che or se tu fossi, Che KSgg] fosse; Che or se fossimo, Che or se foste, Che [^Sj fossero. PLUPERFECT. Che or se i9 fossi stato, &c. That I might have been, &>c. VOCABULARY. Buono,* good. Uno, i. Primo a, I. Felice,* happy. Due, 2. Secondo a, II. Grande, tall, large. Tre, 3- Terzo a, Ill, Picc9lo, small, little. Quattro, 4- Quarto a, IV. Bello, beautiful, fine. Cinque, 5- Quinto a, V. Org9glioso, proud. Sei, 6. Sesto a, VI. Dove, where. Dentro, within. Lontano, far. Cotesto,f that. Qui, here. Ftwri, without. Questo, this. Qiiello,t that. EXERCISE VII. John is tall, but his brother Charles is little. This church is beautiful. Where is Elizabeth ? She (106, a ) is here. These tables are small, but they are good. Where are Henry and John ? They are not (125) here ; they are in our uncle's garden. Where shall we be on (147) Thursday? We shall be in our (100, 129) cousin's room. Where have you been (124, 149) ? I have been in my brother's room. Will you be here on Wednesday ? Yes ; I shall be either here, or at my sister's house. Where are my pens ? They are in that (152) writing desk. Be (122) good, William, and you will be happy. Do (128, 122, 126) not be proud. 151. * Adjectives agree in gender and number with the nouns they qualify ; those ending in o, change the o into a for the feminine, and form their masculine plural by changing o into i, and their feminine plural by changing a into e, as " buono," " buona," "buoni," "buone." Adjectives ending in e do not change for the feminine ; the plural for both genders is formed by changing the e into an i ; as " felice," " felici." 152. t "Cotesto," "cotesta," &c., mean that, near the person spoken to. T 53- 1 " Quello," "quella," c., mean thai, distant from the speaker, and the person addressed. ON THE VERB " ESSERE.' THE VERB "ESSERE," WITH CI " AND "VI." 154. The verb " Essere " is very often employed as an im- personal verb, with the adverbs " ci " and " vi."* Esserci, or esservi, to be there or in //, &c. Esserci stato, to have been there, &c. Essendoci, being there, &c. Essendoci stato, having been there, &c. / C'e, or v'e, there is, or there is in it, &c. 1 Ci sono, or vi sono, there are, &c. ( C' era, or v' era, there ivas, &c. \ C' erano, or v' erano, there were, &c. f C' e stato, or stata, there has been, &c. \ Ci sono stati, or state, there have been,8tc* there will be, &c. ' j- there would be, Sac. NEGATIVELY. Non c' e or v' e, there is not, &c. Non ci or vi sono, there are not, &c. INFINITIVE MOOD. INDICATIVE MOOD. / PRESENT. \ PAST. GERUND. PAST GER. PRESENT. IMPERFECT. PAST INDEF. FUTURE. CONDITIONAL MOOD. INTERROGATIVELY. C' e or v' e ? is there ? &c. Ci or vi sono ? are there ? &c. ( Ci or vi sara, ) \ Ci or vi saranno, J Ci or vi sarebbe, Ci or vi sarebbero VOCABULARY. II castello, La torre, the castle, the tower. II fanciullo, the parlour, the child. 11 medesimo, 1 ,, P9co, (21) a little. Troppo, too much. Lo stesso, j sam e. Molto, very, much. Tr9ppo poco, too little. EXERCISE VIII. Charles is the first, I. (106 b) am the second, and Elizabeth is the third. My brother's house is too large. Where is Mary ? She is in my sister's room. Is there a man in the street ? Yes ; there is a man and a child. . Is there a table in our parlour ? No ; there are three chairs, but there is no (125) table. There was a small inkstand in my uncle's room. There is too much ink in this pen. Is there a pencil in my brother's writing-desk ? No, there are three pens and some paper. There will be a book for the pupil, and a writing-desk for the master (146). * " Ci " means here and in it, " vi " means there and in it, but the two words are used indiscriminately ; "ci " is used oftener than " vi." 28 ON THE VERBS. LESSON VI. ON THE VERBS. 155. Verbs are of five kinds ; Active,* Passive, Neuter, Pro- nominal, and Impersonal ; besides the two Auxiliaries, " Avere " and " Essere,"fJ which have already been given. 156. Verbs are either Regular, Irregular, or Defective.! 157. Italian regular verbs are generally classified into three conjugations, which are distinguished by the termination of the Present of the Infinitive Mood. The first ends in ARE, as COMPRARE, to btty.\\ ,, second ERE, as CreoERE, to believe.^ ,, third ,, ,, IRE, as FINIRE, to finish ** 158. * Active Verbs are either Active Transitive, or Active Intransitive. 159. An Active Transitive Verb is a verb expressing an action which passes to the object in the sentence, without the help of a preposition. In the phrase " Giovanni ha comprato il \i\xo," John bought the book, "Giovanni" is the subject, "ha com- prato " is the verb, active transitive, and " il libro " is the object, called direct object. 160. An Active Intransitive Verb is a verb expressing an action which passes to the object in the sentence through a preposition. In the phrase, " Maria ha parlato a Carlo," Mary spoke to Charles, "Maria" is the subject, "ha parlato," the verb, active intransitive, and "a Carlo" is the object, in this case called indirect object. 161. t "Avere" is really an active transitive verb, and " Essere " \sreallya. neuter verb, but they are generally called auxiliary verbs, because the compound tenses of all other verbs are formed with the help of either of them. J See rule 63, in order to understand the meaning of the letters in the darker type. Page 66 and following contain all the important irregular and defective verbs used in the Italian language, arranged alphabetically. 162. || There are altogether about 7,000 verbs in Italian, of which 6,000 are of the first conjugation, and are all regular, like " comprare," to buy, except three : " Andare," to go ; " Dare," to give ; and " Stare," to stay, to be in health, to dwell, and to remain. 163. ^f The second conjugation includes 500 verbs, of which only 60 are regular : of the 440 irregular, 60 end in " ere," long, (Parole piane, like " temere," to /far), and 380 in " ere," short ; (Parole sdrViQciqle, like " Credere," to believe). 164. ** There are 500 verbs of the third conjugation, in " ire ; " of these 430 are regular, conjugated either like " Finire," to finish (390 of them), or like " Servire," to serve (40 of them) ; 70 are irregular. ON THE FIRST CONJUGATION IN "ARE." ON THE CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBS. MODEL OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION IN "ARE." "COMPRARE," TO BUY. INFINITIVE MOOD. PRESENT. PAST. Compr are,* to buy. Averf compr ato, to have bought. GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PAST GERUND. Compr ato-a-i-e, Avendo compr ato, Compr ando,J buying. PRESENT. Compr o, Compr i, Compr a ; Compr iamo, Compr ate, Compr ano. PAST INDEFINITE. bought. having bought. INDICATIVE MOOD. IMPERFECT. PAST DEFINITE. Compr avo,|| Compr avi, Compr ava ; Compr avamo, Compr avate, Compr avano. Compr ai, Compr asti, Compr b ; Compr ammo, Compr aste, Compr aronoA PAST ANTERIOR. PLUPERFECT. Ho comprato, &c. Avevo comprato, &c. Ebbi comprato, &c. / have bought, &>c. I had bought, &>c. I had bought, &>c. 165. * A verb consists of two parts ; the root which is invariable, and the ter- mination, which varies to indicate mood, tense, person and number. In the verb "comprare," " comp " is the root, and " are " the termination. 166. t The compound tenses of all active verbs are formed with " avere." J The Present Participle of " comprare " (see rule 105) is " comprante. " seldom used. The Pres. Part, of "parlare" is " parlante," of " amare," " amante," and so of all the verbs of the first conjugation. 167. The Past Participle of active transitive verbs remains invariable, that is to say it ends in o, when the direct object in the sentence follows it. Ex. " Ho comprato tre libri. " / have bought three books. But when the direct object precedes the past participle, the latter is variable. Ex. " Ecco i libri che ho comprati." Here are the books I have bought. 1 68. The Past Participle of active intransitive verbs always remains invariable. Ex. " Ci hanno parlato. " They spoke to us. || Or " comprava ; " see rule 108. 169. f In poetry " compraro " is often used instead of " comprarono ; " in the same way "parlaro," instead of " parlarono," they spoke, " andaro," instead of " andarono," they went, etc. ON THE FIRST CONJUGATION IN " ARE.' FUTURE. Compr erb, Compr erai, Compr era ; Compr eremo, Compr erete, fy Compr eranno. FUTURE ANTERIOR. Avrb comprato, &c. / shall have bmight, &>c CONDITIONAL. Compr erei,* Compr eresti, Compr erebbe ; Compr eremmo, Compr ereste, Compr erebbero. CONDITIONAL PAST. Avrei comprato, &c. IMPERATIVE MOOD. No first person. Compr a, Compr i ; Compr iamo, Compr ate, Compr ino. The Past of the Imperative is / should have bought, &>c. seldom used. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. IMPERFECT. Che io compr i, Che tu compr i, Che [jlf,"] compr i; Che compr iamo, Che compr iate, Che [] compr ino. PAST. Che io abbia comprato, &c. That I may have bought, &*c. Che or se (112) io compr assi, Che or se tu compr assi, Che [Crtecfia] compr asse ; Che or se compr assimo, Che or se compr aste, Che [S] compr assero. PLUPERFECT. Che or se i9 avessi comprato, &c. That I might have bought, &c. IMPORTANT REMARKS. 170. Verbs ending in "care," and "gare," as " peccare," to sin, and " pregare," to pray, require an h after the c and g, when followed by e or i, because the c and g are to be pronounced hard throughout the conjugation. Ex. " pecco," " pecchi," " pecca," " pecchiamo," &c.; " prego," " preghi," " prega," " preghiamo," &c. 171. Verbs ending in " ciare " and " giare," as " scacciare," to drive away, and " mangiare," to eat, drop the i before another i, or an e, as " scaccero," &c. ; " mangerei," &c. 172. Verbs ending in " iare," as "9diare," to hate, retain the * in the root when the termination is marked by one i only. Ex. " 9dio," " odii," "odia," " odiamo," &c. 173. Verbs ending in " gnare," as " regnare," to reign, omit the i of the termination of the first person plural of the Present Indicative. Ex. " regno," " regni," "regna," " regnamo," &c. 174. * In poetry " compreria " is often used instead of " comprerei," and " comprerehhe," and " compreriano " instead of " comprer^bbero " ; in the same way " parleria," instead of " parlerei " and " parlerebbe," &c. ON THE FIRST CONJUGATION IN " ARE.' REGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. All9ggiare, to lodge. Licenziare, to dismiss. Amare, to love, to like. Migli9rare, to improve. Augurare,* to augur, to wish. Minacciare, to threaten. Baciare, to kiss. Mirare, to gaze, to look at. Ballare, to dance. Pesare, to weigh. Biasimare,* to blame. ?9rtare, to carry. Caricare,* to load. Predicare,* to preach. Cercare, to look for. Privare, to deprive. Coniugare,* to conjugate. Raccontare, to relate. Disprezzare, to despise. Rispettare, to respect. Disputare,* to dispute. Rubare, to steal. Evitare,* to avoid. Scappare, to escape. Fumare, to smoke. Scherzare, to joke. Giudicare,* to judge. Spaventare, to frighten. Guadagnare, to earn. Sperare, to hope. Guardare, to look. Stampare, to print. Guastare, to spoil. Stimare, to esteem. Imparare, to learn. Stracciare, to tear. Ingannare, to deceive. Tagliare, to cut. Mendicare,* to beg. Trascurare, to neglect. Meritare,* to merit. Volare, to fly. 175. The following verbs, and about thirty more, have two past participles ; a long one, which expresses an action, and an ab- breviated one, which is a kind of adjective : Adattare, to adapt. Adornare, to adorn. Avvezzare, to accustom. Caricare, to load. Saziare, to satiate, satisfy. Svegliare, to wake up. H9 caricato il mio schi9ppo. II mio schi9ppo e carico. Ex. adattato, and adatto. ") adornato, and adorno. j S avvezzato, and avvezzo. ! -1^ caricato, and carico. [" saziato, and sazio. j ,* svegliato, and sveglio. J I have loaded my gun. My gun is loaded. 176. * The " Tonic Accent " in all the regular verbs of the first conjugation is the same as in " Comprare," but in the verbs in the list above, marked with an asterisk (*), and in about seventy more, the three persons in the singular of the Present Indi- cative, Imperative, and Subjunctive are " sdrUCciple," and the third persons plural of the same tenses are " bisdrUCciole." Ex. Auguro, auguri, augura ; Auguriamo, augurate, augurano. ON THE FIRST CONJUGATION IN " ARE.' L' Inghilterra, La Francia, La Germania, L' Italia,. La Spagna, VOCABULARY. England. Inglese, France. Francese, (48) Germany. Tedesco. Italy. Italiano, Spain. Spagnuolo, Englishman, English. Frenchman, French. German. Italian. Spaniard, Spanish. La situazione, the situation. Lap9rta,l'uscio, the gate, door. Questa citta, this town, city. La lingua, tongue, the language. Facile, Difficile, easy, difficult. P9litico, Commerciale, political, commercial. NOTE. In this and the following exercises the verbs are given in the Present of the Infinitive Mood ; it is left to the student to put them in the proper mood, tense, number, and person. EXERCISE IX. I do (128) not (125) find (a) the Italian* language difficult. William speaks (b) French, f but does not speak German. I am buying J some (134) books for my brother. I blame (c) my sister, because she was listening (d) at the door. Shall you (117 122) vote (e) to-morrow ? Yes. John found this letter on (148) a chair, in my brother's room. I have sent (f) Henry's Spanish grammar to my mother. Charles always|| studies (g) in our uncle's garden. We admire (h) the situation of this town. I have left (i) William's book on my writing-desk. Elizabeth will play, (j) I (106, b) shall sing, (k) and Charles will draw (1). (a) Trovare. (b) Parlare. (c) Biasimare. (d) Ascoltare. (e) Votare. (f) Mandare. (g) Studiare. (h) Ammirare. (i) Lasciare. (j) Suonare. (k) Cantare. (1) Disegnare. 177. * Adjectives indicating shape, colour, and nationality are put after the noun they qualify, in Italian. Ex. La lingua italiana. The Italian language. 178. t English, P'rench, &c., meaning the English, the French language, &c., are also translated by " 1' inglese," " il francese," &c., or " la lingua inglese," " la lingua francese," &c. X 79- t The English expressions "I am buying," " She was listening," " I shall be writing," &c. , are translated into Italian as if they were " I buy," "she listened" (Imp. Ind.), "I shall write," &c. 180. S Translate as if it were "has found," because, in Italian, when the time at which an action occurred is not stated, the verb must be put in the Past Indefinite. 181. || " Sempre," always, and " mai," ever, never, are generally placed after the verb. ON THE FIRST CONJUGATION IN "ARE." 33 VOCABULARY. L' Europa, Europe. Europeo,* European. L' America, America. Americano, American. La Sc9zia, Scotland. Scozzese, Scotchman, Scotch. L' Irlanda, Ireland. Irlandese, Irishman, Irish. La sottoveste, the waistcoat. leri sera,f last night. II mondo, the world. Un quadro, a picture. Una sc9perta, a discovery. La larghezza, the breadth. Una rivoluzione, a revolution. La lunghezza, the length. La riunione, the meeting. Una ciliegia, a cherry. Una regola, a rule. Dell' uva, some grapes. II pianoforte, the pianoforte. Del vino, some wine. Questa mattina, this morning. Dell' acquavite, some brandy. EXERCISE X. I have bought two Italian (177) books, one (145) for Henry, and one for William. You (106 bjwere dining (179) (a), whilst I was studying. Mary will embroider (b) a waistcoat for my father. The discovery of (the) America caused (c) (Past Def.) a revolution in the commercial world. When I entered (d)J the room he was working (e). Did you speak (Past Def.) at the meeting last night ? No, I did not (125) speak (Past Def.). I shall explain (f) (170) this rule this evening. I shall have built (g) my house before October (74). Measure (h) (122) the length and (115) breadth of this room, before $ buying the pianoforte. We shall preserve (i) these cherries with (in the) brandy. If (112) I had money, I would buy this picture. (a) Pranzare. (b) Ricamare. (c) Cagionare. (d) Entrare. (e) Lavorare. (f) Spiegare. (g) Fabbricare. '(h) Misurare. (i) Conservare. * Notice that in the terminations " eo," "ea," "ei," and " ee " the e has the broad sound of a in the word gate. 182. t "Sera" means evening. "leri sera" means yesterday evening. Last night, meaning the night time, is translated by "Questa notte," or "La notte passata." 183. \ " Enlrare," to enter, is a neuter verb, and is always followed by " in." Ex. Entrai nel teatro alle sei. I entered the theatre at six o'clock. 184. All prepositions (except " dopo," after,) in Italian are followed by the Infinitive Present, or Past. Ex. Prima di andare a Parigi. Before going to Paris. Prima di aver parlato. Before having spoken. 185. The preposition "dopo," after, is always followed by the Past of the Infinitive. Ex. Partiro dopo aver parlato. I shall start after having spoken. 3 34 ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. LESSON VII. ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. PERSONAL PRONOUNS USED AS SUBJECTS* OF VERBS. 1 86. The personal pronouns are translated into Italian as follows : lo, /. Noi, We. Tu, Thou. Voi, You. Egli, Ei,oyEsso, He, it.\ m. Essi or Eglino, \ Ella or Essa, She, it, you (120). f. Esse or Elleno, J 2 A W* ( I21 )' 187. The pronouns "egli," " ella," " eglino," and " elleno," are used only in speaking of persons, whilst "esso," " essa," " essi," and " esse," are often employed with reference to persons, animals, and things, and are used both as the subjects and objects of verbs. " Eglino " and " elleno " are becoming obsolete ; " essi " and " esse " being used instead of them. Ex. Egli parla francese. He speaks French. Ei n9n sapeva che fare del pa- He did not know what to do ne che gli gettavo. (Pellico.) with the bread I threw him. Essi andarono a Parigi. They went to Paris. 1 88. As the termination of the verb, in Italian, is sufficient to indicate the person and number of the subject in the sentence, the personal pronouns, " 19," " Tu," " Egli," &c., are not expressed, except (a) when two or more nouns or pronouns are used as subjects in the same sentence ; (b) in the present and imperfect tenses of the Subjunctive Mood, to avoid ambiguity; (c] when a particular stress is laid on the pronoun. Ex. Mentre 19 scrivo questa lettera, Whilst I write this letter, you voi preparerete i miei bauli. will prepare my trunks. Se i9 parlassi, sarei ruinato. If I spoke, I should be ruined. 19 parlo quando bisogna. I do speak when it is needful. 189. The personal pronouns " io," " tu," " egli," &c., are sometimes accompanied by " stesso," " stessa," or " medesimo," " medesima," &c., self, to express emphasis. Ex. L' 119 scritto i9 stesso (or medesimo), I wrote it myself. 190. * A noun, or pronoun is called the subject of a verb when it represents the person or thing which does, or receives the action expressed by the verb. Ex. Pietro agisce bene ; egli e stimato. Peter acts well ; he is esteemed. In which sentence " Pietro " is the subject of " agisce," and " egli " of " e stimato." 191. + There is no neuter gender in Italian ; therefore the pronoun it must be translated into Italian by a masculine or feminine pronoun. ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 35 PERSONAL PRONOUNS USED AS OBJECTS OF VERBS. THE CONJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 192. When there is only one pronoun used as a direct,* or as an indirectf object, in the same sentence, the English pronouns me, thee, him, etc., and to me, to thee, to him, etc., are translated as follows : DIRECT OBJECTS. INDIRECT OBJECTS. Mi, me. Mi, to me. Ti, thee. Ti, to thee. Lo or esso, him or it (191). Gli, to him. La or essa, her, you (120) or it. Le, to her, you or it. g- (himself, herself, g. (to himself, to herself, (itself or themselves. (to itself or to themsel- Ci or ne,i us. Ci or ne,J to us. [ves. Vi, vou. Vi, to you. Li or essi, them, mas. (A)~Loroorgli, to them, mas. Le ox esse, tf/zw, fern. (A) Loro ox le, to #/#, fern. THE CONJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS PLACED BEFORE THE VERB. 193. The pronouns given above ARE, AS A RULE, PLACED BEFORE THE VERB. Ex. Egli mi parlo con rispetto. He spoke to me with respect. N9n ci hanno mai invitati. They never invited us. Gli parlerb domani.|| I shall speak to him to-morrow. 194. * A noun, or pronoun is called the direct object of a verb when it represents the person, or thing which receives the action of the verb directly, that is, without passing through a preposition. Ex. Egli chiamb Carlo e me. He called Charles and me. In the sentence above " Carlo " and " me " are the direct objects of " chiamo." t A noun, or pronoun is called the indirect object of a verb when it represents the person, or thing which receives the action of the verb indirectly, that is, through a preposition. Ex. " Egli mi par!6," he spoke to me. In the sentence above " mi" (a me) is the indirect complement of " par!6." 195- t " Ne " is sometimes used instead of " ci," tis, and to us. Ex. L' amicizia tua ne piace. (Tasso.) Your friendship pleases (to) us. 196. Notice that instead of "a loro," or " loro," in modern Italian, "gli" (mas.), and " le " (fern.), are often used. Ex. Non gli (or le) presterei del denaro. I would not lend them money. 197. || In many cases in which, according to rule 193, the conjunctive personal pronoun ought to precede the verb, it is placed after it, and joined to it, to give force to the language. If the verb ends with an accented vowel, as " mand5," he or she sent, the consonant of the pronoun, except the g of "gli," is doubled, and the accent suppressed. Ex. Essa guardavami sovente. She often looked at me. Egli mandommi a Milano. He sent me to Milan. N.B. It is much better for the beginner to follow rule 193. 36 ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. THE CONJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS PLACED AFTER THE VERB. 198. The conjunctive pronouns " mi," " ti," " gli," &c., ARE PLACED AFTER THE VERB, AND JOINED TO IT (that is why they are called Conjunctive Pronouns), when they are used with verbs in the Infinitive, used Affirmatively*; in which case the final " e " of the Infinitive is dropped. Ex. Mio padre desidera di mandar- My father desires to send me mi a Venezia. to Venice. 199. The conjunctive pronouns " mi," " ti," " gli," &c., are placed after the Gerund, used Affirmatively,* and joined to it. Ex. Essa lo calmo parlandogli She calmed him by speaking to con molta b9nta. him very kindly. 200. The conjunctive pronouns " mi," " ti," " gli," &c., are placed after the Past Gerund, and joined to it ; in which case the auxiliary, " avendo " or " essendo," is omitted, and the Past Participle alone is expressed, and is variable.! Ex. Pagatimi (used instead of Having paid me for the book, avend9mi pagato) i libri, he went away, andb via. Adagiatasi(essend9siJ adagia- Having seated herself on the ta) sulla sedia, essa narro le chair, she narrated her ad- sue avventure. ventures. 201. The conjunctive pronouns "mi," " ti," "gli," &c., are placed after the second person singular, and the first and second persons plural of the Imperative, used affirmatively , and are joined to them. Ex. Parlami ora caro fratello. Speak to me now, dear brother. Mandateci|| un mazzo di fiori. Send us a bunch of flowers. 202. * When the Infinitive (see rule 126) and the Gerund are preceded by a negative, the pronouns are sometimes put before the verb. Ex. Non ti scordar di me. Do not forget me. Non gli piacendo la stanza. As he did not like the room. 203. t Notice that this rule of leaving out " avendo " or " essendo " in the Past Gerund holds good whether there is a pronoun or not. Ex. Comprato (avendo comprato) il Having bought the horse, he went cavallo, ando via. away. 204. J Notice that in the compound tenses of reflective verbs (see page 59). " CSsere " is used. 205. When the Imperative is used negatively, the Conjunctive Pronouns precede the verbs, according to rule 193. Ex. Non mi parlare ora, caro fratello. Do not speak to me now, dear brother. 206. || Here the student is reminded that, instead of "voi," you, the Italians. very often use " Ella," your Lordship or Ladyship (see rule 120) ; in which case the pronouns precede the verbs, according to rule 193. Ex. Ci mandi un mazzo di fiori. Send us a bunch of flowers. ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 37 Londra, London. Parigi, Paris. Roma, Rome. VOCABULARY. Firenze, Florence. Glasgovia, Glasgow. Dublino, Dublin. Napoli, Naples. Venezia, Venice. Geneva, Genoa. Federico, Frederick. Giorgio, George. Od9ardo, Edward. Giacomo, James. Filippo, Philip. Giuseppe, Joseph. Margherita, Margaret. Luigia, Louisa. Francesca, Frances. II caffe, coffee. II te, tea. II latte, milk. La crema, cream. II butirro, butter. L*9lio, oil. Lo zucchero, sugar. L' aceto, vinegar. La cioccolata, chocolate. EXERCISE XL Where did you (120, 122) buy (have you bought) this coffee? I bought it (192, 193) in* London. Does (128) Edward speak Italian ? Yes, he does.f Where did you study (have you studied) the French language ? I studied (have studied) it in France. Has Louisa sent to-day's newspaper to my father ? Yes ; she sent (has sent) it this morning. Charles always speaks to me (193) when he meets (a) me. My father taught (b) us yesterday, and will teach us to-day. My mother never (non. . . mai, 181) sends us (193) here. I shall not speak to him (193) to-day. Have you bought any sugar ? Yes, I have (138, 208). George has made me (193) a present of (c) some Italian books. If (112) they had any (133) money, they would send (to) him some tea and (136), bread. (a) Incontrare. (b) Insegnare. (c) Regalare (to make a present of). 207. * The prepositions in and to are translated into Italian by "a," before the name of a town, and by " in " before the name of a continent, an empire, a kingdom, a duchy, or a province. Ex. And5 a Parigi, in Francia. He went to Paris, in France. 208. + In answering a question, the verb contained in the question, and not merely the translation of " I do," "he does," " it does," " I have," " he did," " I will," &c., must be expressed in the answer, in Italian, and the verb must be in the same tense as in the question ; and if there is a noun in the question, that noun also must be represented in the answer by a pronoun, agreeing in gender and number with the noun it represents. Ex. Giovanni, parla il tedesco ? SI, lo parla. Does John speak German ? Yes, he does. 209. The above rule holds good also when "Id," " I did," " I have," &c., have reference to a previous verb in the sentence. Ex. Avevo promesso di portare il inio oriuolo, I had promised to bring my watch, e 1' hp portato, and I have brought it. 38 ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. THE DISJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 210. When in the same sentence there are more than one direct (195) or more than one indirect (196) objects, relating to different persons or things, or when they desire to lay a particular stress on the object in the sentence, the Italians place the following personal pronouns after the verb, but not joined to it that is why they are called Disjunctive Personal Pronouns. DIRECT OBJECTS (195). INDIRECT OBJECTS (196). Me, me. A me, to me. Te, thee. A te, to thee. Lui or esso, him or it (191)- A lui or a esso, to him or it. Lei or essa, her, you or it. A lei or a essa, to her, you or it. q^ (himself, herself, . ., (to himself, herself. ' (itself or themselves. \toitselforthemselves. Noi, us. A noi, to us. Voi, you. A voi, to you. Loro or essi, them, mas. (A) loro or a essi, to them, mas. Loro or esse, them, fern. (A) loro or a esse, to them, fern. EXAMPLES. II generale parlo a me, ma The general spoke to me, but non parlo a mio nipote. he did not speak to my nephew. Parlo a Lei, Signore ; perche I speak to you, Sir ; why n9n mi risponde ? do you not answer me ? 211. Notice that in the case explained in rule 210, "gli" and " le " (see rule 196) could not be used instead of " a loro." Ex. Mandero un libro a lui, e a I shall send him a book, loro mandero del denaro. and some money to them. 212. Notice that not only " a " to, but all the other prepositions " di," of, " do," from, " con," with, " per," for, through, &c., are used to form the indirect objects of verbs, but, as they always follow the verb, they offer no difficulty to the student. Ex. Carlo parlera per me.* Charles will speak for me. Vu9l ella venir con me ?f Will you come with me ? Parti con loro.J He went away with them. 213. * Instead of "per me," "per te," "per lui," and "per lei,"&c., the con- junctive forms " mi," "ti," gli," and " le," &c., are used with such verbs as " fare," to do, to make, " fabbricare," to build, " dipingere," to faint, &c., when the sentence contains also a direct object. Ex. Gli (per lui) fabbricarono una casa. They built him (for him) a house. 214. t "Meco," "teco," "seco," are sometimes used instead of "con me," " con te," "con se." Ex. Vuol ella venir meco ? Will you come with me? 215. J Formerly the pronoun " esso," (invariable) was sometimes used pleonasti- cally before " lui," " lei," " loro." Ex. Andai con essoloro (D'Azeglio). I went along with them. ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 39 II marmo, marble. La pietra, stone. VOCABULARY. II mattone, brick. II legno, wood. II cristallo, crystal. II vetro, glass. Paolo, Andrea, Paul. Stefano, Stephen. Car^tta, Charlotte. Andrew. Ant9nio, Anthony. Maddalena, Madeline. the handkerchief, a looking-glass, a reading-desk, blotting-paper, sealing-wax. a water-colour, my father-in-law, my sister-in-law, your son-in-law. La statua, the statue. 11 fazzoletto, La testa, the head. Uno (141) specchio, ; Gli occhi, the eyes. Un leggio, I capelli, the hair. Carta sugante, 11 braccio, the arm. Ceralacca, La mano, the hand. Un acquarello, 11 dito, the finger. Mio suocero, 11 piede,* the foot. Mia cognata, L'anello, the ring. Vostro genero, EXERCISE XII. I condemned (a) (Past Def.) him, and I pardoned (b) my (129) brother. Paul always (181) speaks of himself (212). Charlotte (113) spoke to me (210), but she did not speak to my (130) sisters. I speak to you (210) ; why do (128) you not answer ? You never pay attention (c) to me. He always speaks of me, but I never speak of him. They sent (Past Def.) a reading-desk to me (210), and a marble statue to my (146) master. Stephen will speak for me. They built him (213) a marble palace. Madeline has sent a gold ring to William, and a small water-colour to my sister-in- law. She sent (180) also a beautiful looking-glass to my sister. I shall place (d) the picture before her.J (a) Condannare. (b) Perdonare a. (c) Badare a.f (d) Posare * Notice that t'he e in the diphthong ie (except in the suffixes "etto," &c.), has the broad sound of a in the word gate. 216. t " Badare " is always followed by a disjunctive personal pronoun. Ex. Badate a me. Pay attention to me. You could not say 'VBadatemi." 217. J When the prepositions "davanti," "dinanzi," "innanzi," before, "didietro, " dietro," behind, "incontro,"fa/^, "sopra," "disopra," on, upon, above, "sotto,"' "disotto," under, below, are used with a conjunctive personal pronoun, they are placed at the end of the phrase. Ex. Gli ando incontro. He went against him. 4O ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. LESSON VIII. ON DOUBLE CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. 218. When two conjunctive pronouns are governed by the same verb, and one is a " direct " and the other an " indirect object," the " indirect " precedes the " direct object," and the i of " mi," " ti," " ci," " vi," is changed into e. When these pronouns come before the verb, they are written separately, but when they are placed after the verb, they are written together, and joined to it. Ex. Me lo presto Guglielmo. William lent it to me. Me li ha comprati mio zio. My uncle bought them for me. Egli vu9l vendercelo 9ggi. He will sell it to us to-day. Me lo, or mel* disse ieri sera. He told it to me last night. (Dammelo, See rule 201. i Me lo dia, I Give it to me. (Datemelo, j 219. When the pronoun " gli," to him, is followed by the pro- nouns " lo," " la," " li," " le," and " ne," instead of changing the final i into e, like the other conjunctive pronouns (see rule 218), it takes an e after the final i, and forms one word with the relative pronoun. Ex. Glielo presterb, ma n9n pos- I will lend it to him, but I can- so dapglielo.f not give it to him. Mi ha promesso di mandar- He promised that he would send glieli questa sera.f them to him this evening. (Mandaglielo,f j See rule 201. -! Glielo mandij -Send it to him. (Mandateglielo,t ) 220. Notice that, for the sake of euphony, " glie " is also used for the feminine instead of " le," when followed by " lo," " la," "li," " le," and " ne." Ex. Maria desiderava i fiori, ed io Mary wished for the flowers, glieli 119 mandati.f and I sent them to her. 221. In Italian an answer must contain the noun expressed in the question, or a pronoun in its stead, and the verb must be repeated in the answer. Ex. Ha ella presola mia ombrella ? Have you taken my umbrella ? No, n9n \'ho presa. No, I have not. 222. * "Mel," " tcl," "eel," " vel," are often used instead of " me lo," " te lo," "celo," "velo." 223. t It is important to notice that " gli" in this sentence might mean either to Aim, or to her (and consequently to you, see rule 120), ortothem (see rule 211) ; but the sense of the sentence, in the context, always helps to clear up the ambiguity. ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. Dio, Iddio, II cielo, La terra, Mio caro amico, II giorno di nascita, Questo VOCABULARY. God. II sole, the sun. Heaven, the sky, La luna, the moon, the earth. Le stelle, the stars. my dear friend, ita, the birthday, this danger. Un regalo, Un album, 11 popolo, a present, an album, the people, Ora, adesso, now. Volontieri, willingly. EXERCISE XIII. Speak to me (201) now, because I shall not have time to- morrow. He was speaking (179) to his master (146) when you called (a) (Past Def.) him. When will you send her (192, 193) the pictures ? I will send them to her (219, 220) this evening. Do notforget(b) (125, 126). Will* you help (c) me, (192) my dear friend ? Yes, willingly, I will not abandon (d) you in this danger. Will (224) you lend (e) me your penknife ? Yes, I will (208). Shall you send him a present for his birthday ? Yes, I shall send him an album. I have brought (f) Henry's books tof show (g) them to you (122, 218). They ordered (h) him to (226) speak to the people. (a) Chiamare. (b) Dimenticare. (c) Aiutare. (d) Abbandonare. (e) Prestare. (f) Portare. (g) Mostrare. (h) Comandare. 224. * When will, ivould, shall and shoidd are distinct verbs of themselves (not mere auxiliaries) they are translated into Italian by " Volere " or " Dpvere." Ex. Vuol' ella darmi una rosa ? Will you give me a rose ? N.B. The Present Indicative of " volere," to be willing, should be studied at once ; it is given on page 91 . 225. t When the preposition to means in order to, it is translated into Italian by " per " or " onde." Ex. Sono venuto per (or onde) parlarle. I have come to speak to you. 226. The verbal prefix to is translated into Italian by " di," when it is preceded by an adjective, or a past participle (except " pronto," ready, " disposto," disposed, "prono," inclined, " preparato," prepared], and a verb expressing an idea of rest or state. Ex. Sono decisi di andare a Venezia. They have decided to go to Venice. 227. The verbal prefix to is translated into Italian by " a," when it is preceded by a verb expressing motion, or " pronto," " disposto," " prono," and " preparato." Ex. Venga a trovarmi fra due mesi. Come to see me in two months' time. 42 ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. FURTHER REMARKS ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 228. " E' " is sometimes used instead of " egli," " esso," and " essi." Ex. Picchia anche li e aspetta, He also knocks there and waits, e'poteva aspettare. (Manz.) and he might wait. Cortesemente d9mando chi, Courteously he asked who they e' fossero. (Boccaccio.) were. 229. " Desso," "dessa," " dessi," " desse," are elegantly used instead of "esso," " essa," &c., with the verbs "essere," and "parere." Ex. Quegli e desso ; lo conosco. It is he ; I know him. 230. " Egli," or simply " gli," and " e' " are sometimes used as "ripieni," that is pleonastically ; they correspond to the English neuter pronoun it. Ex. E s' egli e ver che tua potenza And if it be true that thy power sia nel cielo. (Petrarca.) is in heaven. E' risica d' essere una gior- It risks to be a day worse than nata peggio di ieri. (Manz.) yesterday. 231. Instead of the subjective pronouns " io," " tu," " egli," " ella," " essi," and " esse," the objective pronouns " me," " te," " lui," "lei," and "loro" are used after the words "ma," but, " anche," also, " come," " siccome," as, " quanto," as much as, " nemmeno," not even, &c., for the sake of euphony, and in other cases solely for the purpose of giving more prominence to the pronoun. Ex. Ma Lei non mi scrive mai. But you never write to me. Si levo anche lui il cappello. He also took off his hat. Lei e ricca, ma i9 son povero. You are rich, but I am poor. Le parole che dicon loro van- The words which they say fly no via e spariscono. (Manz.) away and disappear. 232. Sometimes, in the colloquial style, " la," and " le," are used instead of " ella " and " esse." Ex. La c' e ; 1' ho trovata ! (Manz.) She is there ; I found her ! Le son tutte qui. (Manz.) They are all here. 233. When several verbs govern the same pronouns, the latter are generally repeated with each verb. Ex. Gli* amiamo e gli* stimiamo. We love and esteem them. 234. " N9n lo " is often contracted into " nol." Ex. Egli n9l disse a nessuno. He did not tell it to anybody. 235. " II" in poetry, is sometimes used instead of "lo." Ex. Oime ! bene il conosco. (Tas.) Alas ! I know him well. 236. Notice that before a verb beginning with a vowel, or an .r followed by another consonant, " gli " is used instead of " li." ON THE WORDS " CI," "VI," AND " NE." 43 LESSON IX. ON THE WORDS " CI," " VI," AND " NE." 237. Besides being used as conjunctive personal pronouns (see rules 192, 197), " ci," " vi," and " ne," are used as relative pronouns, and as adverbs. 238. " Ci " and " vi," used as relative pronouns, signify of it, of them ; about it, about them; to it, to them; for it, for them; in it, in them. Ex. Non indovinerei, se ci pensassi I could not guess it, if I thought un anno. a year about it. Questo quadro mi va a genio ; I like this picture very much ; I ci ho fatto fare una bella have had a fine frame made cornice. for it. Ci hp dato una mano di vernice. I have given it a coat of varnish. 239. When " ci " and " vi " are used as adverbs, they always refer to an antecedent; "ci" means here, and " vi " means there.* Ex. Francesco viene qui tutte le Francis comes here every morn- mattine, e ci sta fino alle ing, and stays till eight o'clock 9tto della sera. in the evening. Non sono mai stato in Italia, I have never been to Italy, but ma faccio i conti d'andarvi I intend to go there this questa prirnavera. Spring. 240. " Ne," used as a relative pronoun, means some, any, of it, of them; concerning (or about) him, her, it; for it, for them, from it, from them. As stated already (rule 138) in an answer, " ne " must always be expressed in Italian (although some, any, of it, of them, &c., are seldom expressed in English), and the verb, in the answer, must also be expressed in full. Ex. Ha ella per caso qualche libro Have you perchance any Italian italiano da prestarmi ? books to lend me ? Si, ne 119 due o tre, e glieli pre- Yes, I have two or three, which stero volontieri. I shall be very glad to lend you. Sono certo che le piace la I am certain that you are fond musica, perche ne parla sem- of music, for you are always pre. speaking about it. Vado ai bagni di mare 9gni I go to the sea-side to bathe anno, e ne derive sempre mol- every year, and I always de- to bene. rive great benefit from it. 241. * For the sake of euphony " ci " is sometimes used instead of " vi." Ex. Andateci, e vi troverete Carlo. Go there, and you will find Charles. 44 ON THE WORDS " CI," " VI," AND " NE." 242. When " ne " is used as an adverb, it means thence. Ex. Sono stato a Parigi ; ne vengo I have been to Paris ; I have appunto. just returned from there. 243. When "ci," " vi," and "ne,"'are used as relative pro- nouns, and as adverbs, they occupy the same position with regard to the verb as when they are conjunctive personal pronouns (see rules 192-201) and the i of " ci," " vi," is changed into e (218) when " lo," " la," " li," " le," and " ne," follow them. Ex. Egli va sovente al teatro, e He often goes to the theatre and vi mena seco sua sorella. takes his sister with him. Mia zia aveva dei biglietti, My aunt had some tickets, and e me ne diede tre. she gave me three. Non 1' h9 mai condotto a I had never taken him to our casa nostra ; ma ho pro- house, but I have promised to messo di condupcelo. do so. ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS USED REFLECTIVELY. 244. We have seen (rule 189) that when myself, thyself, &c., are used merely to express emphasis, or to indicate discrimination, they are translated by " stesso," " stessa," &c., or "medesimo," "medesima," &c. ; but when these pronouns are used as Reflective Pronouns, they are expressed by "mi," "ti," "si;" " ci," " vi," "si," and are- subject to all the rules given above, concerning the personal pronouns. Ex. Non mi vesto mai prima delle I never dress before ten o'clock. dieci. Preparati, or preparatevi, or Get ready without losing a si prepari subito. minute. Raccolse i panni di suo fra- He took up his brother's clothes, tello, e se ne vesti. and dressed himself in them. " Ecc9," behold, USED WITH PERSONAL AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 245. When a conjunctive pronoun, personal or relative, is used with the word " ecc9," behold,* here is, there is, this is, these are, here are, there are, it must be placed after it, and joined to it ; as "ecc9mi," "ecc9ti," " ecc9ci," " eccoli," " ecc9le," "ecc9ne."f Ex. Ecc9mi. Eccoci pronti. Here I am. Here we are ready. Se ama le incisioni, ecc9ne If you are fond of engravings, qui delle bellissime. here are some beautiful ones. 246. * Sometimes " ecco " is followed by two pronouns. Ex. umiliati. Here they are humbled. . . 247. t Sometimes " ecco " is rendered more graphic by adding to it the adverbs ' qui," here, and " la," there. Ex. " ^Ccolo la." There he is. ON THE WORDS " CI," " VI," AND " NE.' 45 VOCABULARY. Unorologio, (21) a clock. Questo paese, this country. 11 mio oriuolo, my watch. Alia campagna, into the country, Una rosa,* arose. Casadi campagna, country house. 11 frutto, the fruit. Questo canestro, this basket. Un ombrello, an umbrella. Un errore, a fault. Un ombrellino, a parasol. Uno sbaglio, a mistake. Un porta-lapis, a pencil-case. Alia posta, to the post. Rosso, red. Verde, green. Bianco, white, Turchino, blue Giallo, yellow. Nero, black, EXERCISE XIV. I have brought my exercise to (225) show it to you (122, 218) ; you will find few (139) faults in it (238). Henry has brought (167) us (192, 193) a basket of roses. I should not have spoken to her, if I had thought (a) off it (238). Before speaking to us, (210) speak to rny father. He was speaking to us, (179, 192, 193) when they called (Past Def.) him into the garden. Have you an English watch ? Yes, I have (144). If I had thought of it, I should never have lent him my pencil-case. When will you take (b) these letters (89) to the post ? I will take them (there) (239, 243) at once, if you will (224) lend me your umbrella. Have you spoken to William ? No, I have not, (208) but I will speak to him whenj I have time. Why did (128) you burn (c) (Past Indef.) that (152) letter? I burnt it (167) by mistake. Have you paid (d) for|| your parasol ? No, but I will pay for it when Henry returns (e). (a) Pensare. (b) Portare. (c) Abbruciare. (d) Pagare. (e) Ritornare. * An s dotted thus s, has the soft sound of the s in the word rose. 248. f To think of is translated by " pensare a." " Pensare di," means to have an opinion about. Ex. Che pensa di questo poema? What do you think of this poem ? 249. J A verb preceded by the adverbs when, as soon as, &c., indicates a future time ; therefore the future, and not the present tense, must be used in Italian. Ex. Scrivero quando avro il tempo. I shall write when I have time. 250. When a common noun begins with an s, followed by another consonant, and is preceded by " per," by, through, "in," in, into, " con,' : with, and "non," no, not, an i is put before the s for the sake of euphony ; as " Per isbaglio," by mistake. 251. || For is not translated into Italian, after the active verbs to pay, to buy, to sell, to ask, to look, to wait, to wish. 4 6 ON THE SECOND CONJUGATION IN " ERE.' LESSON X. MODEL OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION IN "ERE." "CREDERE," TO BELIEVE. INFINITIVE MOOD. PRESENT. PAST. Cred ere, to believe. Aver cred uto, to have believed. GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PAST GERUND. Cred endo, * Cred uto-a-i-e, Avendo cred uto, believing. believed. having believed. INDICATIVE MOOD. PAST DEFINITE. Cred ei, or etti, g- Cred esti, ^-a I' Cred e, ette ; p- Cred emmo, fy> Cred este, Cred erono, or ettero. PAST INDEFINITE. PLUPERFECT. PAST ANTERIOR. H9 creduto, &c. Avevo creduto, &c. Ebbi creduto, &c. / have believed, &*c. I had believed, &>c. I had believed, &>c. PRESENT. IMPERFECT. Cred o, Cred evo, Cred i, ^ Cred evi, Cred e ; ~"- Cred eva ; Cred iamo, 2 -^ Cred evamo, Cred ete, & Cred evate, Cred ono. Cred evano. 'f. 9, FUTURE. CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Cred ero, K, Cred erei, ^ No first person. Cred erai, & Cred eresti, | Cred i, Cred era ; 2 Cred erebbe ; _J Cred a; 1' Cred eremo, * Cred eremmo, ^ Cred iamo, .* Cred erete, j* Cred ereste, <2 -^ Cred ete, fi, Cred eranno. f Cred erebbero. f Cred ano. ? FUTURE ANTERIOR. CONDITIONAL PAST. The Past of the Avro creduto, &c. Avrei creduto, &c. Imperative is / shall have believed, &c. I should have believed, &>c. seldom used. * Notice that the e in the gerundial termination endo, has always the broad sound of the a in the word gate. ON THE SECOND CONJUGATION IN " ERE.' SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. IMPERFECT. Che 19 cred a, Che tu cred a, Che _._ cred a ; Che cred iamo, Che cred iate, Che [^j] cred ano. PAST. Che i9 abbia creduto, &c. That I may have believed, &>c Che orse (112) i9cred essi, Che or se tu cred essi, Che or se [^] cred esse ; Che or se cred essimo, Che or se cred este, Cheorsef^Jcred essero. PLUPERFECT. ? Che or se 19 avessi creduto, &c. That or if I might have believed, &>c. POETICAL FORMS. 252. In poetry "crederia" is often used instead of " crederei," and " crederebbe " and " crederiano" instead of " crederebbero " ; in the same way " temeria," instead of " temerei " and " teme- rebbe," &c. 253. In poetry " credero " is often used instead of " crederono " ; in the same way " temero " instead of " temerono," &c. REGULAR VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. Assistere, (a) to assist. Precedere,* to precede. Cedere,* to yield. Premere,* to press. Dipendere, to depend. Procedere, to proceed. Eccedere,* to exceed. Resistere, (e) to resist. Fendere, (b) to split. Ricevere,* to receive. Fremere,* to rage. Risolvere, (f) to resolve. Gemere, to groan. Spandere,* to shed. G9dere, to enjoy. Splendere, to shine. Mescere, (c) to pour out. Temere, to fear. Pascere, (d) to feed. Vendere, to sell. 254. * Those verbs in the above list, marked thus,* form their Past Definite either in ei, or in etti ; as " cedei," or " cedetti," " cedesti," " cede," or " cedette " ; "cedemmo," "cedeste," " cederbno," or " cedettero." But all the others have only the termination ei. (a) The Past Participle of (b) (c) (d) (e) (0 ' Assistere " is " assistito." ' Fendere" is "fesso." ' Mescere " is " mesciuto. ' Pascere " is " pasciuto." ' Resistere " is " resistito." ' Risolve-re" is "risoluto." 48 ON THE SECOND CONJUGATION IN "ERE." VOCABULARY. 11 generale, the general. La vista, the sight. 11 colonello, the colonel. 11 Natale, Christmas. Un soldato, a soldier. La Pasqua, Easter. Un OPdine, an order. 11 medico, the doctor. Una fortezza, a fortress. Questo dono, this gift. 11 presidio, the garrison. La sua salute, his health. Un cannone, a cannon. La confidenza, confidence. Un fucile, a gun. Qual pegno di, as a mark of. 11 campanello, the bell. Una volta, once. La folia, calca, the crowd. Due volte, twice. c . Mr. c - Mrs. Signore, \ c - bignora, \ -.., -, Sir. Madam. c . . /'Miss. Signonna, ( Madam> EXERCISE XV. I receive (a) letters from Mr.* James. The soldiers have received the general's order. My sister enjoys (b) good health in this country. He groans (c) at the sight of the doctor. Receive (122) this gift as a mark of my confidence. Believe me, (201, 122) general,! we shall beat (d) them (236). Who (chi) is knocking at (e) (179) the door? Charles; he has already knocked twice, and rang (f) the bell. The cannon beat down (g) (180) the fortress. I have received a letter from my father ; he thinks (h) (che) that he will be in London before Christmas. I have sold (i) my (131) country-house to Mr. John. Yesterday he lost (j) his umbrella in the crowd. We have resolved (k) to yield (1) to him (198). (a) Ricevere. (b) Godere. (c) Gemere. (d) Sconfiggere. (e) Battere, or Bussare a. (f) Suonare. (g) Buttar giu. (h) Credere, (i) Vendere. (j) Perdere. (k) Risolvere di. (1) Cedere a. 255. * In speaking or writing to people, the words Mr., Sir, are translated by "Signore" (plural " Signori"), Mrs. , Madam, by " Signora " (plural " Signore "), Miss, by "Signorina" (plural "Signorine.") But in speaking or writing about persons, Mr., Sir, &c., are translated by "il Signore," " i Signori," " la Signora," " la Signorina," " le Signorine," "le Signore." When "Signore" is followed by the name of the person referred to, the e is omitted. Ex. II Signor John ha ricevuto una Mr. John has received a letter from lettera dalla Signora James. Mrs. James. I Signori John sono amici delle Messrs. John are friends of the Signorine James. Misses James. 256. t The Italians, out of politeness, use the words Signor and Signora before titles, dignities, and names of rank, when they address a person equal or superior to themselves. Ex. " Caro Signor Marchese," Dear Marquis. ON THE SECOND CONJUGATION IN " ERE." 49 VOCABULARY. 11 fiore,* the flower. Questa capra, this goat. Una fragola, a strawberry. La montagna, the mountain. Questo bicchiere, this glass. La notizia, the news. La mia volonta, my will. La bellezza, the beauty. Fortificazioni, f. entrenchments. La freschezza, the freshness. 11 tumulto, the turmoil. 11 suo successo, his success. 11 mio pensiero, my thought. Un' impresa, an undertaking Contento, glad. Insieme, together. Valorosamente, bravely. Tutt'o, everything. Quietamente, quietly. Ad onta di, in spite of. Che cosa ? what ? Per piacere, if you please. EXERCISE XVI. What does (128) this woman sell ? She sells (134-137), fruit (fruits) and flowers ; yesterday she sold me some beautiful roses, and some good strawberries. Who will succeed! him (192, 193) in the business ?J I think (I believe) his brother Edward will succeed him. He and his sister have left London, and are enjoy- ing the beauty of the country, and the freshness of the air. She shudders (a) at the thought of meeting (b) (184, 198) him. Do you believe the news (260) he told us ? (c) No, I do not believe it (193). It does not depend upon (d) my sister. The French fought (e) bravely, within the (102) entrenchments. The goats browse (f) quietly on the mountains in spite of the turmoil of (the) men (uomini). I shall never forget (g) the happy days (260) we have enjoyed (167) together. Everything will depend upon the success of the undertaking. Shall I pour you out (to pour out) (h) a glass of wine, Mr. John ? Yes, if you please. (a) Fremere. (b) Incontrare. (c) Raccontare. (d) Dipendere da. (e) Combattere. (f) Pascere. (g) Dimenticare. (h) Mescere a. 257. * Nouns ending in e, in the singular, form their plural by changing the e into i ; as " il fiore," plural " i fieri." 258. f \Vhen to succeed means to take the place of, it is translated by " Succedere a ; " buc when it means to be successful, it is translated by " Riuscire." 2 59- t Business is translated by "Affare," or " Afifari," when it means concern, affairs ; but it is translated by " Negozio," when it means shop, trade. 260. In Italian the conjunction "che," that, and the relative pronoun " che," or " il quale," &c., that, or which cannot be omitted before the personal pronoun. Ex. Credo ch' egli sia a Vienna. I believe (that) he is in Vienna. Le notizie che ci ha recate. The news (that) he brought us. 4 ON THE THIRD CONJUGATION IN " IRE." LESSON XI. MODEL OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION IN "IRE." "FINIRE," TO FINISH. INFINITIVE MOOD. PAST. Aver fin ito, to have finished. PAST PARTICIPLE. PAST GERUND. Fin ito-a-i-e, Avendo fin ito, finished. having finished. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. Fin ire, to finish. GERUND. Fin endo, finishing. PRESENT. IMPERFECT. PAST DEFINITE. Fin isco, Fin ivo, (108) Fin ii, Fin isci, >* Fin ivi, 5 Fin isti, "5 9t g Fin isce ; in' Fin iva ; 8- Fin i ; * Fin iamo, 3 s * Fin ivamo, " K Fin immo, ' J^ Fin ite, f Fin ivate, f Fin iste, t Fin iscono. Fin ivano. * Fin irono.* PAST INDEFINITE. Ho finite, &c., / have finished, &c. FUTURE. Fin irb, Fin irai, Fin ira ; Fin iremo, Fin irete, Fin iranno. FUTURE ANTERIOR. Avro finite, &c. PLUPERFECT. Avevo finite, &c., I had finished, &c. CONDITIONAL. Fin irei,* Fin iresti, Fin irebbe ; * Fin iremmo. Fin ireste, Fin irebbero.* CONDITIONAL PAST. Avrei finite, &c. PAST ANTERIOR. Ebbi finite, &c., / had finished, &>c. IMPERATIVE MOOD. ^ s> No first person. Fin isci, Fin isca ; Fin iamo, Fin ite, Fin iscano. The Past of the Imperative is I shall have finished, &>c. I should have finished, &c. seldom used. 261. * In poetry "finio" is sometimes used instead of " fini," "finiro" instead of "finirono," " finiria," instead of "finirei" and "finirebbe" and finiriano," instead of " finir^bbero." ON THE THIRD CONJUGATION IN "IRE." SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. IMPERFECT. a Che 19* fin isca, Che tu fin isca, Che [*f,|J] fin isca ; Che fin iamo, Che fin iate, Che [e^e] fin iscano. PAST. Che 19 abbia finite, &c. That I may have finished, &>c. Che or se (112) i9 fin issi, Che or se tu fin issi, Che or se [*f,!j] fin isse ; Che or se fin issimo, Che or se fin iste, Che or se [%] fin issero. " r* PLUPERFECT. Che or se 19 avessi finite, &c. That or if I might have finished, &=c. LIST OF VERBS CONJUGATED LIKE " FINIRE." Abbellire, to embellish. Indebolire, to weaken. Abolire, to abolish. Inferocire, to become ferocious. Aderire, to adhere. Inghiottire, to swallow. Agire, to act. Inorgoglire, to become proud. Apparire, to appear. Intenerire, to touch, move. Ardire, to dare. Invaghire, to enchant, charm. Arrossire, to blush. Marcire, to rot. Colpire, to strike. Munire, to furnish. Condire, to season. Patire, to suffer. Conferire, to confer. Profferire, to proffer. Differire, to differ, delay. Progredire, to progress. Digerire, to digest. Proibire, to prohibit. Eseguire, to execute. Pulire, to clean. Esibire, to offer. Riverire, to reverence. Garantire to guarantee. Sbigottire, to disconcert. Guarire, to cure. Schernire, to despise. Impallidire, to turn pale. Sparire, to disappear. Impaurire, to frighten. Starnutire, to sneeze. Impazzire, to become mad. Stupire, to astonish. Impedire, to hinder. Suggerire, to suggest. Incivilire, to civilize, polish. Svanire, to vanish. An o, dotted thus o, has the broad sound of the o in the word orphan. 52 ON THE THIRD CONJUGATION IN "IRE." ON VERBS CONJUGATED LIKE "SERVIRE," TO SERVE. 262. As already stated in rule 164, most verbs in "ire" (390 out of 500) are conjugated regularly like " Finire." But there are a few (about 40) which are conjugated like " Servire," to serve. These differ from " Finire " in the Present Indicative, Imperative, and in the Present Subjunctive, as is shown in the appended paradigm : INDICATIVE IMPERATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. MOOD. MOOD. PRESENT. PRESENT. Che io serv a, Che tu serv a, Che [?,"] serv a ; Che serv iamo, Che serv iate, Che [Si] serv ano. TlIE FOLLOWING VERBS ARE CONJUGATED LIKE " SERVIRE." Serv o, No ist per. Serv i, Serv e ; s J Serv i, Serv a ; Serv iamo, G. Serv iamo, Serv ite, J\ Serv ite, Serv o"no. Serv ano. -^ Consentire, to consent. Sentire, to hear, to feel, Divertire, to amuse. Soffrire, to suffer. Investire, to invest. Sovvertire, to subvert. Partire,* to depart. Tossire, to cough. Seguire, to follow. Vestire, to dress. REMARKS ON SOME PREFIXES USED IN ITALIAN. 263. The prefix " dis," or simply " s," often means the undoing the? action expressed by the verb to which it is joined, or the nullifying the quality expressed by the noun or adjective before which it is placed; as " disarmare," to disarm, " disfare," or " sfare," to undo, " disordine," disorder, " svantaggio," disadvantage, " disutile," useless. 264. The prefix " ri " often means a repetition of the action expressed by the verb to which it is joined ; as "ribolire," to boil again, " ridire," to say again. 265. The prefix " stra " means the overdoing the action expressed by the verb to which it is joined, or the exaggerating the quality expressed by the noun or adjective before which it is placed ; as " strafare," to overdo, " stracuocere," to overcook, " straccarico," over- loaded. " Partire," meaning to divide, is conjugated like " finire." ON THE THIRD CONJUGATION IN " IRE.' 53 VOCABULARY. Questa fanciulla, Una scienza La scu9la, II mio dovere, Questa famiglia, La mia condotta, La mattina, La sera, La iKitte, Nimvo, Vecchio, this girl. Un bosco, a wood. a science. Una sorgente, a spring. the school. Un fiume, a river (large) my duty. La finestra, the window. this family. 11 piacere, the pleasure. my conduct. L' animo, the mind. the morning. L' anima, the soul. the evening, night. Una legge, a law. the night. La fragranza, the fragrance, new. old. Dolce, Amaro, sweet, bitter. Caldo, Freddo, warm, cold. Severamente, severely. Probabilmente, probably. EXERCISE XVII. They punish (a) him (192, 193) too severely. He has enriched (b) (the) science with* new discoveries. Does this boy understand (c) Italian ? Yes he understands it (192, 193) but he does not speak it. Will you have finished before to-morrow ? Probably I shall (208). I shall finish this exercise before (184) going to school. He always (181) fulfils (d) his duty. They will never betray (e) us. He will inform (f) my family of my conduct. Yesterday my sister was sewing (g) (Past Def.) from (the) morning to (the) night. The singingf of the birds, the murmuring (h) of the springs, the fragrance of the flowers contribute (i) to the pleasures of the mind. He will obey (j) the laws of this country. We shall start (k) for the country on (147, 74) Thursday. (a) Punire.J (b) Arricchire.J (c) Capire.J (d) Adempire. (e) Tradire.J (f) Istruire.J (g) Cucire. (h) Mormorare. (i) Contribuire.J (j) Obbedire a.J (k) Partire. 266. * " With," preceded by a past particle, is translated by " di," of, except when it means in company with, or by means of; then it is translated by " con." Ex. " Uno scettro adorno di gioie." A sceptre adorned with jewels. 267. f To translate into Italian the English expressions " the singing of the birds," "the murmuring of the springs," &c., the verb must be employed in the present of the Infinitive Mood; or the participle, "singing," &c., must be changed into a noun. Ex. II cantare, or il canto degli uccelli The singing of birds delights me mi diletta oltremodo. immensely. J This verb is conjugated like " Finire ;" see page 50. 54 ON VERBS CONJUGATED PASSIVELY. LESSON XII. ON VERBS USED PASSIVELY. 268. A verb used passively expresses an action received by the subject in the sentence. The passive voice, in Italian, is formed by using the auxiliary " essere," followed by the past participle of the verb to be expressed passively. The past participle always agrees with the subject in the sentence. Ex. I suoi fratelli sono stimati. His brothers are esteemed. "STIMARE," TO ESTEEM. CONJUGATED PASSIVELY. INFINITIVE MOOD. PRESENT. PAST. Essere stimato-a, Essere stato stimato, to be esteemed. to have been esteemed. GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PAST GERUND. Essendo* stimato-a-i-e, Stimato-a-i-e, Essendo stato stimato, being esteemed. esteemed. having been esteemed. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. Sono stimato-a, Sei stimato a, E stimato-a ; Siamo stimati-e, Siete stimato-a-i-e, Sono stimati-e. IMPERFECT. Ero stimato-a, Eri stimato-a, Era stimato-a ; Eravamo stimati-e, Eravate stimato-a-i-e, * Erano stimati-e. PAST DEFINITE. $ Fui stimato-a, Fosti stimato-a, Fu stimato-a ; | Fummo stimati-e, -* Foste stimato-a-i-e, * Furono stimati-e. PAST INDEFINITE. PLUPERFECT. Sono stato stimato, &c. Ero stato stimato, &c. / have been esteemed, &>c. I had been esteemed, &=c. PAST ANTERIOR. Fui stato stimato, &c. / had been esteemed, &>c* FUTURE. Sard stimato-a, Sarai stimato-a, Sara stimato-a ; Saremo stimati-e, Sarete stimato-a-i-e, Saranno stimati-e. FUTURE ANTERIOR. Sarb stato stimato, &c. / shall have been esteemed, &> CONDITIONAL. Sarei stimato-a, Saresti stimato-a, Sarebbe stimata-o ; Saremmo stimati-e, Sareste stimato-a-i-e, Sarebbero stimati-e. CONDITIONAL PAST. Sarei stato stimato, &c. / should have been esteemed, &>c. An e, dotted thus e, has the broad sound of the a in the word gate. ON VERBS CONJUGATED PASSIVELY. 55 IMPERATIVE MOOD. SINGULAR. PLURAL. Siamo stimati-e, Sii stimato-a, be (thoii) esteemed, &c. Siate stimato-a-i-e, Sia stimato-a ; Siano stimati-e. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. IMPERFECT. Che io sia stimato-a, Che orse (112)19 fossi stimato-a,^ -s Che tu sia stimato-a, Che [l^] sia stimato-a ; Che siamo stimati-e, Che siate stimato-a-i-e, Che HS.1 siano stimati-e. Che or se tu fossi stimato-a, Che or se [^J fosse stimato-a ; Che or se fossimo stimati-e, Che or se foste stimato-a-i-e, Che or se [|j ] fossero stimati-e. ><.. PAST. PLUPERFECT. Che i9 sia stato stimato, &c. Che or s&io fossi stato stimato, &c. That I may have been esteemed, &>c. Thator if I might have been esteemed, &c VOCABULARY II re, the king. Una battaglia, a battle. La regina, the queen. Un ballo, a ball (party). Un principe, a prince. Un invito, an invitation. Tutti, tutte, all, everybody. Parecchi-e, several, many. EXERCISE XVIII. She is loved (a)* and esteemed (b) byt everybody. The city of Rome has been sacked (c) several times. Have you (122) been invited (d) to the ball ? No, but I expect (e) an invitation. His son and his brother were wounded (f) (Past Definite, passive form) in the battle. Margaret would have been blamed by my mother, if (112) she had spoken. Will these ladies be presented (g) (269) to the Queen by the Prince ? I believe they will. J We should be despised (h) if we abandoned him (192, 193) in this danger. (a) Amare. (b) Stimare. (c") Saccheggiare. (d) Invitare. (e) Aspettare. (I) Ferire. (g) Presentare. (h) Disprezzare. 269. * The past participle of verbs used passively is variable. Ex. " Ella e amata. " She is loved. 270. t The preposition by, preceded by a past participle, is translated into " da," in Italian. Ex. " Egli e ammirato da tutti." He is admired by everybody. 271. I The English expressions I believe he is , I believe they are, I think so, are elegantly translated into Italian by " Credo di si." And I believe thty are not, I do not think so, are translated by " Credo di no." ON NEUTER VERBS. LESSON XIII. ON NEUTER VERBS. 272. A neuter verb, properly speaking, is a verb which is neither active nor passive ; in that case " essere," to be, is the only real neuter verb ; but any active verb which can be used without any object (direct or indirect) is, in Italian, called a neuter verb. Ex. Abbiatno riso.* We laughed. THE NEUTER VERB " NUOTARE," TO SWIM. INFINITIVE MOOD. PRESENT. PAST. Nu9tare, to swim. Aver nu9tato, to have swam. GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PAST GERUND. Nu9tando,f Nuotato, Avendo nuotato, having swam. swimming. swam. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. IMPERFECT. PAST DEFINITE. Nu9to, Nu9tavo,J Nu9tai, Nu9ta ; Nu9tiamo, Nu9tate, ^ Nuotavi in 1. Nuotava ; Nu9tavamo, ^ Nu9tavate, ^ Nu9tasti, 1 Nu9to ; Nu9tammo, % Nu9taste, Nuotano. Nuotavano. Nu9tarono. PAST INDEFINITE. Ho mK>tato, &c. 7 have swam, <&>c. FUTURE. Nu9tero, &c. 7 shall swim, &>c. FUTURE ANTERIOR. Avro nu9tato, &c. 7 shall have swam, &c. PLUPERFECT. Avevo nu9tato, &c. 7 had swam, &c. PAST ANTERIOR. &c. &c. Ebbi 7 had swam, CONDITIONAL. Nu9terei, &c. 7 should swim, &>c. CONDITIONAL PAST. Avrei nti9tato, &c. 7 should have swam, &>c. 273. * Notice that the past participle of neuter verbs, conjugated with " avere," always remains invariable. t The Present Participle is "nuotante." J Or " nuotava ; " see rule 108. ON NEUTER VERBS. 57 IMPERATIVE MOOD. No first person. Nuota, Nu9ti ; Nu9tiamo, j-S Nu9tate, Nuotino. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. IMPERFECT. Che io nuoti, Che tu nu9ti, Che [l^] nuoti ; Che nu9tiamo, Che nu9tiate, Che f^i"! nuotino. * Che or se io nuotassi, Che or se tu niwtassi, Che or se [f,!j] nuotasse ; Che or se nu9tassimo, Che or se niwtaste, Che or se [|^ nutassero. PAST. PLUPERFECT. Che io abbia nuotato, &c. Che or se io avessi nvuptato, &c. That I may have swam, &c. That or if I might have swam, &>c. 274. There are about 600 neuter verbs in the Italian language, upwards of 550 of which require " Avere " for auxiliary. Ex. Abbiamo dormito fino alle nove. We slept till nine o'clock. For the auxiliaries used with the other 50 see rules 275, and 276. LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL NEUTER VERBS WHICH ARE CONJUGATED WITH " AVERE." Camminare, to walk. Regnare, to reign. Dormire, to sleep. Ridere, to laugh. Gridare, to cry. Sbadigliare, to yawn. Passeggiare, to take a walk. Tacere, to be silent. Piangere, to weep. Tossire, to cough. Pranzare, to dine. Viaggiare, to travel. 275. The following eighteen neuter verbs require " essere " for auxiliary, because they indicate a state, rather than an action' Andare, to go. Giungere, to arrive. Restare, 1 Apparire, to appear. Morire, to die. Rimanere, / Arrivare, to arrive. Nascere, to be born. Sorgere, Cadere, to fall. Partire, to depart. Sortire, Divenire, to become. Perire, to perish. Uscire, Entrare, to enter. to remain, to rise. \ to go out. Pervenire, to arrive at. Venire, to come. EXAMPLES. Sono andati alia campagna. They have gone into the country. Sono divenute ricchissime. They have become very rich. * Notice that o preceded by u has always the broad sound of the o in the word orphan. 58 ON NEUTER VERBS. 276. There are 32 neuter verbs, like " Salire," to ascend, " Scendere," to descend, " Fuggire," to escape, " Passare," to pass^ which require either " avere," or " essere " as auxiliary ; " avere " when an action is expressed, " essere," when a state is denoted. Ex. Abbiamo salito il monte. We ascended the mountain. Andrea e salito sulla torre. Andrew is on the tower. La cattiva stagione e passata. The bad season is passed. VOCABULARY. Questa instituzione, this institution. II tempo, the weather. La sua bonta, (69) Una prigione, Questo ponte, Questo parco, Una pecora, his kindness. a prison, this bridge, this park, a sheep. La stagione, La primavera, L' estate, (f.), L' autunno, L' inverno, the season. Spring. Summer. Autumn. Winter. something. , enough. Su, sopra, upon, over. Molti, 1 Molto, much, very. Molte, J Qualcosa, Abbastanza EXERCISE XIX. We have travelled (a) (274, 273) much. I have passed (276) over the bridge with my brother. It was a beautiful sight in the park, the sheep were browsing, (b) (179) the goats were skipping about, (c) the birds were warbling, (d) and the children were play- ing (e). This institution has been established (f)* these five years. Has your sister arrived ? (275). Yes, she has (208). He escaped (180, 276) from his prison byf jumping (g) from a window. He slept (274) whilst we were working (Past Indef.). We lived (h) (180) three years in America, and received much kindness from the Americans. Do not (126, 122) travel this winter. (a) Viaggiare. (b) Pascere. (c) Saltellare. (d) Cantare. (e) Giu9care. (f) Stabilire. (g) Saltare. (h) Dimorare. 277. * When the verb expresses an action (or a state) which has lasted for some time past, and is still lasting, it must be put in the Present Indicative in one of the two following ways : Dimoro in questa casa da cinque anni, or \ I have been living in this Sono cinque anni che dimoro in questa casa. \ house these five years. 278. + The Italian Gerund is never preceded by any preposition ; instead of the Gerund the present of the Infinitive, with a preposition, may be used. Ex. Saltando., or col saltare da una finestra. By jumping from a window. ON THE REFLECTIVE AND RECIPROCAL VERBS. 59 LESSON XIV. ON THE REFLECTIVE AND RECIPROCAL VERBS. 279. A reflective verb is a verb the action of which reacts upon its subject, and a reciprocal verb is a verb the action of which is reciprocated between two, or several persons, or things. 280. The compound tenses of reflective and reciprocal verbs are formed with the auxiliary " Essere." Ex. Francesco si e vestito. Francis has dressed himself. THE VERB " LODARSI," TO PRAISE ONES-SELF. INFINITIVE MOOD. PRESENT. PAST. L9darsi, to praise one's-self. Essersi lodato, to have praised one's-self. GERUND. PAST PARTICIPLE. PAST GERUND. L9dandosi, L9datosi, (200) Essendosi lodato, praising one's-self. having praised himself, having praised one's-self. PRESENT. Mi l9do, Ti lodi, Si loda ; Ci lodiamo, Vi lodate, Si lodano. PAST INDEFINITE. Mi sono lodato, &c. INDICATIVE MOOD. IMPERFECT. PAST DEFINITE. Mi k>dai, 8 Ti k>dasti, t. Si I Mi k>davo,* Ti l9davi, Si lodava ; Ci lodavamo, Vi ^davate, Si ^davano. PLUPERFECT. Mi ero k>dato, &c. I have praised myself, &>c. I had praised my self, &>c. I had praised myself, &*c. IMPERATIVE MOOD. j Ci kidammo, Vi k>daste, Si ^darono. PAST ANTERIOR. Mi fui lodato, &c. FUTURE. Mi lodero, &c. CONDITIONAL. Mi k>derei, &c. I shall praise myself , &c. I should praise myself , (SrV. FUTURE ANTERIOR. CONDITIONAL PAST. Mi saro l9dato, &c. Mi sarei l9dato, &c. / shall have praised myself, &c. I should have praised myself, &*c. No first person. Lodati, Si l9di ; Si lodino. Or" lodava;" see rule 108. 6o ON THE REFLECTIVE AND RECIPROCAL VERBS. * SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. IMPERFECT. Che or se (112) io mi k>dassi, Che or se tu ti k>dassi, Che or se [*f,!j] si lodasse ; Che or se ci lodassimo, Che or se vi lodaste, Che or se [g\ si lodassero. PLUPERFECT. Che or se 19 mi fossi k>dato, &C. That I may have praised my self, &c. That or if I might have praised my self, &>c. 281. Notice that " k>darsi " might mean to praise one's-self, or to praise one another ; hence many verbs may be used, in the plural, either reflectively or reciprocally. VOCABULARY. Che 19 mi Che tu ti Che [2SJ|] si lodi ; Che ci l9diamo, Che vi kpdiate, Che [Si] si Ipdino. PAST. Che io mi sia &c. L'assemblea, the assembly. A mia spesa, at my expense. II preparative, the preparation. L' elezione, the election. Lo spirito, wit, the mind. II sapere, learning. L'imprudenza, imprudence. Un bastimento, va- 1 , . scello, una nave, j Una barca, Questa canzone, La chitarra, a bark, this song, the guitar. Qgni, every, each. Alle sei, at six o'clock. A mezzogiorno, at noon. EXERCISE XX. I presented myself (a) to the (103) assembly. He was arming himself (b) for the battle. Elizabeth praises herself too much. These two men always praise one another (281). The king sur- rounded himself (c) (Past Def.) with (266) soldiers. She sang two Spanish (177, 74) songs, accompanying herself (d) with the guitar. Are the children dressing themselves ? (e) (244). No, they are not (208). When I entered (183) the room, they were busying themselves (f) with the preparations for the election. He has (280) enriched himself (g) at my expense. They praise themselves too much. (a) Presentarsi. (b) Armarsi. (c) Circondarsi. (d) Accom- pagnarsi. (e) Vestirsi.* (f) Affaccendarsi. (g) Arricchirsi.f * This verb is conjugated like " Servire ; " see page 52. f This verb is conjugated like " Finire ; " see page 50. ON THE REFLECTIVE AND RECIPROCAL VERBS. 6 1 282. THE FOLLOWING VERBS, AND A FEW MORE, ARE REFLECTIVE IN ITALIAN AND NOT REFLECTIVE IN ENGLISH. Accorgersi di, ) Dimenticarsi di, 1 .. or che,* Avvedersi sco, the wood, i boschi, the woods. II fuoco, the fire, i fuochi, the fires. II manico, the handle, i manichi, the handles-. II castigo, the punishment, i castighi, the punishments. 410. Notice however that the following words do not require any h in their plural form. Ex. II Greco, the Greek, i Greci, the Greeks. II p9rco, the pig, i P9rci, the pigs. L' amico, the friend, gli amici, the friends. II nemico, the enemy, i nemici, the enemies. II medico, the doctor, i medici, the doctors. II portico, the portico, i portici, the porticoes. II mosaico, the mosaic, i nwsaici, the mosaics. 411. As a general rule nouns ending in io form their plural by merely cutting off the final o. Ex. L' occhio, the eye, gli 9cchi, the eyes. II viaggio, the voyage, i viaggi, the voyages. II fornaio, the baker, i fornai,f the bakers. 412. Notice, however, that the following words end with two ii in the plural to distinguish them from similar words ending with one i only in the plural, and having quite a different meaning : I tempii, the churches, to distinguish it from i tempi, the times. I principii, the principles, i principi, the princes. I giudicii, the judgments, i giudici, the judges. Gli omicidii, the murders, gli omicidi, the murderers. I beneficii, the benefices, ben^fici, benevolent (plur.). Gli atrii, the porches, atri, black (plur.). 413. * " Eco" was originally the name of a girl. Some writers make " eco " mas- culine ; in the plural, however, it is always "gli echi," the echoes. 414. t Formerly the words ending in aio in the singular were made to end in the plural in aj, asfarnaj. IO6 ON THE GENDER AND NUMBER OF NOUNS. 415. Nouns that have an accent over the I (io) in the singular, form their plural by changing the w into ii. Ex. Lo zio, the uncle, gli zii, the uncles. II rio, the brook, i rii, the brooks. II pendio, the slope, i pendii, the slopes. II leggio, the reading-desk, i leggii, the reading-desks. WORDS ENDING IN U. 416. There are only a few words in Italian ending in u ; they are feminine and do not change form in the plural. Ex. La virtu, virtue. le virtu, virtues. Except " il ragu," stewed meat, which is masculine, and has for plural " i ragu," stewed meats. 417. The following nouns, indicating parts of the human body, may end in the plural either in i, and be masculine, or in a, and be feminine.* II ciglio, the eyebrow, i cigli or le ciglia, the eyebrows. II labbro, the lip, i labbri or le labbra, the lips. II braccio, the arm, i bracci or le braccia, the arms. II gomito, the elbow, i gomiti or le gomita, the elbows. II dito, the finger, i diti or le dita, the fingers. II gin9cchio, the knee, i ginocchi or le ginocchia, the knees. II calcagno, the heel, i calcagni or le calcagna, the heels. EXERCISE XLI. Chronology (328) and (337) geography are the eyesf (411) of history (328). Spain produces lemons, oranges, and olives in great abundance. Poets (328) compare cheeks (392) to roses, eyes to stars, hands (408) to lilies, and teeth to pearls. One must (307) know (364) mathematics}; (225) to understand astronomy thoroughly. I admire the theatres (408), fountains, statues, galleries, and gardens of this beautiful city. History proves that (che) philosophers (328) have always been preceded by (269, 270) poets, and (by the) painters. The rose is the queen of flowers, and the emblem of (328) beauty. We have visited the principal cities (396) of Italy. The earth presents on its surface, heights, (137, 389) hollows, pre- cipices, (411) volcanoes, seas, marshes, rivers, (402) forests, and fields. These men are not (125) French ; they are German (409) ; three are sailors (411), the others are workmen. 418. * The words "anello," ring, " castello," castle, " fiio," thread, " urlo," howling, and a few others, may end in the plural either in i or in a. t The student is advised to look for the translations of the words in the vocabulary at the end of this grammar before applying the rules bearing on them in the exercises. 419. Mathematics, statistics, politics, are generally translated into Italian by " La matematica, la statistica, la politica." ON THE GENDER AND NUMBER OF NOUNS. ID/ IRREGULARITIES IN THE GENDER AND NUMBER OF NOUNS. 420. The following nouns have two meanings, and for each meaning there is a different plural : IL MEMBRO, the member. IL GESTO, the gesture. IL FRUTTO, the fruit, the result. I IL MURO, the wall. IL CARRO, the chariot, the cart. L' osso, the bone. IL CORNO, the horn. TL RISO, the rice, the laugh. IL LEGNO, the wood, the car- riage, the ship. IL MAGO, the magician, or the wise man (of the East). 421. The following nouns in masculine, in the plural end in a, L' uovo,* the egg, II miglio, II paio, Lo staio, II grido, MEMBRI, the members (of a society) ; and LE MEMBRA, the limbs of the body. GESTI, the gestures of an orator, of an actor ; and LE GESTA, the exploits of a hero. FRUTTI, the results ; also the fruits of the same plants ; and LE FRUTTA, fruits of various kinds (dessert). I MURI, the walls of a house, of a garden, of a park ; and LE MURA, the walls of a town. I CARRI, the chariots ; and LE CARRA, the carts, cart-loads. GLI 9351, the bones (any bones) ; and LE OSSA, the human bones. I CORNI, the horns (wind instru- ments) ; and LE C9RNA, the horns of an animal. I Risi,the rice (an Italian dish); and LE RISA, the plural of laugh. I LEGNI, the woods, the carriages, the ships ; and LE LEGNA, fire- wood. I MAGHI, the magicians; and i MAGi,the wise men (of the East) . the singular end in o, and are and are feminine : II centinaio, II migliaio, the mile, the pair, the bushel, the cry, the hundred, the thousand, le uova, the eggs. le miglia, the miles. le paia, the pairs. le staia, the bushels. le grida, the cries. le centinaia, the hundreds. le migliaia, the thousands, * Notice that an o preceded by a u has always the broad sound of the o in the word orphan. IOS ON THE GENDER AND NUMBER OF NOUNS. 422. Words ending in ie* are feminine, and do not change form in the plural. Ex. La specie, the species, kind, le specie, the species, kinds. La superficie, the surface, le superficie, the surfaces. Except " la moglie," the wife, which makes in the plural " le mogli." 423. The following nouns are irregular in the plural : Dio, God, gli dei, the gods. L'uomo, the man, gli uomini, the men. II bue, the ox, i bu9i, the oxen. 424. The following words have two meanings, and two genders : 1 II tema," means the exercise ; " la tema," means fear. 1 II fine," means the aim, scope ; " la fine," means the end. 1 Un margine," means a margin; " una margine," means a scar. 1 Un dramma," means a drama ; " una dramma," means a drachm. 1 Un pianeta," means a planet ; " una pianeta," means a priest's cope. 425. Observe that the words "la fame," hunger; "la sete," thirst; "la gioventu," youth ; "la servitu," servants, slavery; "1'udito," the hearing; " il miele," honey; " il fieno," hay; "la stirpe," race, family, and the names of virtues, vices, and metals are only used in the singular. Ex. "La probita," probity, "la modestia," modesty, "la superbia," pride, "T 01:0," gold, " 1' acciaio," steel, &c., are only used in the singular. 426. The following words are only employed in the plural : Gli annali, the annals. Le molle, the tongs. Le forbid, 1 , scissors Le st vi S lie ' the crockery- ware. Le cesoie, J Le spezie, the spices. Le nozze, the wedding. L' esequie, the obsequies. EXERCISE XLII. The fruit (420) for dessert is (are) on the side-board. The Jupiter of Homer was the first among the gods (88, 423) of mytho- logy. The games (409) and exercises practised by the Greeks, were good for the health of the body, and (for) the strength of the limbs (420). I have bought two pairs (421) of boots, one for Mary, and one for my sister Elizabeth. A friend has sent me (193) a basket of eggs (421). Climate (328, 397) has great influence on the character of (328) men. I have corrected your exercises. 427. * Notice that words ending with an accented vowel (see rules 396, 400, and 416), words ending in i (see rule 407), and words ending in ie (see rule 422) do not, asa rule, change form in the plural. Also that " re," king (which was formerly accented) has the same form in the singular and in the plural. ON COMPOUND NOUNS. IOO. LESSON XXI. ON ITALIAN AND ENGLISH COMPOUND NOUNS. ON ITALIAN COMPOUND NOUNS. 428. The number of Italian compound words is very limited, and the order of the words in them is seldom reversed. Most of them are of the masculine gender, and form the plural of the words of which they are composed according to the sense. Ex. SINGULAR. PLURAL. Un cap9lavoro,* a masterpiece, dei capilavori. Un capocaccia, a chief hunter, dei capicaccia. Una ferrovia, a railway, delle ferrovie. Un bass9rilievo, a bas-relief, dei bassirilievi. Un capogiro, a fit of giddiness, dei cap9giri. Un arcobaleno, a rainbow, degli archibaleno. Uno spazzacamino, a chimney-sweeper, degli spazzacamini. Madreperla, mother-of-pearl, delle madriperle. 429. When the first of the two words in a compound noun is Greek or Latin, or has lost the vowel ending, the second word alone is inflected. Ex. SINGULAR. PLURAL. Un ni9nosillabo, a monosyllabic word, dei ni9n9sillabi. Un viceconsolo, a vice-consul, dei viceconsoli. Un cav9lfiore, a cauliflower, dei cav9lfiori, ON ENGLISH COMPOUND NOUNS. 430. English Compound Nouns belong to three classes : The first class contains such nouns as straw hat, schoolmaster, moonlight, in which one of the two words qualifies the other, with which it has affinity or connection. In translating these compound nouns into Italian, the order of words must be reversed and the preposition "di," only, or (if the article is required, see pages 22, 93) "del," " dello," &c., is placed between the words. Ex. Un maestro di scuola, a schoolmaster. Una casa di campagna, a country-house. Un mercante di vino, a wine-merchant. I raggi del sole, the sunbeams. Le stelle della mattina, the morning-stars. An o, dotted thus o, has the broad sound of the o in the word orphan. 110 ON COMPOUND NOUNS. 431. The second class of English compound nouns includes such nouns as writing-paper, dining-room, in which the first noun expresses the use or destination of the second noun. In translating these compound nouns into Italian, the order of the words must be reversed, and the preposition " da " must be placed between the two words. Ex. Carta da scrivere, writing-paper. Una sala da pranzo, a dining-room. Una spazz9la da panni, a cloth-brush. Una bottiglia da vino, a wine-bottle. Una vesta da camera, a dressing-gown. 432. The third class of English compound nouns includes such nouns as steam-boat, wind-mill, in which the first noun denotes the means by which the object expressed by the first noun acts. In translating these compound nouns, the order of the words is in- verted, and the preposition " a " placed between the two words. Ex. Un batello a vapore, a steam-boat. Un mulino a vento, a wind-mill. Un bastimento a vela, a sailing-vessel. 433. No positive rule can be given for the formation of the following expressions, and the like : L' Ufficio della Posta, the post-office. II mercato del fieno, the hay-market. Bei campi a frumento, beautiful corn-fields. EXERCISE XLIII. Do you (122) like my brother's works ? I look upon them as master-pieces (428). Give me pen and ink (inkstand), a sheet of writing paper (431), and an envelope. I want (v9lere) (307) to write to the director of this railway. Last night I met (Past Def.) William at my brother's ;f he seemed (Imperf. Ind.) satisfied with (266) the result of his examination. How do you like your new house ? I do not like it much ; the dining-room (431) is very dark, the bed-rooms are small, and the ground-floor is gloomy. Where did you buy (have you bought) this chimney-piece ? (430) I bought it (180, 193) at Johnstone's.f Where have you been ? (149, 123) I have been to (the) market, to buy three cart-loads (420) of fire- wood. Where is the pincushion ? It is on the work- table, (431) near my sister's leather bag (430). We went to (207) America in a steam-boat (432), and came back in a sailing-vessel. 434. f The expressions at my brother's, at Charles', meaning at the house of, are translated into Italian "da mio fratello," " da Carlo," or " a casa di mio fratello," &c. But expressions such as at Johnstone's, are translated into Italian by " nel nego- zio, or nella bottega di Johnstone," when J. keeps a shop for selling goods (linen, furniture, &c.), and by " all'Albergo," or " al caffe Johnstone," when J. keeps a hotel, or a cafe. ON THE ITALIAN SUFFIXES. Ill LESSON XXII. ON THE ALTERATION IN THE MEANING OF WORDS BY MEANS OF SUFFIXES. 435. The Italians give the names of " Accrescitivi," (augmenta- tives), " Diminutivi," (diminutives), and " Peggiorativi," (depreciatives), to certain suffixes, which, like the English ish, alter or modify the meaning of nouns, adjectives, and even adverbs. The Italian language is very rich in suffixes, which modify in a variety of ways the idea expressed by the primitive term, and are of great use in adding expression to words. Only the principal suffixes will be given here. " ACCRESCITIVI." 436. The principal Italian " accrescitivi " are "one,""ona," " 9tto " and " otta." 437. The suffixes " one" and " ona" denote bigness, as well as stoutness. Ex. Un libro, a book, un librone, a big book. Un U9mo, a man, un 9mone,* a tall, stout man. Un cane, a dog, un cagnone,t a large dog. 438. On this point it is to be observed that when a feminine noun takes the suffix one it becomes masculine. Ex. Una strada, a street, uno stradone, a large road. Una d9nna, a woman, un d9nnone, a big, stout woman. 439. But adjectives take both the forms of the suffix, otherwise they might be ambiguous. Ex. Una vecchia, an old woman, una vecchiona, a big, old woman. 440. The suffixes " 9tto," "otta," indicate somewhat of an increase in the ordinary size, as well as vigour. Ex. Un ragazzo, a boy, un ragazz9tto, a fine strong lad. 441. The Italian " diminutivi " are divided into two classes : the " diminutivi-vezzeggiativi," (endearing), and the " diminutivi- dispregiativi " (depreciating). " DIMINUTIVI-VEZZEGGIATIVI." 442. The principal "diminutivi-vezzeggiativi" are " ino," "ina," "9lino," " 9lina," "etto," " etta," " ello," " ella," " erello," " erella," " icello," " icella," " oncino," and " oncina,"J which indicate affection, endearment, as well as smallness. Ex. Un fiume, a river, un fiumicello, a nice little river. Un pesce, a fish, un pesciolino, a nice little fish. Un vecchio, an old man, un vecchierello, a dear little old man. 443. * The word " uomo " loses its first letter, , when it takes a suffix. 444. + The word " cane " takes an euphonic ^"before the n when it takes a suffix, except before "ino," when the g is not inserted, as " un canino," a nice little dog. J Discrimination and taste must be had in using the " vezzeggiativi. " 112 ON THE ITALIAN SUFFIXES. 445. On this point it is to be observed that many feminine nouns become masculine when they take the suffix " ino." Ex. Una tav9la, a table, un tav9lino, a nice little table. 446. The suffixes in the following words are often used but cannot be easily classified. Arboscello* (from " albero," tree), a little tree, a shrub. " DlMINUTIVI-DISPREGIATIVI." 447. The principal " diminutivi-dispregiativi " are " uccio," " uccia," *' uzzo," " uzza," " onzolo," " onzola," which indicate despicable pettiness. Ex. Una stanza, a room, una stanzuccia, a small dirty room. 448. On this point it is to be observed that the suffixes " uccio," " uccia," appended to Christian names signify endearment, and not contempt. Ex. Carluccio mio ! My dear little Charley ! " PEGGI9RATIVI." 449. The principal Italian " peggi9rativi " are " accio," " accia," " azzo," "azza," which signify contempt for worthlessness. Ex. Uno cappello, a hat, un cappellaccio, an ugly, dirty hat. 450. The suffixes " aglia " and "ame," signify plenty but of no value. Ex. La canaglia (from " cane," dog), the rabble. Gentaglia (from "gente," people), vulgar people. Qssame (from " 9550," bone), a heap of bones. 451. The suffixes in the following words are often used but can- not be easily classified. Un poetastro (from " poeta," poet), a bad poet. Una casip9la (from " casa," house), a hovel. Un Iiberc9lo (from "libro," book), a paltry little book. Una fieruc9la (from " fiera," fair), an insignificant fair. 452. Sometimes two suffixes are added to one noun. Ex. Un librettino, a nice little book, Un vi9loncello, a violoncello. Un ruscellettino, a streamlet, Un 9maccione, a big, nasty man. 453. Some of the above-mentioned suffixes can be added to adjectives. Ex. Ricco, rich, riccone, very rich. Fresco, fresh, freschetto, rather fresh. Rosso, red, rossiccio, reddish. Amaro, bitter, amarastro, bitterish. 454. Some of the above-mentioned suffixes can be added to adverbs. Ex. Bene, well, benone, very well. Bene, well, benino, pretty well. t An e, dotted thus e, has the broad sound of the a in the word gate. ON THE ITALIAN SUFFIXES, AND COLLECTIVE NOUNS. 113 ON COLLECTIVE NOUNS. 455. There are two sorts of collective nouns, the collective general, and the collective partitive. 456. The collective general represents the whole collection, as " il popolo," the people, "1'armata," the army, "la flotta," the fleet, "la famiglia," the family, &c., and verbs, adjectives, and pronouns re- ferring to it are inflected as if they were used with a noun in the singular. Ex. II pop9lo* inglese mantiene i su9i The English people maintain diritti politici. their political rights. 457. The collective partitive represents only a portion of the col- lection, as " un'armata," an army, " una moltitudine," a multitude, &c., and, as a rule, verbs, adjectives, and pronouns used in the sentence are inflected according to the noun which follows the collective partitive. 1 ^ Ex. Una piccola armata di soldati eu- A small army of European sol- r9pei conquistarono le Indie. diers conquered India. EXERCISE XLIV. Where did you buy (have you bought) that (152) huge book ? (437) I bought it at Hachette's (434). I caught (180) this pretty little bird in its nest, in the trunk of a large tree, (437) near your uncle's farm. I am astonished to see you (122, 198) wearing (314) that horrid Spanish hat (177, 449). I wear it because it is light and comfortable. TakeJ (122) these pretty little books, and put them (201) on Elizabeth's little table. This morning we walked (Past Indef.) four miles (421) ; we went as far as the beautiful little bridge (442) near the village inn. Take away| this cur ; (444, 447) I hate it. Every evening we take a walkj along a small stream, in which a thousand pretty little fishes swim about. How do you do (see page 89) to-day? Very well! (454) I thank you. The committee (456) made a report of the case, and sent it to the king. Under his despotic government the people (456) suffered (Past Def.) many hardships. * See rule 63, to understand the meaning of the letters in the darker type. 458. t Notice, however, that when the Italians employ a collective noun, and want to express the action of the collection, as a whole, all words must be inflected as if they were used with a noun in the singular. Ex. Una folia, di nemici ci apparve A crowd of enemies appeared all'improvviso, suddenly before us. 459- t To take is translated into Italian by " Prendere." But to take, in the bense of to lead, is translated by " condurre," " menare." To take away, is translated by " Portar via," "monar via," and to take off, by "levare." To take a portrait is " Fare un ritratto." To take a walk, " Fare una passeggiata." 114 POETICAL FORMS OF NOUNS. IMPORTANT POETICAL FORMS OF NOUNS.* ( A rranged A Iphabetically . ) "Acciaro" is used in poetry for " acciaio," steel; " aere " for "aria," air; "aura" and " auretta " for " venticello," breeze; "agone" for " combattimento," combat; " aita " for " aiuto," help; " angue " for " serpente," serpent; " albore " for "alba," dawn; " altxpre " and " arlWe " for " albero," tree ; " alma " for " anima," soul ; " amista " for " amicizia," friendship ; " aquilone " for " vento settentrionale," north-wind ; " ara" for " altare," altar; " augei " for " uccelli," birds; " austro " for "vento del sud," south-wind; "avello" for " sepoltura," tomb ; " av9lo " for " n9nno," grand- father; " belva " for " fiera," wild beast; " belta " for " bellezza," beauty; " borea " for "vento settentrionale," north-wind; "brando" for " spada," sword ; " bufera " for " turbine," hurricane ; " calle " for " sentiero," path ; " capei " " ch^me " and " crine " for "capelli," hair ; " cittade" for " citta," city ; " clade " for " strage," slaughter; " corsiero " " corridore " " destriero " and " palafreno " for " cavallo," horse; "desio" for " desiderio," desire ; " delubro " for " tempio," church ; "die" for " di," day; "diva" for " dea," god- dess; " dritto " for " diritto," right; " dumi " for " spini," thorns; "etere" and "etra"for "cielo/'s^j; "euro" for " vento dell' est," east-wind; "face" for " fiaccola," torch; ' favella " for "lingua," language; " Fikmiela " for " rosignolo," nightingale ; " gaudio " for " allegrezza," joy; " gioventude " for " gioventu," youth; "gota" for " guancia," cheek; "guiderdone" for " ricompensa," reward; "imago" for "imagine," image; " iri " and " iride," for " arc9- baleno," rainbow; " labbia " for " labbra," lips; "lai" for " lamenti," laments ; "lari" for "dei," gods; "larva" for "spettro," spectre; " lemuri " for "spettri," hobgoblins; "lena" for "forza," strength; "magione" for " casa," house ; " m9nile " for " C9llana," necklace ; " motto " for " parola," word ; " nappo " for " tazza," cup ; "n9to" for "vento del sud," south-wind; " numi " for "dei," gods; "9ccaso"for " sera," evening ; " 9rto " for " mattina," morn- ing; " ostello " for " albergo," abode; " pelago " for " oceano," ocean ; " pieta " for " compassione,"/>zY_y; "prence" for "principe," prince; " Pr9gne " for " rondine," swallow; " quadrello " for " freccia," arrow ; " rai " for " raggi," rays ; " rio " for " ruscello," brook; "salma"for " corpo," body; " silva " for " foresta," forest; " speme" for " speranza," hope; " spirto " for " spirito," spirit; " stame " for " filo," thread; " strale" for " freccia," arrow ; " stelo " for "gambo," stem of a plant; " su9ra " for " S9rella," sister; " talamo " for " letto," bed; " vallo " for " fortificazione," fortifi- cation; " veglio " for " vecchio," old man; "vespero" for "sera," evening; and " vessillo " for " bandiera," flag. * The poetical forms. of verbs are given on page 92. ON QUALIFICATIVE ADJECTIVES. LESSON XXIII. ON QUALIFICATIVE ADJECTIVES. 460. In Italian, qualificative adjectives agree in gender and number with the nouns they qualify ; they end either in o or in e.* 461. Adjectives ending in o, become feminine by changing the o into a. They form their plural by changing the o into i for the masculine, and by changing the a into e for the feminine.f Ex. II marito e ricco e generoso, e The husband is rich and generous, 1-a moglie e bella e modesta. and the wife beautiful and modest. Cjuesti uomini sono ricchi e These men are rich and generous, generosi, e le loro mogli sono and their wives are beautiful belle e rrwdeste. and modest. 462. Adjectives ending in e, serve for both genders. They form their plural by changing the e into i. Ex. II principe e illustre e potente, The prince is illustrious and power- e la principessa e amabile, ful, and the princess is amiable ed oltremodo intelligente. and exceedingly clever. Cjuesti nobili sono illustri e po- These noblemen are illustrious and tenti, e le loro spose sono powerful, and their wives are "amabili, ed eleganti. amiable, and elegant. 463. In Italian, when an adjective qualifies two or more nouns, it is put in the plural form, and when the nouns are of different gender, the plural adjective agrees with the masculine. Ex. II padre e il figlio sono cattivi The father and son are wicked ed 9rg9gliosi, mentreche la and proud, whilst the mother madre e la figlia sono bu9ne and daughter are good and e cortesi. courteous. Trovammo i contadini e le loro We found the peasants and their mogli assai industriosi e civili. wives very industrious and civil. 464. * "Pari," equal, " impari," unequal, and " dispari," unlike, uneven, odd, are the only Italian adjectives that end in /, in the singular ; they have only one ter- mination for both genders and numbers. Ex. " Una vostra pari," stick a person as you are, 465. t Adjectives ending in " co," "go," " ca," "ga," in the singular, as a rule, form their plural in "chi," "ghi," "che," "ghe," as "antico," "antichi," "antica," "antiche," ancient. 466. Adjectives ending in " io" form their plural by merely cutting off the o ; as "savio," plural " savi," wise. But when the adjective ends in "io" the plural ends in " ii " ; as " rio," plural " rii," wicked. Il6 ON QUALIFICATIVE ADJECTIVES. 467. In Italian there is no fixed rule for the position of adjectives ; they are placed before or after the nouns they qualify, according to taste, and euphony. Ex. Un nemico potente, or un potente nemico. A powerful enemy. 468. Adjectives denoting colour, shape, taste, physical qualities, or derived from verbs, or names of nations, follow the nouns they qualify. Ex. Pa9lo p9rta un cappello bianco. Paul wears a white hat. Le tav9le rotonde sono eleganti. Round tables are elegant. Mi davano medicine amare. They gave me bitter medicine. Un uomo cieco ha 1' udito acuto. A blind man has sharp ears. Queste sono cose sorprendenti. These are surprising things. Leggo un romanzo* francese. I am reading a French novel. 469. When two adjectives qualify the same noun, if they are short adjectives, they may be placed one before and the other after the noun ; but if they are long words, they sound better after the noun. Ex. Un bel cavallo nero. A beautiful black horse. Questa storia e interessante e This history is interesting and istruttiva. instructive. 470. When there are more than two adjectives, they go after the noun they qualify. Ex. Un uomo ricco, intelligente e A rich, intelligent, and gener- generoso. ous man. 471. When the adjective is modified by an adverb, both the adverb and the adjective are placed after the noun. Ex. Sono fanciulli molto intelligent!. They are very intelligent children. 472. Some adjectives vary their significance according as they come before, or after the nouns they qualify ; the following are the most important : " Un gentihwmo " means a nobleman. " Un U9mo gentile " means a kind man. '' Un galantu9mo " means a worthy man. " Un uomo galante " means a polite man. " Un grand' U9mo " means a great man. " Un uomo grande " means a tall man. 11 Una certa n9tizia " means certain news. " Una notizia certa " means news which is authentic. * A z, dotted thus z, has the soft sound of the z in the word zeal (50, 53). ON "BELLO," "GRANDE," " BUONO," AND "SANTO." 1 1/ ON THE ADJECTIVES "BELLO," "GRANDE," "BUONO," AND "SANTO." 473. The adjective " bello," beautiful, pretty, is curtailed of the last syllable, before masculine nouns beginning with a consonant, except an s "impure" ; before a vowel it loses the final letter, and takes an apostrophe. The plural of "bello" is "bei," before a word beginning with a consonant, and " begli," before a word be- ginning with a vowel or an s " impure" Ex. Un bei quadro, a fine picture, bei quadri, fine pictures. Un bello scudo, a fine shield, begli scudi, fine shields. Un bell'anello, a fine ring, begli anelli, fine rings. 474. The adjective " grande," great, tall, large, loses the final syllable (de), before masculine nouns, beginning with a consonant, both in the singular and plural.* This elision does not take place before an s "impure"; before a vowel, "grande" drops the final letter and takes in its stead an apostrophe. Ex. Un gran popolo (21), a great people, gran popoli, great nations. Un grande scrigno, a large chest, grandi scrigni, large chests. Un grand' elogio, a great eulogy, grand' elogi. great eulogies. 475. The adjective " bupno," good, loses the final o, before nouns, masculine singular, beginning with a vowel, or any consonant, except an 5 "impure." Ex. Un bu9n ammiraglio, a good admiral. Un bu9n temperino, a good pen-knife. Un bu9no scrittoio, a good writing-desk. 476. " II santo " means the saint, and is a noun. 477. When "santo" means saint, and precedes a proper noun of the masculine gender, beginning with any consonant, except an 5 " impure," it loses the last syllable (to). This elision does not take place when " santo " means holy. Ex. Ho veduto la chiesa di San Pietro. I have seen Saint Peter's. II martirio di Santo Stefano. Saint Stephen's martyrdom. tfo visitato il santo sepolcro. I visited the holy sepulchre. 478. * Sometimes "grande" is also curtailed before feminine nouns, both in the singular and plural ; as " Una gran disgrazia," a great misfortune. ON QUALIFICATIVE ADJECTIVES. 479. A LIST OF IMPORTANT ADJECTIVES/ Fresco, fresh, new. Povero, poor. Giovine, young. Attempato, aged. Allegro, cheerful. Mesto, sad. Gl9rioso, glorious. Eminente, eminent. Bravo, brave, able. Netto, clean. Sporco, dirty. Alto, high. Corto, short. Pieno, full. Vuoto, empty. Stretto, narrow. Largo, wide, broad. Pigro, lazy. Leggero, light, clear. Pesante, heavy. Grosso, large, big. Grasso, fat. Magro, lean. Abile, clever. Sordo, deaf. Muto, dumb. IdpneOjf suitable. Vago, vague, charming. Vezzoso, Leggiadro, I pretty, charming. Brutto, ugly. Savio, wise. Stolto, foolish. Oscuro, dark. Grigio, grey. Spesso, thick. Gentile, polite. Rozzo, rude. Cattivo, bad, wicked. Forte, strong. Temerario, rash. Avido, greedy. R9tondo, round. Ovale, oval. Semplice, simple. Finto, feigned, artificial. EXERCISE XLV. Have you seen George's new carriage ? Yes, I have (208) ; it is strong and well made. The glorious productions of the eminent painter Raphael will ever form the delight of mankind. Napoleon I. often wore (Imp. Ind.) a grey (468) coat, and a round hat, with (a) a broad brim. General Garibaldi was riding a beautiful (473, 469) black horse. A great (474) talker is seldom a great speaker. If we had a good (475) telescope we could (304) see the custom-house. A tall man (472) is not always a great man. There is (154) a great difference between a polite (472) man and an honest man. Go (340) and fetch me a jug of warm (468) water. Here it is, (245) on the oval table. Where are you going, Bertha ? I am going (179) to Simpson's, (434) to buy some white cotton, and some red wool. I do not like this stair-case ; it is dark, and not clean. She writes in a simple (469) and natural style. My aunt has sent me a basket of flowers (348) ; it contains some red and white (465, 468) pinks, some pretty roses, and several kinds (422) of ferns. * The above List does not contain the adjectives given on the previous pages. 480. t Adjectives ending in 00 form their feminine by changing the eo into ea t and their plurals end in ei and ee. Ex. " Idoneo," " idonea," "idonei," suitable. ON THE WORDS " TUTTO," " MEZZO," AND " O'GNI." 1 19 ON THE WORD "TUTTO." 481. " Tutto," preceded by the definite article, means the whole, and is a noun. Ex. Mi dia il tutto, Signore. Give me the whole, Sir. 482. " Tutto," meaning all, every, whole, is an adjective, variable ; it is, in all cases, followed by the definite article. Ex. Tutti gli ufficiali ricevettero la All the officers received the medaglia. medal. Tutto il paese era lieto. The whole country was happy. 483. " Tutto " (or rather " del tutto "), meaning " intieramente," altogether, quite, is an adverb. Ex. Siamo tutto, or del tutto convinti. We are quite convinced. 484. " Tutti quanti," means the whole of them. Ex. Perirono tutti quanti. The whole of them perished. ON THE WORD "MEZZO."* 485. " Mezzo " means middle, way, means, and is a noun. Ex. Nel mezzo del giardino. In the middle of the garden. c'e mezzo di uscire. There is no way to get out. hanno i mezzi. They have not the means. 486. When " mezzo " means half ; it is an adjective, and is variable when it precedes a noun, but remains invariable when it follows it. Ex. Una mezza libbra di te. Half a pound of tea. Una libbra e mezzo di zucchero. A pound and a half of sugar. 487. Half, the half is translated into Italian by " la meta." Ex. Me ne dia la meta ; il tutto Give me the half ; the whole of sarebbe troppo. it would be too much. II terremoto distrusse la meta The earthquake destroyed half della citta. of the city. ON THE WORD "OGNI." 488. The adjective " ogni " means each, every ; it is of both genders and can only be used in the singular. Ex. Ogni paese ha i suoi C9stumi. Every country has its own cus- toms. Ogni signora aveva dei fiori nei Every lady had flowers in her capelli. hair. * Two 22, dotted thus zz, have the soft sound of the 22 in the word muzzle (52, 53). 120 ON THE WORDS " ALTRO," " MOLTO," "TANTO," &C. ON THE WORD "ALTRO." 489. " Altro," meaning other, is an adjective, and agrees in gender and number with the word to which it relates. Ex. H9 un altra sorella in Italia. I have another sister in Italy. Non ha altri libri che questi ? Have you no other books but these? 490. When " altro" is used as a noun, it means one thing, some- thing else. Ex. Altro e il parlar di rruprte, al- It is one thing to speak of death, tro e il morire. but another to die. 491. " Non. ..altro che" means nothing else but. Ex. Paolo nn fa altro che ciarlare. Paul does nothin but talk. 492. When " altri " is repeated it signifies some... others. Ex. Altri andavano,* altri veni- Some were going, others were vano. coming. 493. In the colloquial style " altri " is sometimes used pleo- nastically after " noi " and " voi." Ex. Noi altri Italiani amiamo la We Italians are fond of music. milsica. ON THE WORDS "MOLTO," "TANTO," ALTRET- TANTO," "QUANTO," " TROPPO," AND " POCO." 494. The words, " molto," much, very; " tanto," so much; " al- trettanto," as much; " quanto," how much; " tr9ppo," too much; " P9co," little; are adjectives, and therefore variable, when they precede a noun. Ex. V'erano molti uomini e mol- There were many men and women, ted9nne,map9chifanciulli. but few children. 495. "Molto," "tanto," " altrettanto," "quanto," "troppo," and " p9co," are adverbs when they modify an adjective, a verb or another adverb. Ex. Queste ragazzine sono molto These little girls are very intel- intelligenti. ligent. 496. The expressions " Da quanto tempo," and " Da quanto in qua," mean How long (up till now). Ex. Da quanto tempo studialalin- How long have you been studying guaitaliana? (See rule 277. )' Italian? 497. The expression " Un poco di," means A little. Ex. Ant9nioha un p9co di danaro. Anthony has a little money. * See rule 63, to understand the meaning of the letters in the darker type. POETICAL FORMS OF ADJECTIVES. 121 EXERCISE XLVI. Why do you like the Italian (468) language ? I like it because it is sweet and harmonious. The whole (482) country was in a state of agitation. When the clergyman's children saw us, they became (Past Def.) quite (483) cheerful. Let us go into that shop ; I have seen there (239, 243) some pretty (473) ribbons and French lace. Here is (245) a pound of good tea ; give (122) half (487) of it (240) to your sister. He spent an hour and a half (486) in writing (314) this letter. Louisa does nothing else but (491) sew and embroider. These chickens are large and fat, but the partridges are very lean. My brother has made me a (360) present of some beautiful (473) artificial flowers. How long (496) have you been waiting for (251) us? I have been waiting half (486) an hour. William began again to speakf of his Italian acquaintances. POETICAL FORMS OF ADJECTIVES. (A rranged A Iphabetically.) " Algente" is used in poetry for "ghiacciante/'/wmw^; "almo" for "che da animo e vita," reviving; "altrice" for "nutrice," foster- ing; "aprico" for "esposto al sole," sunny ; " b9reale " for " setten- trionale," northern; "arto" for " stretto," narrow; "atro" for " nero," black ; " baldo " for " coraggioso," courageous; "corrusco" for "brillantissimo," very brilliant; "diro" for "empio," impious; "diva" for "come una dea," godlike; " eburneo " for "come d'avorio," like ivory ; " edace " for " divoratore," devourer ; " ermo " for " solitario," lonely; " fedo " for " sporco," dirty; "fievole"for " debole," feeble; " flavo " for " giallo," yellow; " flebile " for " lacrimabile," tearful; " ferale " for " funesto," baneful; " frale " for "fragile," fragile; " immane " for " spietato," pitiless; " imo " for " bassissimo," Lowest ; " inulto " for " non vendicato," unavenged ; " irto " for " irsuto," shaggy; " lieve " for "leggiero," light; " olezzante " for " profumato," perfumed ; " prisco " for " primitivo," primitive; "protervo" for " arrogante," arrogant; "reduce" for "che e di ritorno," returned from ; "repente " for "subitaneo," sudden; " reo " and "no" for " colpevole," guilty ; " r9mito " for " solitario," solitary; "rorido" for "rugiadoso," dewy; "truce" for "fiero," fierce; " tumido " for " gonfio," swollen and bumptious ; " ultrice " for "vendicatrice," avenger; " venusto " for " leggiadro," charming; and "vetusto " for " antico," ancient. * The poetical forms of verbs and nouns are given on pages 92 and 114. 498. t The expressions to begin again to speak, to begin again to write, &c., are translated into Italian by " tornare a parlare," " tornare a scrivere," &c. 122 ON THE FORMATION OF ADVERBS. LESSON XXIV. ON THE FORMATION OF ADVERBS FROM ADJECTIVES. 499. Adverbs are invariable and have no fixed place in a sentence, in Italian, but they are generally placed after the verb with which they are connected ; when adverbs modify adjectives, or past participles, they precede them. Ex. Andrea scrive bene. Andrew writes well. Matilde parla correttamente. Matilda speaks correctly. Questi artisti sono molto bravi. These artists are very clever. Filippo era elegantemente vestito. Philip was elegantly dressed. Scrive il francese molto bene. He writes French very well. . 500. Some adverbs consist of a single word, as " quando," when, " sempre," always; others are formed of two or more words, and are commonly called adverbial expressions,! as "aH'improvviso," unexpectedly ; "d'ora in p9i," henceforth. 501. Many adverbs are formed in Italian by adding " mente '* (which means manner], to the feminine form of adjectives. Ex. Generoso, generous, generosamente, generously. Diligente, diligent, diligentemente, diligently. D9ttissimo, very learned, dottissimamente, very learnedly. 502. When adjectives end in " le " or " re," the e must be sup- pressed in forming adverbs. Ex. Facile, easy, facilmente, easily. Partic9lare, particular, partic9larmente, particularly. 503. The adjectives "chiaro," clear, "forte," hard, " felice." happy, and a few others, are sometimes used as adverbs. Ex. Parlate chiaro. Speak clearly. Egli batte forte. He strikes hard. Vivete felice ! Live happily ! 504. Adjectives and adverbs may be used in the Positive degree, as " bello," pretty, or in the Comparative degree, as " piu bello," prettier, or in the Superlative degree, as "il piu bello," the prettiest. * An s, dotted thus s, has the soft sound of the s in the word rose. t Further on will be found a list of adverbs and adverbial expressions. ON THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 1 23 COMPARISON OF EQUALITY. 505. Comparisons of equality having reference to adjectives, participles, and adverbs are formed, in Italian, in the following ways : FIRST TERM. SECOND TERM. Cos! (or si), as (or so) come, as. Tanto (or altrettanto), as, as much quanto, as. Ex. Egli e cosi ricco come mionipote. He is as rich as my nephew. Cesare era tanto valoroso quanto Caesar was as brave as Pom- Pompeo. P e Y- Ella scrive cosi elegantemente You write as elegantly as your come suo fratello. brother. 506. Comparisons of equality having reference to nouns are formed, in Italian, in the following ways : FIRST TERM. SECOND TERM. Tanta (or altrettanta), as, as much quanta, as. Tanti (or altrettanti), ) f quanti, 1 -,-, , \ } as many < ^ \ as. Ex. Tante (or altrettante), J | quante, \ N9n ho tanti amici quanti ne ha I have not as many friends as mio fratello. my brother has. 507. Comparisons of equality having reference to verbs are formed, in Italian, in the following ways : FIRST TERM. SECOND TERM. Piu (or quanto piu), the more piu (or tanto piu), the more. Meno (or quanto meno), the less meno (or tanto meno), the less. Tale ' 1 such \ quale ' \ as Ex Tali, } 5 0>l j quali, j a Piu Carlo studia, piu desidera The more Charles studies, the di studiare. more he desires to study. Ci descrisse la scena tal quale He described the scene to us 1' aveva veduta. such as he had seen it. 508. The first terms " cosi," " tanto," " tale," may be omitted. Ex. Essa n9n e bella come sua so- She is not so pretty as her rella. sister. Egli n9n e sapiente quanto lo He is not as learned as we be- credevamo. lieved him to be. 509. " Al pari di," or " al pari che," as much- as, and " non meno di," or "non meno che," not less than, may be used instead of "cosi. ..come ;" " tanto. ..quanto.'* Ex. " Egli fu lodato al par di me." He -was praised as much as I. 124 ON THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON. COMPARISONS OF SUPERIORITY AND INFERIORITY. 510. In Italian, the comparative degrees of Superiority and In- feriority are formed by translating the adverbs more, by " piu" ; and less, by " meno " ; and the conjunction than, by " di " or " che." 511. When move than and less than indicate comparison, and are placed before nouns or adjectives, they are translated either by " piu di " or " piu che," and " meno di," or "meno che." Ex. Carlo e piu educate di (che) Charles is more educated than Pietro. Peter. Nel d'ecimo quarto secolo 1' Ita- In the fourteenth century Italy lia era piu colta di (che) tutte was more polished than any le altre nazioni dell' Europa. other nation of Europe. 512. When more than and less than indicate comparison, and are placed before personal pronouns, they must be translated by " piu di," " meno di," and the personal pronouns must be in the objective form (" me," " te," " lui," &c.). Ex. Voi siete piu ricco di me. You are richer than I. Ella e di lunga pezza piu d9tta She is a great deal more learned di lui. than he. 513. Notice, however, that when a personal pronoun is followed by a verb (not in the Infinitive) of which it is the subject, than is rendered by " che non," " di quel," or " di quello che," and the pronoun is used in the subjective form (" 19," "tu," " egli," &c.), as in English. Ex. II disegro e piu difficile che io Drawing is more difficult than n9n (di quello che) lo credevo. I thought. 514. When more than, less than, do not indicate comparison, they are expressed by " piu di," " meno di." Ex. Egli possiede piu di trenta He possesses more than thirty mila lire sterline. thousand pounds sterling. 515. Than must be translated by " che " when the comparison takes place between two verbs in the Infinitive Mood, two nouns, two adjectives, or two adverbs. Ex. E piu difficile saper ascol- It is more difficult to Icnow how to tare, che saper parlare. listen, than to know how to speak. A New York s'incontrano In New York one meets more piu Inglesi che Frances!. English people than French. A parer mio, essa e piu* In my opinion, she is rather vezzosa che bella. attractive than beautiful. E meglio tardi che mai. It is better late than never. 516. * " Piuttosto" (rather) might be used here instead of " piu," thus : " Ess* e piuttosto vezzosa che bella." She is attractive rather than bemitiful. ON THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON. I2 5 EXERCISE XLVII. She is as (505) pretty as her sister, but not so (505) clever. The simplicity of nature is more pleasing than (511) the embellish- ments of art. Do not (122, 128) walk so fast, walk slower. It is nobler to forgive than (515) to avenge one's self. London has as many (506) inhabitants as Belgium. Shall we go to the Crystal Palace ? I think so (271) ; it is better to go to-day than (515) to-morrow. Give him two guineas; you are richer (512) than I. The twilight in the south is much shorter than in the north. In the first centuries the Romans were more warlike than (515) literary. Wrought iron is much stronger than cast iron ; it is less (510) brittle, and much (495) more durable. A feigned peace is more dangerous than open war. It is better to acquit a criminal than (515) to condemn an innocent person. ON THE SUPERLATIVE DEGREES. 517. Adjectives and adverbs may be raised to the Superlative Relative, or to the Superlative Absolute degree. ON THE SUPERLATIVE RELATIVE DEGREE. 518. The Superlative Relative is formed by placing " il piu," " il, meno," before the adjective, or the adverb. Ex. E il piu ricco cittadino di* Londra. Adolfo e il meno ingegnoso dei tre fratelli. La grazia e la piii nobil parte della bellezza. He is the richest citizen in London. Adolphus is the least ingenious of the three brothers. Grace is the noblest part of beauty. 519. The article may be omitted when "piu" and "meno" follow the noun. Ex. Egli e 1'oratore piu eloquente He is the most eloquent orator dei n9stri tempi. of our day. 520. The following adjectives form their Comparative, and their Comparative Superlative degrees in two ways : POSITIVE. Bu9no, good. Cattivo, bad. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE RELATIVE. better. II piu bu9no, or il migliore, II piu cattivo, or il peggiore, [ the best. f the worst. Piu or migliore, Piu cattivo, or peggiore, Grande, great. Piu g rande > | greater. ll ^ ^ rande ' } the greatest. OY maggiore, j s or il maggiore, ) 521. * Observe that in Italian after a superlative relative the preposition "di," not " in," is used before names of places. * 126 ON THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON. POSITIVE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE RELATIVE. Piccolo, small. Piu picc9lo, | smaller. 11 piu picc9lo, } the smallest. or minore, j or il minore,* j Alto, high. Piu alto, or superiore, 1 higher. 11 or piu alto, il superiore, ! the highest. Basso, low. Piu basso, or inferiore, } lower. 11 or piu basso, il inferiore, } the lowest. EXAMPLES. II mio libro e piu buono, or migli- My book is better than that of ore di quello di sua sorella. your sister. E il peggior romanzo ch' io abbia It is the worst novel I ever letto. read. 522. The following adverbs form the Comparative and Super- lative degrees without the help of " piu " or " meno." POSITIVE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE. Bene, well, meglio, better, il meglio, the best. Male, badly, peggio, worse, il peggio, the worst. Molto, much, piu, more, il piu, the most. P9co, little, meno, less, il meno, the least. ON THE SUPERLATIVE ABSOLUTE DEGREE. 523. The Superlative Absolute degree is indicated in several ways in Italian. 524. Adjectives and adverbs can be raised to the superlative absolute degree by changing their final vowel into " issimo," " issima," " issimi," " issime." Ex. POSITIVE. SUPERLATIVE ABSOLUTE. Buono, good, b9n issimo, very good. Picc9lo, little, picc9lissimo, very little. Bene, well, benissimo, very well. Dottamente, learnedly, d9ttissimamente, very learnedly. 525. Adjectives ending in " io " lose these two vowels before the superlative termination " issimo," and those ending in " co" and " go," " ca " and " ga," which take an h in the plural also take it before " issimo." Ex. Savio, wise, savissimo, very wise. Ricco, rich, ricchissimo, very rich. Largo, wide, largh issimo, very wide. 526. * In speaking of physical size " piu grande," " il piu grande ; " " piu picco- lo," "il piu piccolo," must be used, and not " maggiore," " il maggiore ; " " minore," " il minore." Ex. La mia casa e piu grande che la vostra. My house is larger than yours. 527. " Maggiore " and " minore " signify also eldest and youngest. Ex. Mio fratello maggior^. My eldest brother. ON THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 22? 528. A few adjectives form the superlative absolute in " errimo." Ex. Misero, miserable, miseprimo, very miserable. Celebre, celebrated, celebePrimo, very celebrated. Acre, bitter, acceprimo, very bitter. Integro, honest, integeprimo, very honest. Salubre, salubrious, salubeprimo, very salubrious. 529. Sometimes " ottimo," " pessimo," "massimo," " minimo," " sommo," and " infimo," may be employed instead of " b9nis- simo," " cattivissimo," &c. 530. Adjectives and adverbs can be raised to the superlative absolute degree by translating very, or most, by the adverbs "molto," " assai," or " oltrem9do." Ex. Egli e molto, assai, ov oltremodo generoso. He is very generous. 531. Another way of raising adjectives and adverbs to their superlative absolute degree, is to repeat them. Ex. Ella divenne rossa rossa. She became very red. Entrarono pian piano. They went very softly. EXERCISE XLVIII. This tragedy is very interesting, (471) and very well Written. She is taller (512) than you by* three inches. The mosaics (410) of Rome are the most famous (518) in Europe. Write to your brother and tell him (201) to call on mef as soon as possible. J I want to go to Paris ; all the more so because my sister is there also (there is (239) also my sister). She is so kind, amiable, and pretty that|| everybody admires her. My uncle's friend is the richest man in (521) this village. Gold is the purest, the most precious, the most ductile, and after platina, the heaviest of all metals. God's power extends from the lowest (520) abyss of the earth, to the highest (520) parts of the heavens. He is the bravest (518) and ablest general of his time. 532. * The English expressions taller... by, richer... by, are translated into Italian by "piu grande...di," "piu ricco...di." Ex. "E piu ricco di me, di due mila lire sterline." He is richer than I am, by two thousand pounds. 533. t The expressions to call on, to go to the house of, are translated into Italian by " andare da," " passare da." Ex. " Andro da Giovanni," I will call on John. 534. J The expression as quick as possible is rendered in Italian by " il piu presto possibile." 535. The expression all the more so because is translated into Italian by " tanto piu che." 536. || The expressions so kind t)iat, so amiable that, &c., are translated into Italian by " cosi buono che," "talmente buono che," "buono a segno tale che," " amabile a tal segno che," &c. Ex. E abile a segno tale che fa la mera- He is so exceedingly clever that he ex- viglia di tutti. cites wonder in everybody. 128 ON NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. LESSON XXV. ON NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. CARDINAL NUMBERS. ORDINAL NUMBERS. Uno i. Due 2. Tre 3. Quattro 4. Cinque 5. Sei 6. Sette 7. Otto .. 8. Nove g. Dieci 10. Undid ii. Dodici 12. Tredici 13. Quattordici 14. Quindici 15. Sedici 16. Diciassette 17. Diciotto 18. Diciann9ve ig. Venti 20. Ventuno 21. Trenta 30. Quaranta 40. Cinquanta 50. Sessanta 60. Settanta 70. Ottanta 80. Novanta go. Cento* 100. Centuno 101 . Millet 1,000. Un Milione 1,000,000. Primo ist. Secondo 2nd. Terzo 3rd. Quarto 4th. Quinto 5th. Sesto 6th. Settimo 7th. Ottavo 8th. Nono gth. Decimo loth. Decimo primo:}: nth. Decimo secondo i2th. Decimo terzojl i3th. Decimo quarto i4th. Decimo quinto i5th. Decimo sesto 1 6th. Decimo settimo I7th. Decimo ottavo i8th. Decimo n9no igth. Ventesimo 2oth. Ventesimo primo 2ist. Trentesimo 3oth. Quarantesimo 4oth. Cinquantesimo 5oth. Sessantesimo 6oth . Settantesimo 7oth. Ottantesimo 8oth. Novantesimo goth. Centesimo i ooth. Centesimo primo loist. Millesimo i ,oooth. Milionesimo i ,ooo,oooth . 537. * " Cento " does not change in the plural. Ex. " Due cento uQmini," 200 men. 538. t " Mille " does not require the indefinite article before it. Ex. "Millc soldati," 7,000 soldiers, and is changed into " mila," in the plural. Ex. "Tre mila scudi," 3,000 crowns. J Or " und^cimo." Or " duodecimo." || Or " Tredic^simo." ON NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 129 ON THE USE OF NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 539. A nought (o)in Italian is translated by "zero;" plural "zeri." 540. The feminine of " uno," one, is " una " ; but the other cardinal numbers remain invariable. Ex. Ella ha due libri, ed io ne ho You have two books, and I have uno. one. 541. " Uno," " una," used as nouns signify a man, a woman. Ex. Ho visto uno che si vanta I have seen a man who is sempre. always boasting. 542. When the noun is placed after "ventuno," "trentuno," Sec., it must be in the singular, as it agrees with "uno;" but when it comes before, it agrees with "venti," and is therefore in the plural. Ex. "Ventuno* cavallo," or "Cavalli ventuno," twenty-one horses. 543. In stating the order in which sovereigns, volumes and chapters of books, acts and scenes of plays, follow one another, the ordinal numbers (which are variable) are used in Italian as in English, but the article is omitted ; and they must agree in gender and number with the noun to which they relate. Ex. Vittorio Emanuele secondofu Victor Emanuel the second was il primo re d' Italia. the first king of Italy. Scena prima, atto secondo. Scene the first, act the second. 544. The dates of the month, except the first day, are expressed in Italian by the cardinal numbers, preceded by the definite article in the singular or plural; the first is expressed by the ordinal number. The preposition " di" may be put before the day of the month. Ex. Quanti ne abbiamo del mese ? What is the day of the month ? Oggi e il primo (di) marzo. To-day is the first of March. Colombo sc9pri 1' America it Columbus discovered America on dodici (di) 9ttobre, nell'an- (147) the twelfth of October, in no, or simply i nel mille (e)J the year fourteen hundred and quattro cento npvantadue. ninety-two. 545. * The transposition of the units after the tens is not admissible in Italian ; for instance, we never say "due e venti," but " venti due." 546. + On the second, &c., are translated into Italian by " i due," or " ai due," or " addi due " (at the day two), &c. Ex. " Londra, addi 20 febbraio, 1892." J The Italians do not usually put the conjunction " e," and, between "mille " and " milione" and another number. 547. Eleven hundred, twelve hundred, &c., are rendered in Italian by "mille e cento," " mille e due cento." and not by " undici cento," &c. 9 130 ON NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. EXERCISE XLIX. In the year one (356) thousand and sixty-six, England (330) was conquered by (270) William of Normandy, an (353; event of the greatest (520) importance. I have been reading (179) the " Aristo- demo," of Monti, and have learnt by heart scene (543) the fourth, act the first. How old* is your nephew ? He will be seventeen on (147) the 5th of next month. How longl will you remain in this city ? I shall leave Rome on the i5th (546). Sardinia is (313) one hundred (356) and fifty miles (421) from Italy. Your letter ofj the the 25th of February (74) reached me on the ist instant (544). Frederick the second (543) king of Prussia, was a great warrior (474). What is the day (544) of the month ? It is the gth (546). 548. Expressions having reference to the hour of the day are rendered in Italian as follows : Che ora e ? or che ora abbiamo ? What o'clock is it ? E un'ora, or il tocco. It is one o'clock. Sono le due e mezzo. It is half-past two. Saranno presto le tre. It will soon be three o'clock. A che ora e partito suo fra- At what o'clock did your tello ? brother leave ? Quando parti erano le undici When he left it was eleven antimeridiane, ma il suo ba- o'clock a.m., but his ship stimento n9n fece vela che did not set sail before two alle due pomeridiane. p.m. Ora sono le sei meno un quarto, Now it wants a quarter, or ten 9 meno died minuti. minutes to six. 549. Ago is rendered in Italian by "fa; " this day week, by " oggi a otto ; " a fortnight, " quindici giorni ; " this day fortnight, " oggi a quindici : " in a month, " fra un mese," or " da qui a un mese." Ex. Mio fratello lascio Londra dieci My brother left London ten giorni fa, e sara diritorno 9ggi days ago, and will return a otto. this day week. Credo che le elezioni avranno I think that the elections will luogo fra un mese. take place in a month. 550. * The expression how old is? is translated into Italian by " quanti anni ha?" or " che eta ha?" ; and I am twenty, &c., by "ho vent' anni," &c. 551. t In speaking of time, how long is translated by " quanto tempo." 552. Expressions like your letter of the \yh instant, &c., are translated by "La sua (or vostra) l^ttera del quindici corrente." ON NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 131 DISTRIBUTIVE AND COLLECTIVE NUMBERS. 553. Un terzo, one third. Un trimestre, three months. La meta, the half. Un lustro, five years. II doppio, the double. Una v9lta, once. Una coppia, a couple. Due V9lte, twice. Una d9zzina,* a dozen. Ad uno ad uno, one by one. Una ventina,* a score. A due a due, two by two. 554. Both is translated by "tutti e due," " tutt'e due," " ambo," " ambidue," or "ambedue," " entrambo," or " entrambi ; " and all three, all four, &c., are translated by " tutti e tre." " tutti e quattro," &c. ; and the substantive which follows them takes the article. Ex. Tutti e due i fratelli. Both brothers. Tutt' e tre le S9relle. The three sisters. EXERCISE L. Send me (201) two dozen (555) of oranges (411), and three dozen of lemons. Neptune, the most (518) distant of the planets (397) takes i&4f (164 years and f) (553) years to make its revolution round the sun ; Uranus, 84 years and a few (494) days ; Saturn, 29^ (486) years ; Jupiter, nearly 12 years ; Mars, i year, 10 months, and 21 days ; (542) the Earth, i year ; Venus, 7 months, and 13 days; Mercury, 2 months, and 27 days. I have just (299) sold my horse for (251) thirty pounds, and ten shillings. What is the heightf of this room ? It is about twelve feet high,f and seventeen feet long. Out ofj fifteen thousand inhabitants, there were two thousand (538) killed. We generally breakfast at eight (548), have luncheon at one, and dine at six o'clock. Dante (334), Petrarca (333) and Boccaccio, lived in the fourteenth century, they are the most celebrated Italian trecentisti. 555- * When the words "dozzina," "ventina," " centinaio," " migliaio " (see rule 421), are used in the plural, they are variable. Ex. " Sei dozzine di bicchieri." Six dozen glasses. 556. t The expressions -what is the size, height? &c., are rendered in Italian by " qual' e lagrandezza, Paltezza," &c. ; and it is twelve feet high, long, &c., are trans- lated into " ha dodici piedi di altezza, lunghezza," &c. 557- t Out 0/15,000 men, &c., is translated by " Di qui.rj.dici mila uOmini," &c. 558. Instead of "II clecimo quarto," "II decimo quinto," " II decimo sesto secolo," the 1 4th, i^th, i6th centuries, the Italians often use the expressions " II trecento," "il quattrocento," "il cinquecento ; " so that a personage who lived in the fourteenth, fifteenth centuries, &c., iscalled " Untrecentista," " un quattrocentista," c. 132 ON POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. LESSON XXVI. ON POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 559. In Italian the words " mio," " tuo," " suo," " n9Stro," " vostro," and " loro," are used both as Possessive Adjectives, and as Possessive Pronouns ; they are possessive adjectives when they are used with, and possessive pronouns when they stand for, a noun . 560. In Italian, possessive adjectives agree with the thing possessed, and not with the possessor, and are generally preceded by the definite article, as follows : SINGULAR. PLURAL. MAS. FEM. MAS. FEM. 11 mio, la mia, i miei,* le mie, my. 11 tuo, la tua, i tuoif le tue, thy. 11 suo, la sua, i su9i, le sue, his, her, its, 11 nostro, la n9stra, i nostri, le n9stre, our. 11 vostro, la vostra, i V9stri, le vostre, your. 11 loro, la loro, i loro, le loro, their. EXAMPLES. II mio amico vuol vendere la My friend wants to sell his sua casa. house. I miei vicini hanno perduto il My neighbours have lost their loro cane. dog. 561. When several nouns follow one another in the same sen tence (whether used as subjects or objects), the possessive adjec- tive, as well as the preposition which may accompany it, must be repeated, in Italian, before each of the nouns, if they are already expressed before the first. Ex. Pa9lo ha preso i miei colori ed i Paul has taken my colours and miei pennelli.J brushes. Parliamo sempre di voi e delle We always speak of you and V9stre S9relle. your sisters. * Notice that an e preceded by an i has always the broad sound of the a in the word gate. + Notice that an o preceded by a u has always the broad sound of the o in the word orphan. J Notice that the e in the syllable ello, ending nouns and qualificative adjectives, has always the broad sound of the a in the word gate. ON POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 133 562. When his, her, do not refer to the subject of the verb, or when there are two nouns of different genders in the same sentence, in order to avoid ambiguity, the pronouns " dilui," of him, " dilei," of her, of you, replace the adjectives " il suo," " la sua." Ex. Ella brucio tutte le di lui lettere. She burnt all his letters. Egli condusse seco sua S9rella He took with him his sister, e i di lei figli. and her son. 563. The article is omitted before " mio," "tuo," " suo," (i npstro," " V9stro," (not " loro ") when they immediately precede nouns of kindred, and rank, in the singular. But when the noun of kindred is in the plural or is preceded by an adjective, or modified by a suffix, the article is prefixed to the possessive abjective. Ex. Mia madre e le mie S9relle parti- ranno per Venezia domani. Furono presentati a Sua Eccel- lenza* dal Principe. II loro padre e in villa. Fui cortesemente ricevuto dal suo ottimo padre. Ho dato una cassettina di dolci al vostro fratellino. 564. The possessive adjectives require the article when they precede the following nouns of kindred : My mother and sisters will leave for Venice to-morrow. They were introduced to His Excellency by the Prince. Their father is in the country. I was courteously received by your most excellent father. I have given a box of sweets to your little brother. II mio genitore, La mia genitrice, II mio fanciullo, 1 II mio ragazzo, J La mia fanciulla, 1 La mia ragazza, J II tuo germane, La tua germana, II suo sp9so, 1 II suo consorte, J La vostra sp9sa, > La vostra consorte, I used instead of mio padre, my father. ,, ,, mia madre, my mother. ,, ,, mio figlio, my son. ,, ,, mia figlia, my daughter. ,, tuo fratello, your brother. tua S9rella, your sister. ,, suo marito, her husband. ,, V9stra moglie, your wife. * Notice that the e in the termination enza has always the broad sound cf the a in the word gate. 134 ON POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 565. The possessive adjectives may be placed after the noun, and in this case the article is placed before the noun. Ex. Se cosi piace all' Eccellenza If it is agreeable to your Ex- V9stra. c.ellency. L'onor mio non permette cio. My honour does not permit this. 566. The expressions, a friend of mine, a sister of yours, &c., are rendered by " un mio amico," " una vostra S9rella," &c., or " uno dei miei amici," " una delle vostre S9relle," &c. Ex. Ho incontrato un V9stro amico, I met a friend of yours on sul ponte di Londra. London Bridge. 567. The relation expressed by the possessive adjectives is ele- gantly conveyed in Italian by means of the conjunctive pronouns " mi," to me, " ti," to thee," " gli," to him, " le," to her, or to you. Ex. Egli mi e padre (instead of He is my father. Egli e mio padre). lo non gli sono amico (instead I am not his friend. of lo non sono suo amico). lo le son figlio (instead of lo I am her son. son suo figlio). 568. When the possessive adjectives its and their relate to things, and are in the same clause of a sentence with the possessor (noun or pronoun, used as subject), and when they are preceded by any preposition, they are translated into Italian by " il suo," " la sua," "i su9i," "lesue," "il loro," "la loro," "i loro," " le loro." Ex. Parigi ha le sue bellezze ; am- Paris has its beauties ; I admire miro lo stile dei su9ipubblici the style of its public edifices edifizi. 569. When the possessive adjectives its and their are not in the same clause of a sentence with the possessor, and are not preceded by a preposition, they are expressed in Italian by " ne," before the verb, and the article, "il," "lo," " la," &c., before the noun. Ex. Comprero questi cavalli, quan- I shall buy these horses, al- tunque io n9n ne conosca la though I do not know their razza, or complessione.* breed (real constitution). 570. * " Complessione " means constitution, physique, temperament. Complexion is translated into Italian by " carnagione." ON POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 135 EXERCISE LI. The rose has its (560) beauty, its freshness and its fragrance ; but it has also its thorns. The lustre of our ancestors' glory reflects on us, to (225) inspire us (198) to imitate their (560) virtues. One of our horses is so lame (536) that we cannot drive him to-day. That lady is a relation of mine (566). One of my favourite studies is botany. She showed him her (562) splendid picture-gallery, and costly jewels. Cornelia, the mother of the Gracchi, said to her (562) friends as she (mentre) showed them (211) her sons, "These are (245) my jewels." He is a friend of mine, (566) and has just married one of my cousins. I do not like to hear cats mewing* (314) at night. Your sister is prettier (510) than my cousin Jane ; she hasf fair hair, blue eyes, and a beautiful complexion (570). 571. The Italians make use of the definite article, and not of the possessive adjective, when the sense clearly points out who is the possessor. Ex. Oggi mi du9le il capo. My head aches to-day. Diresse le parole alia moltitu- He directed his words to the dine irritata. an g r y multitude. 572. Before a noun indicating mental or physical qualities, or any part of the dress or body, if the action expressed by the verb falls on its subject, the Italians make use of the definite article, and not the possessive adjective ; and the verb is used reflectively. Ex. Mi lavo le mani con sapone. I am washing my hands with soap. Si e fatto male alia mano He has hurt his right hand. destra. Essa si levo subito i guanti. She took off her gloves at once. Gaddo mi si getto piangendo Gaddo threw himself at my feet a'piedi. (Dante.) weeping. 573. * To mew, like a cat (gatto), is translated by To bark, like a dog (cane) To growl, like a dog (cane) To neigh, like a horse (cavallo) To bray, like an ass (asino) lo bellow, like an ox (hue) To grunt, like a pig (porcello) To bleat, like a sheep (pecora) To roar, like a lion (leone) To hoivl, like a wolf (lupo) To crow, like a cock (gallo) To sing, like a nightingale (rosignuolo) To chirp, like a sparrow (passero) To talk, like a parrot (pappagallo) To squeak, like a mouse (sorcio) ' Mingolare." ' Abbaiare." ' Latrare." ' Nitrire." ' Ragliare." ' Muggire." ' Grugnire." ' Belare." ' Ruggire." 'Urlare." 'Can tare." ' Cantare." ' Garrire." ' Parlare." ' Squittire." 574. t After the verb " Avere" when particular qualities of the body are men- tioned, the definite article is used in Italian. " Ha i capelli biondi." She has fair hair. 136 ON POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. 575. But when the action of the verb is not directed to its subject, the English possessive adjective is replaced in Italian by the conjunctive pronouns " mi," to me, " ti," to thee, " gli," to him, 11 le," to her, or to you, &c. Ex. Mi fate sempre male alia mano. You always hurt my hand. II chirurgo gli rimise il braccio, The surgeon set his arm, in a in poco tempo. very short time. 576. The expression one's own is rendered in Italian by " il pro- prio," " la propria," &c., or " il mio proprio," " la mia propria," &c. Ex. L'ho veduto coi pr9pri, or I saw him with my own eyes, co' miei propri 9cchi.* 577. In the following cases the definite article is not required before the possessive adjectives " mio," " tuo," " suo," &c. I. In addressing a person. Ex. " Mio caro." My dear. II. In exclamations. Ex. "Oh! miei Signori ! " Oh Igentlemen! III. In many idiomatic expressions, like the following : Ho incontrato una persona di I have met an acquaintance of mia conoscenza. mine. Faccio a mio capriccio (v9glia I act according to my whim, or senno). (will, or mind). L'h9 salutata daparte V9stra. I gave her your compliments. E colpa V9stra. It is your fault. Fabbrico a mie spese. I am building at my own expense. ON POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 578. The Possessive Pronouns, mine, thine, his, hers, ours, yours, theirs, are translated into Italian by the Possessive Pronouns " il mio," "il tuo," &c., " i miei," "i tuoi," &c., which agree in gender and number with the noun to which they relate. Ex. Mi dia il suo libro, e prenda il Give me your book, and take mio. mine. La n9stra casa e piu grande Our house is larger than theirs. che la loro. 579. When possessive pronouns are used simply to indicate possession, without limiting the number of persons, or objects, possessed, the article is not required before them. Ex. Questo cavallo e suo. v This horse is his. Dichie questo sigillo ? E mio. Whose seal is this ? It is mine. Aspetto V9stre lettere. I expect letters from you. 580. * The expressions to write with one's own hand, to tliink with one's own mind, are rendered by " scrivere di propria mano," " pensare di proprio senno." ON POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. 137 581. When, in speaking of several persons, animals, or objects, reference is made to something of which each person, animal, or object has only one, the Italians always use the name of that thing or object in the singular. Ex. S'invigoriscono la mente collo They strengthen their minds studio della fitosofia. with the study of philosophy. Sacrificarono la vita in un'in- They sacrificed their lives in a presa inutile. useless undertaking. 582. The possessive pronouns " il mio," " il tuo," &c., used as nouns, signify my property, my share, &c. ; and " i miei," " i tuoi," &c., mean my friends, relations, supporters, followers, &c. Ex. Spendete il vostro, se vi piace. Spend your own, if you like. H9 veduto i miei un mese fa. I have seen my people a month ago. Lascio il paese con molti de' He left the country with many suoi. followers. EXERCISE LII. Do you like my (560) books ? Yes, I like them (193) ; they are better (520) than mine. Instead of giving the money to his father, he put (mettersi) it (218) in (572) his own pocket. Your garden is prettier than ours, but our orchard is larger, and better (522) stocked than yours. Henry IV. (543) of France used to play : - with his (560) children, carrying them on his (571) back round his royal apartments. Do you buy your clothes ready made ?f No ; I have them made to orderj at Johnson's (434). The unfortunate Charles VI. of France passed his (571) time in (278) playing at cards with his attendants. The customs of our ancestors were simpler and healthier than ours (578). The books you have sent to the bookbinder are mine (578) and not yours. He spoils his (572) health by studying too much at night. 583. * To play (to amuse one's-self) is translated by "Giuocare," or " Divertirsi." To play a game at, by " Giuocare una partita a," or " Giuocare a." To play upon the violin, &c., by " Suonare il violino," &c To play the part, by " Fare, or rappresentare la parte. " To play tipon (with guns, &c.), by " Far fuoco su or sopra. " To play (speaking of a fountain), by " Zampillare," or " Gettare." To play the fool, by " Fare il pazzo," or " Ruzzare." To play a trick, by " Pare una burla," or " celia." To play onone, by " Prendersi giuoco di." To play false, by " Ingannare." 584. t The expressions ready-made, already written, &c., are translated into Italian by " bello e fatto," " belli e fatti," " bello e scritto," &c. 585. \ To have a thins; done (to order], to have a thing written, &c., are translated into Italian by " farsi fare," " farsi scrivere," &c. 138 ON DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES. LESSON XXVII. ON DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES. 586. In Italian the words " questo," " cotesto," and " quello," are used both as Demonstrative Adjectives, and Demonstrative Pronouns ; they are demonstrative adjectives when they are used with a noun, and demonstrative pronouns when they stand for a noun. 587. The Demonstrative Adjectives agree in gender and number with the noun with which they are used. They are : SINGULAR. PLURAL. Mas. Questo, 1 .-,- Questi, Fern. Questa, j Queste, Mas. Cotesto, \ Cotesti, Fern, Cotesta, Coteste, Mas f Quello, [that. Que g U> I those. [Quel, Q ue i y <3 ue ') Fern. Quella, / Quelle, ; 588. " Questo," " questa,"* " questi," and " queste, "t precede a noun indicating a person or a thing near the speaker, either with regard to place or time. Ex. Questo signoree questa signora. This gentleman and this lady. Questi scrigni e queste cassette. These chests and these boxes. 589. " Cotesto," " cotesta," that, " cotesti," and " coteste," tnose,\ precede a noun indicating a person, or an object, near the person spoken to, and distant from the speaker. Ex. Dove ha ella comprato cotesto Where have you bought that bei quadro ? beautiful picture ? Di chi sono cotesti bei fanciulli ? Whose are those beautiful chil- dren ? 590. * In the colloquial style " stamattina," "stasera," "stanotte," are frequently used instead of "questa mattina," "questa sera," "questa notte." 591. t The poets often use "esto." "esta," "esti," "este," instead of "questo, &c. "Maestro, esti torment) cresceranno ei dopo la gran sentenza?" (Dante). Master, will these torments increase after the great judgment ? 592. J "Cotesto," " cotesta, "&c., are frequently spelt " codesto," "codesta,' '&c. ON DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES. 139 593. " Quello " and "quel," that, are used before a noun in- dicating a person or thing distant from the person who speaks, and also from the person addressed. " Quello " is used before nouns beginning with a vowel,* or an 5 followed by another consonant, and " quel " before nouns beginning with a consonant. Ex. Quello specchio e rotto in due That looking-glass is broken in posti. two places. Quel signore canta bene. That gentleman sings well. A quel tempo c' era vino in ab- At that time wine was plenti- bondanza. ful. 594. " Quegli " and " quei " (or " que' ") those, are used before a noun indicating a person or thing distant from the person who speaks, and also from the person addressed. " Quegli " is used before nouns beginning with a vowel, or an 5 followed by another consonant, and " quei" before nouns beginning with a consonant. Ex. Quegli uccelli sono di rara bel- Those birds are very beau- lezza. tiful. Quegli schioppi si fabbricano Those guns are manufactured a Woolwich. at Woolwich. Quei ragazzi giuocano tutto il Those boys are playing all day giorno. long. 595- " Quella " and " quelle " are used before feminine nouns beginning with a consonant ; before a vowel they are very often changed into " quell'." Ex. Quella tela si fabbrica in Ir- That cloth is manufactured in landa. Ireland. Dove si comprano quelle belle Where are those beautiful frames cornici ? bought ? 596. Sometimes the word which ought to follow "questo," " questa," " quello," " quella," is understood. Ex. In questo (momento)egli arrive. At this moment he arrived. In quella (ora) essa mori. At that hour she died. 597. Sometimes "questo" and " quello " means this thing, that thing, and are nouns. Ex. Fate questo, vi dico. Do this, I tell you. 598. * Before a vowel, " quello" is very often changed into " quell'." Ex. Quell' arcobaleno e stupendo. That rainbow is magnificent. 140 ON DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 599. When several nouns follow one another, in the same sentence (whether used as subjects or objects), the Demonstrative Adjective must be repeated before each of them, when it is ex- pressed before the first. Ex. Comprerb questi pettini e queste I will buy these combs and spazzole da capelli. hair-brushes. EXERCISE LIII. These (588) cherries and (599) strawberries are ripe, but those (595) pears are not.* Go and (340) fetch me that (593) looking- glass. How much timef did you spend (have you spent) in (to) paint- ing (314) your sister's portrait ? I could (sapere) not tell (it) you (198, 218). This money is his (579), and not yours. Give me that (593) thimble, those (594) needles, and that thread. Take off those (589) ugly boots of yours (449, 572) ; they will lame your feet (572). Have you paid much for (251) these jewels ? Yes, I have ; I paid (180) two pounds ten shillings for this necklace. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 600. "Questo,"} " cotesto," " quello," "questi," " cotesti," " quelli " (not " quegli," nor " quei "), are demonstrative pronouns when they are used instead of nouns, and, of course, they agree in gender and number with the noun to which they relate. Ex. N9n vpglio il V9stro cavallo ; I don't want your horse ; I want voglio questo. this one. Se 19 fossiin Lei,non comprerei If I were in your place, I would queste carte geografiche ; not buy these maps ; I would comprerei quelle. buy those. 601. * When the word so is understood in English, it must be translated into Italian by the pronoun lo, which always remains invariable. 602. t Time, is translated by "tempo." Time (of the day), is translated by " ora ; " as " A che ora arriva il treno ? " At what time does the train arrive ? Time, meaning epoch, is translated by " allora ; " as, " Allora era ricco." Then he was rich. Time, meaning season, is translated by "stagione;" as, "In questa stagione dcll'anno." In this season of the year. Time, meaning occasion, is translated by " volta ; " as, " L'ho visto due volte." / saw him twice. 603. J The adverbs "qui " and "la" are sometimes put after the demonstrative pronouns, to indicate more forcibly the person or thing referred to. Ex. Compri questo qui, e non quello la. Buy this one, and not that one. 604. " Quei " is however used as a pronoun in expressions like " Quei di Mila- no." The men (people] of Milan. Dante often uses " quei " instead of " colui." Ex. E come quei, che con lena affannata. And even as he, who, with panting breath. ON DEMONSTRATIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 141 605- " Questo " and " quello," " questa " and " quella," " questi " and " quegli," are also used as relative pronouns, meaning the latter, and the former ; " questo " and " quello " should be used with refer- ence to things ; in speaking of persons " questi " and " quegli " are used, but only as subjects, in the masculine singular. Ex. H9 comprato una grammatica I have bought a French grammar francese e un dizi9nario te- and a German dictionary ; the desco ; quella per Filippo, former for Philip, the latter questo per Guglielmo. for William. I due piu grandi 9ratori dell' The two greatest orators of anti- antichita furono Demostene quity were Demosthenes and e Cicerone ; quegli era greco, Cicero ; the former was a questi romano. Greek, the latter a Roman. ON DEMONSTRATIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 606. THE ITALIAN DEMONSTRATIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS ARE : /- . ,7 n , ,-, ~ ( these men. Costui, tkts man. Costei, this woman. Costoro, { ,, ( these women. Cotestui,* \ that majtm Cotestei, 1 ^ WQM Cotestoro, ) those men. Colui, j Colei, j Coloro, j those women. 607. The above pronouns are used for persons only, and do not refer to any antecedent. When they are used in prose, especially in the colloquial style, they often express contempt towards the person or persons alluded to ; whilst in poetry they are often used in the sense of highest admiration, and even reverence. Ex. Dimmi, chi e costui ? Tell me who is this man (fellow)? Sa ella che costoro sono ladri ? Do you know that these fellows (Pellico). are thieves ? " Quando vidi costui (Virgilio) nel gran diserto." (Dante). When I beheld him (Virgil] in tlie great desert. ON THE INDEFINITE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 608. The demonstrative indefinite pronouns that and this (mean- ing that thing, this thing], are translated into Italian by " cio." Ex. Cio (69) n9n mi va a genio. I do not like that. N9n parliam piu di cio. Let us speak of that no more. Da cio capisco il resto. From that I understand the rest. 609. * There is the same difference in meaning between "costui," "cotestui," and " colui," as there is between "questo," " cotesto," and " quello." (See 587-595). 142 ON INDEFINITE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 610. The indefinite pronouns that, that which, what, are translated into " cibche," " quel che," ov " quello che." Ex. Cib che sorprende tutti e 1' arrivo What surprises everybody is the del principe. arrival of the prince. Quel che dice e vero. What he says is true. Tutto quello che* risplende n9n All is not gold that glitters, e oro. 611. The indefinite pronoun what, meaning which thing, is trans- lated into " che," or " che C9sa." Ex. Che C9sa volete, Francesco ? What do you want, Francis ? A che pensa, Signore ? What are you thinking of, Sir ? EXERCISE LIV. What (611) do you think of this country ?f I like it almost as much as (505, 508) my native country. Of these three horses, this is the one (which)J I should prefer. Modesty (328) is to merit, what (610) shadows are to the figures in (di) a painting. We are body and mind ; the former (605) should (224, 397) obey, the latter command. That which (610) is superfluous often costs more than that which is necessary. That man, by (con) his (560) extrava- gance, has not only squandered all his own property, (582) but also that (600) of his wife. I am influenced by (270) love (328) and (by) anger ; the former (605) pleads that I should forgive him, the latter that I should punish him. Dante (334) and Shakespeare (333) were two great poets ; the former (605) was (Imp. Ind.) an (354) Italian, and the latter an Englishman. I will do all that which (610, 612) depends upon (from) me to obtain that (593) post for you (198). Your sister has just (299) made me a (360) present of this beautiful bunchg of grapes. That (593) clock is fast,|j and my (560) watch is ten minutes slow. 612. * " Quanto " is often used instead of " tutto quello che." Ex. Fa quanto dipende da lui. He does all he can. 613. t Country is translated into Italian by " paese " when it means a territory occupied by a people. \ Ex. " L' Italia e un bel paese." Italy is a fine country. 614. Country is translated into Italian by " campagna," when it means the conn- try, the fields. Ex. " Va a passare 1' estate alia campagna." He is going to spena the summer in the country. 615. Country is translated into Italian by " patria," when it means the fatherland. Lx. " Amo la mia patria." 1 love my native country. 616. J The one (which}, is translated by "quello che," and " quella che." 617. A bunch of grapes is translated by " Un grappolo d'uva ; " a bunch of keys, by " Un mazzo di chiavi ; " a bunch of flowers, by " Un mazzo di fiori." 618. || In speaking of a clock, or watch, to be fast is rendered by " Avanzare," and to be slow, by " Star indietro," or " Ritardare." ON RELATIVE PRONOUNS. LESSON XXVill. ON RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 619. THE ITALIAN RELATIVE PRONOUNS ARE : il quale, m. s. la quale, f. s. i quali, m. p. le quali, f. p. Cui, or il quale, &c. Di cui,* or del quale, &c. A cui, or al quale, &c. Da cui, or dal quale, &c. Per cui, or pel quale, &c. Con cui, or col quale, &c. In cui,t or nel quale, &c. SUBJECT. Che, or - DIR. OBJ. INDIR. OBJ. . who, which, that. whom, which. of whom, of which, whose, to whom, to which, from whom, from which. for whom, for which, with whom, with which, in whom, in which. 620. Both the pronouns "che" (" cui," " di cui," &c.), and " il quale" ("del quale," &c.), are used with reference to persons, animals, and things ; but still, when referring to animals or things, "il quale," " del quale," &c., is generally used. Ex. II giovine che (or il quale) parla. The young man who is speaking. Ecco 1'albero il quale (or che) produsse tanti fiori 1'anno passato. II signore di cui (or del quale) le ho parlato. Le faro vedere il fiume dal quale (or da cui) tutta questa valle e irrigata. There is the tree which pro- duced so much blossom last year. The gentleman of whom I have spoken to you. I will show you the river by which all this valley is watered. 621. * When reference is made to things, " di che," "a che," &c., may be used instead of " di cui," "a cui," &c. Ex. La materia di che parlar dobbiamo e The matter about which we have to importantissima. speak is most important. 622. t When referring to time " che," instead of " in che," or " in cui," is used. Ex. " Lo dl che (in cui) hanno detto ai On the day they said good-bye to dolci amici addio." (Dante). their dearest friends. 144 OJNT RELATIVE PR 'NOUNS. 623. The relative pronoun must always be expressed in Italian, even when it is omitted in English. Ex. II ragazzo che vidi n9n era cosi The boy I saw was not so tall grande come mio fratello. as my brother. 624. " Che " as well as " cui " may be used in the accusative ; but when there may be ambiguity between the subject and the object of the phrase, " cui " (which is never used as subject) should be used, and not " che." Ex. L'individuo cui maltrattb V9- The individual whom your stro fratello. brother ill-treated. L'eroe,* cui tutto il mondo The hero who is honoured by pnora. the whole world. 625. When " di cui " corresponds to whose, it is generally placed between the article and the noun with which it is used, and the preposition " di " is omitted. Ex. La Fiammetta, i cui capelli Fiammetta, whose hair was erano crespi, lunghi ed'9ro." crisp, long, and like gold. (Boccaccio). 626. In poetry, and in the higher style, " onde" is used instead of " di cui," " del quale," &c., "da cui," " dal quale," &c. Ex. " Amor depose la faretra e 1'arco, Onde (di cui) sempre va carco." (Tasso). Love laid down the low and quiver, With which he is always armed. " Que' begli 9cchi ond'escon saette." (Petrarca). Those beautiful eyes whence arrows dart. 627. When referring to persons the " a," of " a cui," is often omitted. Ex. " Voi, cui (a cui) for tuna ha posto in mano il freno Delle belle contrade..." (Petrarca). You , in whose hands fortune has placed the control Of the beautiful lands... 628. When which, of which, to which, &c., have for antecedent a clause, or the whole of a foregoing sentence, they are translated by " il che," " del che," " al che," &c. Ex. II povero vecchio piangeva The poor old man was weeping amaramente, il che mi com- bitterly, which moved me mosse oltreni9do. very much. Lo hanno maltrattato, di che si They ill-treated him, of which lagna sempre. he always complains. * An e, dotted thus e, has the broad sound of the a in the word gale. ON INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 145 629. The pronouns hf who, she who, the one who, those who, the one that, the one which, those which, having reference to an antecedent, are relative pronouns, and are expressed by " quello che," " quella che," " quelli che," or " quelle che." Ex. Ammiro questi giovinetti, specie I admire these youths, particu- quello che ha recitato " II Cin- larly the one who recited que Maggio " del Manzoni.* "The Fifth of May" by Manzoni. 630. But when the words he who, she who, those who, do not refer to any antecedent, they are Indefinite Personal Pronouns, and are translated by "colui che" (or "il quale"), "colei che" (or "la quale "), " coloro che " (" i quali," or " le quali "). Ex. Colui che le ha detto cib, si e He who said that, was making fatto beffe di Lei. fun of you. Coloro che si 59111 igliano si a- Birds of a feather flock to- mano. gether. 631. "Che," "quale," and "quali" are also used as inter- rogative pronouns ; " che " then means what, and " quale," and " quali " mean which (of two, or several persons or things). Ex. Che lavoro c' e da fare ? What work is there to do ? Quale preferite di queste case ? Which of these houses do you prefer ? 632. The exclamations what ! what a! are translated by "che!" or " quale ! " Ex. Che bel palazzo ! che peccato What a beautiful palace ! what che n9n sia abitato. a pity it is not inhabited. 633. The expressions " un non 59 che," " alcun che," mean a something or other (indescribable). Ex. Ha " un certo n9n 59 che," che There is something or other mi va a genio. in him that I like. 634. " Quale " (or " quali ")..." quale" (or " quali"), mean one... another, some... others. Ex. Quali andavano, quali venivano, Some were going, some were tutti erano affaccendati. returning, all were busy. 635. " Quale " is sometimes used in the sense of such as. Ex. " E quale e quei che volentieri acquista." (Dante). And as he is who willingly acquires. * A z, dotted thus z, has the soft sound of the z in the word zeal. IO 146 ON THE WORD " CHE." 636. When "che" means that, it is a conjunction, and is always expressed in Italian, even when it is omitted in English. Ex. Non credo che abbia alcun I do not think he has any right diritto di parlare. to speak. 637. " Che " (whether the accent is marked or not) is often used instead of " perche," for, because. Ex. " ......... che, p9der ch'egli abbia, N9n ti tprra lo scender questa roccia." (Dante). for, any power that he may have, Shall not prevent thy going down this crag. 638. " Che," preceded by a verb used negatively, means nothing, nothing but, only. Ex. Luigi non ha che fare. Louis has nothing to do. Non ricevette che k>di ; nep- He received nothing but praises; pure un S9ldo. not so much as a half-penny. 639. " N9n che," followed by a verb in the Infinitive, is equiva- lent to the English expression, not only... but. Ex. N9n che scrivermi, venne Not only did he write to me, a vedermi due V9lte. but he came twice to see me. 640. " Che " is sometimes used instead of " quando," when. Ex. Pietro venne che avevo gia Peter came when I had already finite. finished. 641. " Che ! " or " ma che ! " mean the same as nonsense ! Ex. Ma che ! n9n sa neanche leggere. Nonsense ! he cannot even read. EXERCISE LV. Which (631) do you like best of those (594) three books ? The one that (629) has the illustrations, and is bound in parchment. That lady is Mrs. Trivelli, of whom (619) I spoke (Past Def.) to you yesterday. My sister learns music from the gentleman whom (624) your brother recommended (180) to me (193). The young lady (623) we met last night at Mrs. Jones' (434) has just (299) entered (183) the drawing-room. Which one ? (631). The one who (629) spoke French to you. The watch (623) you bought me is broken (rompersi). Not only (639) did he send us the tickets, but he took us to the theatre in his carriage. Historians represent .men such as (635) they are poets depict them such as they should be (224). * The straight reading of this sentence is " Non dico che spero trovar perdono ; dico che spero trovar anche pieta." / do not say that I hope to find pardon ; I say that I hope to find also pity (sympathy}. ON INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 147 LESSON XXIX. ON INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 642. THE PRONOUN "CHI." Chi, who, whom, he who, him who. Di chi, of whom, whose, of him who. A chi, to whom, to him who. Da chi, from whom, from him who. Per chi, for whom, from him who. &c. &c. &c. 643. The pronoun " chi " is both an indefinite and an interroga- tive pronoun ; it is used for persons only, is invariable, and serves for both genders and numbers, it has no need of any antecedent. Verbs employed with "chi" are used in the singular only, except " essere "* which is used in both numbers. Ex. Chi le ha fatto questo regalo ? Who made you this present ? Chi sono i di lei corrispondenti ? Who are your correspondents ? Sappiamo di chi volete parlare. We know whom you allude to. A chi ha dato il biglietto ? To whom did you give the ticket? Da chi ha ricevuto quest bu9- From whom did you receive naf n9tizia ? this good news ? Per chi dipinge questo bellissi- For whom do you paint this mo quadro ? beautiful picture ? 644. " Chi "..." chi" mean one... another, some... others. Ex. Chi accorre, chi sguizza tra One runs up, another sneal^s U9mo e U9mo, e se la batte. away between man and man, (Manzoni). and takes to his heels. 645. " Chi " is often used instead of " colui che," " colei che," "coloro che," especially in proverbial expressions. Ex. Chi legge, regge. Knowledge is power. Chi e in difetto, e in sospetto, He who is in fault, is in suspicion. Chi si scusa,J si accusa. He who excuses himself, ac- cuses himself. * See rule 63, to understand the meaning of the letters in the darker type, t Notice that an o, preceded by a u has always the broad sound of the o in the word orphan. J An s, dotted thus s, has the soft sound of the s in the word rose. 148 ON INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. "CHIUNQUE," AND CHICCHESSIA." 646. The Indefinite Pronouns, " chiunque," and " chicchessia " (plural " chicchessiano ") mean whoever, and can only refer to persons ; " chicchessia " is followed by the conjunction " che," and a verb in the Subjunctive Mood. Ex. Chiunque desiderava parlarle, Whoever desired to speak to doveva 9ttenerne il permesso her, was obliged to get per- dal magistrate. mission from the magistrate. Ditelo pure a chicchessia che Tell it to whomsoever you like, vi piaccia. "CHECCHESSIA." 647. The pronoun " checchessia," means anything whatever. Ex. Datemi checchessia. Give me anything whatever. 648. "Qualunque," " qualsisia," "qualsivoglia," and their plural forms " qualsisiano," and " qualsivOgliano," mean whatever, whatso- ever ; they may refer to things or persons, and are adjectives or pronouns, according as they precede, or stand for a noun. Where they are adjectives they are followed by a verb in the Subjunctive Mood preceded by the conjunction "che." Ex. Dategli un vestito qualunque. Give him any coat you like. Qualunque raccomandazione Whatever recommendation he ch' egli abbia, non* sara elet- may have, he will not be to. elected. " ALCUNO." 649. " Alcuno," " alcuna," " alcuni," " alcune," " qualcuno," " qualcheduno," mean some, any, someone, some people ; " alcuno," &c., are adjectives when they precede a noun, and pronouns when they stand for a noun ; " qualcuno " and " qualcheduno " are only pro- nouns. Ex. Alcuni poemi italiani sono diff i- Some Italian poems are difficult cili a tradursi. to translate. Non h9 ancor visto alcuno. I have not seen anybody yet. "TALE," AND " COTALE." 650. " Tale " and " tali," " cotale " and " cotali " mean such a, some one. These words are adjectives or pronouns, according as they precede or stand for a noun. Ex. Un tal U9mo n9n e da com- Such a man is not to be pitied, piangersi. * An o, dotted thus o, has the broad sound of the o in the word orphan. ON INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 149 "CERTO." 651. " Certo,"* " certa," "certi," and "certe" mean certain. These words are adjectives or pronouns, according as they precede or stand for a noun. Ex. Ho sentito una certa notizia. I have heard certain news. 652. " Tale," " tali," and " cotale," " cotali " are also used to begin the second part of a simile, and mean such, even so. E,x. " Quale colui, che grande inganno ascolta Che gli sia fatto, e poi se ne rammarca, Tal si fe' Flegias nell' ira acc9lta." (Dante). As one who listens to some great deceit WMch has been done to him, and then sore resents it, Such grew Phegyas in his gathered rage. " Cotali uscir dalla schiera ov' e Dido." (Dante). So came they from the band where Dido is. "TALUNO" AND "CERTUNI." 653. "Taluno" and "certuni" are indefinite pronouns; "taluno" means some one, and is only used in the singular; " certuni " means some people, and is only used in the plural. Ex. C'e taluno la che n9n mi va There is some one there I do molto a genio. not much like. Certuni hanno idee curiose. Some people have odd ideas. EXERCISE LVI. Who (643) is knocking at the door ? My little brother James. To whom (643) have you told the news ? To my sister-in-law. The road through which (619) we passed was (Imp. Ind.) very lonely. From whom (643) do you expect a letter ? From that lady who (619) spoke to you at my brother's house. Children (328) who (619) obey (to) their parents! deserve to be praised. What (631) is the weight of this shield ? It is about ten pounds.^ For whom are you painting that vase? For my mother-in-law. The pencil with which (619) I was writing (179) is broken. Whose hat is this ? It belongs to that little girl (442). What (611) are you thinking of ? I was thinking of the advice you gave (180) to me. 654. * " Un certo tale," " una certa tale " mean a certai.i person. Ex. Ho incontrato un certo tale. I have met a certain person. 655. + Parents is translated into Italian by " genitori ; " " parenti" means rela- tions. The word acquaintances is translated by " conoscenti,"and " conoscenze." 656. \ Pound, weight, is translated by " libbra ," pound sterling, by " lira sterlina." " Lira," alone, means tenpence. 657. The advice of a friend is translated by " il consiglio di un amico ; " advice, in the sense of opinion, is rendered by ' ' parere." 150 ON INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. "OGNUNO." 658. " Ognuno," " 9gnuna," mean any man, any woman, any one ; they are used with or without an antecedent. Ex. Ognuno che V9glia esser mem- Any one who wishes to be a bro di quella societa deve member of that society, must pagare una ghinea. pay one guinea. "CIASCUNO" AND CIASCHEDUNO." 659. " Ciascuno," " ciascheduno," and their feminine forms, mean every, everyone, each, and are adjectives or pronouns ; they are adjectives when they precede a noun, and pronouns when they stand instead of a noun. Ex. Ciascuno degli official! ebbe a Every officer had to pass an subire un esame. examination. Ricevettero una lira sterlina Each of them received a pound ciascheduno.* sterling. "ALTRI."t 660. The indefinite pronoun " altri " means others, I. Ex. Gli altri n9n parleranno. The others will not speak. Altri n9n agirebbe cosi. Another (I) would not act thus. 661. The pronoun " altri " is sometimes used in Italian, when in English the verb may be used in the passive form. Ex. " Venite a noi parlar, s' altri n9l niega." (Dante). Come and speak to us if it is not forbidden. " ALTRUI." 662. " Altrui " means other, others, and only refers to persons ; it is employed both in the singular and plural numbers, as the direct or indirect object of a verb, but never as its subject. The prepositions " di," and " a," before " altrui," are often omitted. Ex. Egli brama 1' altrui. He covets other people's pro- perty. Vuol sempre aver n9tizia dei He always wants to know other fatti altrui (or di altrui). people's business. " La mia vita che e celata al- My life which is hidden to trui." (Petrarca). others. * Instead of "ciascheduno" one could say "per uno," or "a testa." Ex. Dateci una ghinea a testa. Give us a guinea each. 663. t " Altri "..." altri" mean one... another, some... others. Ex. Altri veniva, altri andava via, &c. One came, another went away ; &c. ON INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 1 51 "L'UN L'ALTRO." 664. The reciprocal pronouns "1'un 1'altro," ("1'una 1'altra," " gli uni gli altri," &c.) mean one another ; the second term of these pronouns (" 1'altro," " 1'altra," &c.) may be preceded by a preposi- tion. Ex. Si aiutano 1'un 1'altro.* They aid one another. Sparlano 1'una dell'altra. They speak ill of one another. "L'UNO E L'ALTRO," &c., " AMBO," &c. 665. The collective pronouns " 1' uno e 1' altro," " 1' una e 1' altra," "tutti e due," "tutt'e due," "ambo," " ambidue," " entrambi," &c., mean both ; " gli uni e gli altri," " le une e le altre," mean all of them. They are followed by the definite article, when they precede a noun ; before a verb the article is omitted. Ex. L' uno e 1' altro de' miei fratelli Both my brothers were out of erano fu9ri di casa. doors. " Ambo le mani per d9lor mi morsi." (Dante*). Both my hands in agony I bit. Gli uni e gli altri furono puniti. All of them were punished. "O L'UNO, L'ALTRO," &c. 666. The pronouns "9 1'uno, 9 1'altro," " o 1' una, o 1'altra, "f &c., mean either one, or the other, (or others,) either. Ex. Mi mandi 1' uno, 9 1' altro. Send me either one or the other. "NE L'UNO NE L'ALTRO," &c. 667. The relative pronouns " n 1'uno ne 1'altro," " ne 1'una ne 1' altra," &c., mean neither the one nor the other. The verb used with these pronouns must be accompanied by the negation " n9n," and be in the singular or in the plural number, according as the action it expresses may be done by one, or both the persons spoken of, or alluded to. Ex. N9n comprero ne 1'uno ne I shall not buy either of them. F altro. Ne Foscolo ne Monti n9n e Neither Foscolo nor Monti is 1' autore di questo poema, the author of this poem. Ne 1'una ne 1'altra non ver- Neither the one nor the other ranno. will come. 668. * Instead of the reciprocal pronouns "1'un 1'altro," &c., the Italians some- times use the adverbs "scambievolmente," mutally, " reciprocamente," reciprocally. 669. + The other disjunctives used in Italian instead of "o" are " ovvero," "ossia," "oppure," " odanche." 152 ON "NIUNO," " NIENTE," "NULLA," "QUANTO," &C. "NIUNO," "NESSUNO," "VERUNO." 670. " Niuno," " Nessuno," " Veruno," and their feminine forms mean nobody, no one, and are adjectives, or pronouns, accord- ing as they precede or stand for a noun. When they follow the verb, they must be preceded by the negation " n9n," but when they precede it, they do not require any negation before them. Ex. Niun uomo e senza difetti. No man is without his defects. Non ho parlato a nessuno. I have not spoken to anyone. Nessuno e profeta nel pr9prio No one is a prophet in his own paese. country. ON THE WORDS "NIENTE," AND "NULLA." 671. "Niente" and "nulla" used as nouns (preceded by an article) mean nothing, the slightest thing, a trifle, Ex. Rientrera pre'sto nel nulla He will soon re-enter into the dond' e sortito. insignificance from whence he arose. Per un niente si arrabbia. A trifle makes him enraged. 672. "Niente" and "nulla" are also used as indefinite pro- nouns, in the sense of nothing ; when they follow a verb, that verb must be preceded by the negation " non." Ex. Pareva che nulla si potesse far It seemed as if they could do senza di lui. nothing without him. Questi ragazzi n9n sanno These boys do not know any- niente. thing. 673. " Niente " and " nulla " often have the meaning of " qualche cosa," something, anything. Ex. N9n vu9l nulla 9ggi ? Do you want anything to-day ? ON THE WORDS " QUANTO," " QUANTUNQUE." 674. " Quanto " is also (494) an adverb, and means how much ; it is always used with a verb in the subjunctive mood. Ex. S' ella sapesse quanto 19 la If you knew how much I esteem stimi ! you ! 675. " Quantunque "* is an indefinite pronoun and means all that which. Ex. " Chi vuol veder quantunque pub natura." (Petrarca). Whoever wishes to see all what nature can do. Quantunque " is also a conjunction, meaning although. See rule 740. ON "PER QUANTO" AND "PER QUANTI." 153 ON THE WORDS " PER QUANTO," AND " PER QUANTI." 676. "Per quanto" is an adverb, and means however, however much; it is used with a verb in the subjunctive mood. Ex. Per quanto abili siano, non However able they may be, they riesciranno nell' impresa. will not succeed in the under- taking. 677. Instead of " per quanto," " per," followed by the conjunc- tion " che " may be used. Ex. Per vantaggiose che fossero le However advantageous his pro- sue offerte, non volli accet- posals might have been, I tarle. would not accept them. 678. " Per quanti " and " per quante " are adjectives and mean whatever ; they are employed with a verb in the subjunctive mood. Ex. Per quante ragioni adduces- Whatever reasons we adduced, simo, n9n ci fu dato di con- we were not able to convince vincerlo. him. EXERCISE LVII. They were both (665) students at the University of Oxford. Every one (659) of the pupils of the Royal College of Music and of the Royal Academy of Music received (Past Def.) a ticket of admission to the International Concert. Charity rejoices at the good fortune of others (662). Neither my grandfather nor my aunt (275, 667) have arrived. Neither of them (667) is the owner of the house (623) we have seen. Rich as they are* they will not be admitted to that society. Let them be ever so clever (how- ever clever they may be) (676), they will never succeed (258) in such an undertaking. Some people (649) are never satisfied, how- ever (676) prosperous they may be. I shall buy either (666) this boxf or that trunk. How much capital]: have you entrusted to him ? I have entrusted to him about five hundred (537) pounds. 679. * The expressions rich as they are, determined as they were, &c., maybe rendered in Italian by " ricchi quali sono," " risoluti quali erano," &c. 680. t Box, if of a good size, is translated into Italian by " cassa ; " if a small one, by " cassetta ;" and if a very small one, by " scatola." Snuff-box is translated by " scatola da tabacco." A box, at the theatre, is translated by " un palco," or " un palchetto." The box of a carriage, is translated by " il sedile d'una carrozza." A cartridge-box, is translated by " una giberna." Box-wood, is translated by "bosso." A box on the ear, is translated by " uno schiaffo." To box, is translated by " fare a pugni." 68 1. J The capital, meaning the funds, money, is translated by " il capitale." The capital, meaning the chief town, is translated by " la capitale." The capital of a column, is translated by " il capitello di una colonna. 154 ON THE INFINITIVE MOOD. LESSON XXX. ON THE INFINITIVE MOOD. ON THE USE OF THE PRESENT. 682. The Present of the Infinitive is used in Italian, as in English, to express an action in an indefinite manner, without any reference to time or person. Ex. Cantare, or il cantar tioppo a di- To sing too much before break- giuno guasta la voce. fast spoils the voice. 683. The Present of the Infinitive is used in Italian as a noun, both as subject, and object in the sentence, and is generally trans- lated into English by a present participle, or by a noun. Ex. Lo scrivermi ella cosi spesso, mi Your writing to me so often, fa molto piacere. gives me much pleasure. N9n mi piace quel suo parlare I do not like his (or her) enig- enigmatico.* matic way of speaking. " N9n era 1'andar suo cosa mortale." (Petrarca). Her gait was not like that of a mortal being. 684. As already stated in rule 126, the Present of the Infinitive is used in Italian, instead of the second person singular of the Im- perative used negatively. Ex. Non andar giu, Carlino. Don't go down, Charlie. ON THE USE OF THE PAST. 685. The Past of the Infinitive is used in Italian as a noun, both as subject, and object in the sentence, and is generally translated into English by the Past Gerund. Ex. L'avermi ella parlato, e causa di Your having spoken to me, is tutta questa gelosia. the cause of all this jealousy. ON THE USE OF THE GERUND. 686. The English Present Participle, preceded by the preposi- tions by, through, with, on, is translated into Italian by the Gerund, without any preposition before it. Ex. Scrivendogli ogni giorno, lo f9r- By writing to him every day, zai a rispondermi. I compelled him to reply. 687. Instead of the gerund, the present of the infinitive, pre- ceded by the preposition " con," with, and the definite article, may be used. Ex. Con lo scrivergli 9gni giorno lo By writing to him every day, forzai a rispondermi. I compelled him to reply. * See rule 63, to understand the meaning of the letters in the darker type. ON THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 155 688. The English Present Participle, preceded by the pre- position in, should be translated into Italian, by the Present of the Infinitive, preceded by " nel " or " nello." Ex. Nello scri verle, potete palesarle In writing to her, you can inform il V9stro prcgetto. her of your plan. 689. As already stated in rule 200, the Compound of the Gerund is used in Italian as in English ; except that in Italian the auxiliary "avendo," or "essendo," is omitted, and the past participle alone is expressed, and is variable, according to the object in the sentence (when "avendo" is omitted), or the subject - (when "essendo" is omitted). Ex. Datoci (avendoci dato) il di- Having given us the despatch, spaccio, parti a gambe. he ran off. Sedutasi (essendosi seduta) per Having seated herself on the terra, si mise a cucire. ground, she began to sew. EXERCISE LVIII. He kept us waiting (683) in the rain till two o'clock (548) in the afternoon. Your having told (685) him frankly that we would wait no longer offended him. Having conducted me (689) into the room destined for (to) me, he wished me a (the) good-night, and went away. Princes (328) who (620) in governing (688) their subjects, are not guided by (270) principles of justice, excite dis- affection. Having seated herself (689) on a comfortable arm-chair, she began to narrate the scene (623) she had witnessed. I admire those (594) artists, I saw them painting* some very fine pictures. I should like to have one of those pictures; I saw them being painted.* I often heard him speaking (690) against you, but I never thought! (636) he would dare to cause you any loss. Young as he is (679) he knows how to make himself feared. I like Miss Williams' voice, I heard her singing (690) last night. The song (623) you have composed is very pretty ; I have heard it sung (690) several times. Having dressed (689) themselves in their best clothes, they went out for a walk. I came earlier (510) this morning, because I thought (691) I should have found || you at home. I do not like to see horses running (683) so fast. 690. * Both the English expressions / saw them painting, and / saw them painted (being painted), are translated into Italian by " Gli ho veduti dipingere." 691. f 70 think, meaning to believe, is translated into Italian by "Credere." The meanings of " Pensare a," and " Pensare di," are given in rule 248. 692. The expressions to make himself, or herself loved, respected, feared by are translated into Italian by " farsi amare, rispettare, temere da." 693. [| Notice that in Italian the latter of two verbs is generally put in the Present of the Infinitive, when both verbs have the same subject. Ex. Vorrei poter partire subito pel con- I wish I could start at once for the tinente. continent. 156 ON THE INDICATIVE MOOD. LESSON XXXI. ON THE INDICATIVE MOOD. ON THE USE OF THE PRESENT. 694. The Present of the Indicative is used in Italian, as in English, to express an action which always happens, or which is happening at the present time. Ex. Non lavoriamo per lui. We do not work for him. Disegno* un ricamo per mia I am making^ a design which sorella. my sister will embroider. Carolina coglief frag9le per la Caroline is gathering straw- C9lazione. berries for breakfast. ON THE USE OF THE IMPERFECT. 695. In Italian the Imperfect of the Indicative is used when the verb expresses an action which was still in progress when another action was done. Ex. Leggevo* quando Giorgio en- When George entered my room, tro nella mia camera. I was reading. J Le mie cugine C9glievanof fiori My cousins were gathering, nel giardino. flowers in the garden. 696. A verb is also used in the Imperfect of the Indicative when it describes the state or condition of persons and things at a past time, specified or alluded to. Ex. Quando entrammo, lo specchio When we entered, the looking - era gia rotto. glass was already broken. A quell' epoca gli Spagnu9li e- At that time the Spaniards rano un gran pop9lo. were a great people. 697. In Italian, the Imperfect Indicative is also used when the verb expresses an action often repeated at a past time. Ex. Quand'ero a Milano, andavo al W T hen I was at Milan, I used to teatro tutte le sere. go to the theatre every night. 698. * Expressions like these may also be rendered in Italian by the verb " Stare," when the principal verb in the sentence, whilst describing a progressive action, denotes repose, rest. Ex. Sto disegnando un ricamo per mia I am making a design which my sister sorella. will embroider. Stavo leggendo, quando Carlo entr6 nella I was reading, when Charles entered my mia camera. room. 699. + Expressions like these may also be rendered in Italian by the verb " An- dare " when the principal verb in the sentence expresses motion and progression. Ex. La Carolina va cogliendo fragple per la Caroline is gathering strawberries for colazione. breakfast. Le mie cugine andavano cogliendo fiori My cousins were gathering flowers in nel giardino. the garden. 700. I As already stated, the English expressions I am making, I was reading, they were gathering, &c. , are translated into Italian as if they were I make, I read, they gathered, &c. ON THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 1 57 701. In Italian, the Imperfect -Indicative is also used when the verb denotes the qualities (physical or moral), habits, and customs of persons and nations no longer existing. Ex. Cesare B9rgiaavevail(574)viso Caesar Borgia had a pale face, pallido, colle guance imfos- sunken cheeks, and a mous- sate, con baffi e barba ros- tache and beard of a reddish setta. (D'Azeglio.) colour. Francesco primo amava la Francis the First loved glory gl9ria e il p9tere. and power. I Greci coronavano i loro The Greeks used to crown their tamosi poeti di all9ro e di famous poets with laurel and edera. ivy. 702. In Italian, the Imperfect Indicative is also used when the verb denotes the qualities (physical or moral), habits, and customs possessed or practised at a past time by persons and nations still existing. Ex. Quand'era giovine amava lo When he was young he loved studio delle scienze. the study of sciences. Altrevolte i Greci coltivavano Formerly the Greeks cultivated le arti e le scienze con gran- the arts and sciences with dissimo amore. very great ardour. 703. Notice that if the time during which the qualities were possessed, the habits and customs were practised, is specified, the verb is put in the Past Definite. Ex. Francesco primo amb la gl9ria Francis the First loved glory durante tutta la sua vita. during the whole of his life. Gl'italiani fecero gran progress! The Italians made great pro- durante il decimo-terzo se- gress during the fourteenth colo (or il trecento). century. ON THE USE OF THE PAST DEFINITE. 704. The Past Definite is used whenever the verb expresses an action which was begun and entirely completed at a time entirely past, and specified. Ex. Napoleone entro in Moscail 24 Napoleon entered Moscow on agosto, 1812. the 24th of August, 1812. 705. The Past Definite is also used when the verb expresses an action which was done to a person or thing at a past specified time.* Ex. Furono sconfitti una seconda They were defeated a second V9lta, ai venti luglio, dello time, on the 2oth July, of stesso anno. the same year. 706. * Italian poets often use the Past Definite, instead of the Past Indefinite. Ex. Ah ! caro Tito, io fui teco ingiusta. Ah ! dear Titus, I have been unjust (METASTASIO.) towards you. 158 ON THE INDICATIVE MOOD. ON THE USE OF THE PAST INDEFINITE. 707. The Past Indefinite is used when the verb expresses an action which happened at a time past, but not specified. Ex. Carlo ha tr9vato questo libro Charles found this book on my sulla tavola di mio zio. uncle's table. Abbiamo viaggiato molto. We have travelled a great deal. Ho/scritto i miei temi. I have written my exercises. 708. The Past Indefinite is used when the verb expresses an action which happened at a period of time not entirely past, as " questa mattina," this morning, " oggi," to-day, " questa settimana," this week, &c. Ex. L' 119 incontrato stamattina. I met him this morning. ON THE USE OF THE PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE. 709. The Pluperfect is used to express an action which had happened, at a time not specified, before another action occurred. Ex. Avevano gia distrutto le mura They had already destroyed the quando arrivai. walls before I arrived. ON THE USE OF THE PAST ANTERIOR. 710. The Past Anterior is used to express an action which has been done immediately before another action occurred. Ex. Tosto che avemmo scritto* i As soon as we had written our nostri temi, uscimmo. exercises, we went out. 711. Notice, however, that if the two actions were habitual, the Pluperfect should be used. Ex. T9sto che avevamo preso il te, As soon as we had taken tea, andavamo a fare un giro. we used to go for a walk. EXERCISE LIX. When I was (696) in Paris I often met (697) your American friend. Thomas a Becket was kneeling! (696) before the altar when the knights struck (704) him. At two clock we were (696) far from the batteries, and had escaped (709) a great danger. The general assured us that the enemy were (696) not sufficiently numerous to (225) attack us. What (611) did you do (697) in the evening when you were in the country ? (614). My brother and I read, and my sisters either sewed, or played upon (583) the piano. Frederick the Great always wore (701) a dark blue uniform. When he entered (183, 704) the room, all the servants were asleep (696). Spain had (696) formerly immense possessions in America. 712. * Notice that the Past Anterior is only used after the expressions "tosto che," " appena." " quando," "quanto prima." 713- T Was kneeling must be translated by "era inginocchiato. " " S'inginoe chiava" -rould mean was in the action of kneeling. ON THE INDICATIVE AND CONDITIONAL MOODS. 159 FURTHER REMARKS ON MOODS AND TENSES. ON THE USE OF THE PRESENT INDICATIVE. 714. When the verb expresses an action or a state which has lasted for some time past, and is still lasting, it must be put in the Present Indicative in one of the two following ways : St9 in questa casa da cinque anni. Or J I have been living in Sono cinque anni che st9 in questa > this house these casa. I five years. ON THE USE OF THE IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. 715. When the verb expresses an action or a state which had lasted for some time, and was still lasting when a past action occurred, it must be put in the Imperfect Indicative in one of the two following ways : Quando Gi9rgio venne, io lavoravogia"j I had already been da due ore. Or Erano* due ore che > working for two hours lavoravo, quando Giorgio venne. } when George came. Quando Giacomo disse la nu9- When James told the news, I va, i9 n9n ne sapevo nulla. knew nothing about it. ON THE USE OF THE FUTURE. 716. A verb preceded by the adverbs as soon as, when, &c., indicates a future time, and therefore the future, and not the present tense, must be used in Italian. Ex. Scriverb quando avrb tempo. I will write when I have time. 717. Sometimes in Italian a verb is used in the Future when it expresses a present action accompanied by an idea of doubt. Ex. Credera che sia per indifferenza Perhaps you think it is through sui dolori altrui. (Pellico.) indifference concerning other people's misfortune. ON THE USE OF THE CONDITIONAL. 718. In Italian the Conditional is sometimes used instead of the English Present of the Indicative. Ex. Saprebbe dirmi dove stia di Can you tell me where the casa il console inglese ? English consul lives ? No, n9n saprei dirglielo. No, I can't tell you. Vorrei ch'ella venisse meco. I wish you would go with me. 719. The Past Conditional is often used in Italian instead of the English Present Conditional. Ex. Promise che m' avrebbe dato He promised that he would da vivere. give me wherewith to live. * An e, dotted thus e, has the broad sound of the a in the word gate. 160 ON THE INDICATIVE AND CONDITIONAL MOODS 720. The Conditional, instead of the Present Indicative, and the Conditional Past, instead of the Imperfect Indicative, are often used in Italian to express a fact the reality of which depends upon a statement contained in a previous sentence. Ex. I giornali dicono che una bat- The newspapers say that a bat- taglia ha avuto Iu9go fra le tie has been fought between truppe reali ed i ribelli. Ag- the royal troops and the rebels, giungono che mille di questi They add that a thousand sarebbero stati uccisi, e due of the latter were killed, and mila sarebbero prigionieri. two thousand are prisoners. EXERCISE LX. Her father was (701) a handsome man, but very proud. Man formerly lived (701) in forests ; the meadows were (696) his walks ; he had for his food the fruits of the earth, and the chirping (683) of birds delighted (701) his (575) ears. When Croesus showed (704) to Solon his vast treasures, the latter (605) said : " Sire, if anyone (649) come with better iron than yours, he will be master (146) of this gold." According to the statement of the governor, they escaped (720). My servant behaved (703) very well for the first five years, but afterwards he became (704) very rude, and dishonest. I speak of the Normans, because they were (696) then at the height of their glory. Napoleon commanded (704) the artillery at the siege of Toulon, and gained (704) brilliant victories in Italy, as general-in-chief of the French republic. We met (704) last year at Paris. I had never seen (709) him before. Louis XIV. lived (703) seventy-eight years, and reigned seventy-two. I wrote (708) to him this morning, immediately after breakfast. Dante was born (704) in 1265, and died in exile in 1321 (544). When Tasso was (550, 696) twelve years old he composed (701) very good Greek verses. If (112) I were you, I would not lend him any money. He was (701) very odd ; he used to tell the same story so many times, until it was (696) positively painful to hear him. As soon as they reached (710) the top of the mountain, they were killed (705). Ferdinand and Isabella reigned (696) in Spain when Columbus discovered (704) America. In crossing (688) the moor, I saw a flight* of ravens, flying (292) towards the mountains. 721. * A flight of birds is translated by " uno stormo d'uccelli." A flock of sheep " un gregge di p$core." A herd of cattle " una mandra di bestiame. " A herd of stags " un branco di cervi. " A pack of hounds " una muta di cani." A swarm of bees "uno sciame di api. " A S an S f thieves "una banda di ladri." ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. l6l LESSON XXXII. ON THE USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 722. The Main Rule is this: A VERB SHOULD BE USED IN THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD WHENEVER THE ACTION IT EXPRESSES is NOT POSITIVE ; therefore a verb is used in the Subjunctive Mood in the following cases : 723. A verb is used in the Subjunctive Mood, when it is governed by another verb expressing doubt, fear, wish, command, exhortation, &c. Ex. Dubito ch'ella p9ssa riuscire. I doubt whether you will suc- ceed. Temiamo che non* pipva. We are afraid it will rain. Amo credere ch'ella stia bene. I hope that you are well. V9glio che facciate cio. I want you to do this. Ella desidera ch' egli venga. She desires that he should come. Mi sorprende che cio 1' adiri. I am surprised that this should make you angry. 724. A verb is also used in the Subjunctive Mood when it is governed by a verb used interrogatively, negatively,! or interro- gatively with a negation. J Ex. Cred' ella ch' egli sia uscito ? Do you think that he has gone out? Si spera che egli sia eletto ? Do they hope that he will be elected ? Non credo che sia ammalato. I do not think he is ill. crede che sia arrivato ? Do you not think he has arrived? * Th& negation in cases like this is explained on pages 174 and 175. 725. Notice that " Dimenticare," to forgtt, " Dissimulare," to dissimulate, and " Ignorare," to ignore, used negatively, govern a verb in the Indicative, because the two negatives (one inherent, and the other added to the verb) amount to an affirma- tive. Ex. Non dimentico che mi ha parlato. I do not forget that he has spoken to me. Non ignoro ch'ella ha talento. I am aware that you have talent. 726. t Notice that a verb may be used negatively, without being accompanied by any negative particle. Ex. impossible che siamo attaccati in It is impossible that we should be questa posizione. attacked in this position. 727. J Notice that a verb may have an interrogative form or be used interroga- tively with a negation, without expressing a real interrogation, and, in that case, it is followed by a verb in the Indicative. Ex. Dimentica che siamo qui per vegliare Do you forget that we are here to watch agl'interressi della nostra patria ? over the interests of our country ? Non crede che e arrivato ? You do not believe (the fact) that he has arrived ? II 162 ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 728. Notice that in many cases instead of the Subjunctive, the Present Infinitive may be elegantly employed, so long as the sense of the sentence remains clear. Ex. Mi permise di andare a vedere He consented that I should go 1' Abbazia di Westminster.* to see Westminster Abbey. 729. A verb is in the Subjunctive Mood when it is governed by the Impersonal verbs " Sembrare," "Parere," " Essere probabile," " Bisognare," " Essere mestieri,"f &c. Ex. Sembra ch'egli abbia ragione. It seems that he is in the right. Bisogna che me ne vada subito. I must go away at once. 730. A verb is used in the Subjunctive Mood when it is pre- ceded by one of the following conjunctions, which imply condition, or uncertainty : Perche, cfi t" n Q i" Dato che, Affinche, Accioche, MJ Lilc-llj in order that. Posto che, Supposto che, -supposing that. Purche, provided that, Posto il caso che,j A patto che, -on condition Quand' anche, even if. A condizione che, that. Solo che, if but. Anzi che, \ Se mai, if ever. Innanziche, L before that. Avanti che, Nel caso che, Come se, in case that. as if. Prima che, A meno che,} unless. Senza che, without. Per tema che, ) for fear that, Checche, whatever. Per paura che, ) lest. EXAMPLES. Gli parli prima che egli parta. Speak before he departs. Purche agisca a nwdo mio. Provided he acts as I like. 731. "Che," when used instead of " perche," "affinche," and " accioche," is followed by a verb in the Subjunctive Mood. Ex. Venga che (affinche) parliamo Come so that we may talk della nostre faccende. about our business. * Instead of " Permise ch'io andassi a vedere 1' Abbazia di Westminster." 732. t But such Impersonal verbs as " !Essere certo," " Essere evidente," &c., are followed by a verb in the Indicative Mood, because the latter expresses an action in a positive manner. Ex. E certo ch'egli e stato eletto. It is certain that he has been elected. 733- J Notice that the conjunctions " a meno che," " per tema che," " per paura che," and " che," used instead of " senzache," are followed by the Subjunctive, pre- ceded by "non." Ex. A meno che Lei non gli parli, egli non lavorera mai. Si tenea chiuso in castello, per paura che non 1'attaccassero. Non fa mai viaggio, che npn sia ammalato. Unless you speak to him he will never work. He kept himself shut up in the castle, for fear of being attacked. He never travels without getting ill. ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 163 734. As stated in rules 674, 676, 677, the Subjunctive Mood is also used after the adverbs " quanto," how much, and " per quanto," or " per," however much. Ex. L'ppera umana, per bu9na che Human work, be it ever so good, sia, trova sempre critici. always finds critics. 735. The conjunctions " in maniera che," " in modo che," " tal- mente che," in such a manner that, " finche," " sinche," " sino a che," " fintantoche," until (in keeping with THE MAIN RULE), are followed by a verb in the Indicative, when the action it expresses is positive, and that is when the tense used is past or present. Ex. Parlo in maniera che fu udito He spoke in such a manner that da tutta 1'adunanza. he was heard by the whole meeting. 736. But the above conjunctions are followed by the verb in the Subjunctive Mood, when the verb does not express a positive action, and that is when it has reference to a future time. Ex. La prego di parlare in modo I beg of you to speak in such a tale che sia intesa e capita manner that you may be heard da tutta 1 : assemblea* (1'adu- and understood by the whole nanza). assembly. 737. Notice that in many sentences a verb may be in the Indicative or in the Subjunctive Mood, according as the action it expresses is certain or doubtful. Ex. Andro in un sito dove saro I shall go to a pl-ace where I quieto. shall be quiet (/ know I shall). Andro in un sito ove io sia I will go to a place where I shall quieto. be quiet (/ hope I shall). Cerco un uomo che sa la lin- I am looking for a man who gua Chinese. knows the Chinese language (/ know he does). Cerco un uomo che sappia la I am looking for a man who lingua Chinese. knows the Chinese language (/ hope to find one who knows it}. 738. Notice that in many sentences it is necessary to supply the words left out in them, to appreciate correctly the use of the Subjunctive. Ex. Voglia il cielo ch' ella sia felice ! Heaven grant that you may be happy. Which means : " Bramo che il cielo v9glia ch'ella sia felice ! " 739. Notice that in all the cases hitherto mentioned, the verbs are logically used in the Subjunctive Mood because they do not express a positive fact ; but the Italians indiscriminately employ the Subjunctive Mood, also, in the following cases : * Notice that the e in ea, etc., has always the broad sound of a in the word gate. 164 ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 740. The Italians put a verb in the Subjunctive Mood, also, when it is preceded by the conjunctions " benche,"* " ancorche," " sebbene," " contuttoche," " quantunque," " avvegnache," and " n9n9stanteche," althotigh. Ex. Voglio andare a ballare, quan- I want to go to dance, although tunque non mi senta bene. I do not feel well. "Italia mia, benche 'Iparlar sia indarno." (PETRARCA). My Italy, although speaking may be in vain. 741. The verb is put in the Subjunctive Mood, also, when it is preceded by the indefinite pronoun " niente," nothing, or the adjec- tives "solo,"t only, "primo," first, " ultimo," last, " unico," only one, " pochi " "poche," few, or any adjective in the superlative-relative degree ; as " il piu grande," the greatest, " il migliore," the best, &c., followed by a relative pronoun. Ex. Non c' e niente che mi spiaccia There is nothing I dislike so come I'ip9crisia. much as hypocrisy. II cane e il solo animale la cui The dog is the only animal fedelta sia provata. whose fidelity has been proved. 742. But when " solo," " il piu grande," &c., are followed by an indirect object, the verb is used in the Indicative. Ex. Londra e la piu grande delle London is the largest of the citta che ho vedute. towns I have seen. EXERCISE LXI. Do you hope that he will be elected (724) a (354) member of Parliament ? I wish he may succeed (723) in his undertaking. It is possible that I may have been (729) imprudent, but I have not been criminal. I do not like you to go out (724) with that good-for- nothing fellow. I do not think you have acted (724, 636) prudently. I take so much care with (of) your education, in the hope that you will profit (723) by it (240). I do not forget that you have invested (,725) much capital (68 1) in that speculation. Tell the servant to awake (723, 728) me early to-morrow morning. Stop with me until I receive (730) assistance, I beg of you. 743. * Notice that, according to THE MAIN RULE, as stated at the beginning of this lesson, the verb which follows " benche," " ancorche," c., should be used in the Subjunctive Mood only when the action it expresses is not positive ; so in the first example given above Petrarca rightly uses " essere " in the Subjunctive Mood, because its action is not positive, but in the second example the Subjunctive is iilogically used, because the verb " sentire" expresses a most positive fact. There are, however, many examples of the Indicative Mood being used by the best Italian authors, after the above-mentioned conjunction. For instance, Tasso in the second canto (stanza xxv.) of the " Gerusalemme Liberata, 1 ' says : " Benche ne furto e il mio, ne ladra sono." Although my deed is not a theft, nor am I a thief. 744. t The above remark holds good with regard to "solo," " il piu grande, "&c. ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 165 RULES FOR THE CONCORD BETWEEN THE TENSES OF THE GOVERNING VERB AND THE GOVERNED VERB. 745. The use of the four tenses of the Subjunctive Mood de- pends upon the tense of the governing verb in the Indicative Mood. 746. When the governing verb is in the Present or in the Future (Indicative), the governed verb is put in the Present of the Subjunctive, to express a present or a future action, or state, and in the Imperfect, or in the Past Subjunctive, to express a past action, or state ; in the Imperfect, if the action or state is alluded to as having been incomplete at a past time ; in the Past, if it is alluded to as complete. Ex. N9n credo che Giuseppe lavori I do not think that Joseph is adesso. working now. Pagherb,purchei9 abbia denaro. I will pay, if I have money. Non credo che lavorasse quando I do not think that he was work- siamo venuti. ing when we came. Dubito che abbia ricevuto la I doubt whether he has received lettera di suo padre. his father's letter. 747. Notice that the Imperfect, instead of the Present Sub- junctive, and the Pluperfect, instead of the Past Subjunctive are used when some conditional expression follows the verb in the subjunctive. Ex. Dubito ch' ella studiasse, se ^n I doubt that you would study, if ci fosse costretta. you were not compelled to do so. 748. When the governing verb is in one of the past tenses (Indicative), or in the Conditional, the governed verb is put in the Imperfect Subjunctive to express a present action, or state, but in the Pluperfect Subjunctive to express a past action, or state. Ex. Non sapevo che Carlo dimorasse I did not know that Charles was qui. living here. Vorrei ch'ella venisse da me I wish you would call on me domani. to-morrow. 749. Notice that when the governing verb is in the Past In- definite, followed by ll per che," " affinche" " benche," " quantunque," <"., the governed verb is put in the Present Subjunctive, to express a present, or a future action, or state. Ex. Vi ho dato il denaro perche pos- I gave you the money so that you siate andare a vedere i V9stri. may go to see your friends. 750. Notice finally that when the governing verb is in the Past Indefinite, it is customary to use the Past, instead of the Pluperfect Subjunctive. Ex. Non ho mai conosciuto un upmo che I have never known a man who has abbia tanto lavorato. worked so hard. 1 66 ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD AND " SE." ON THE CONJUNCTION " SE," IF. 751. When " se " is a real Conditional Conjunction, it is followed in Italian either by a verb in the Indicative or in the Sub- junctive Mood, according to the following rules : 752. " Se" is followed by a verb in the Present Indicative, if the condition refers to a future time, not far off. Ex. Se mio zio viene ditegli di If my uncle comes tell him to aspettarmi. wait for me. Se fa bel tempo domani, andre- If it is fine to-morrow, we shall mo alia campagna. go into the country. 753. " Se " is followed by a verb in the Future, if the condition refers to a future time, far off. Ex. Se mi pagheranno alia fine dell' If they pay me at the end of the anno, vi daro una ghinea. year, I will give you a guinea. 754. " Se " is followed by a verb in the Imperfect Subjunctive, if the condition refers to the present time. Ex. Se avessi denaro comprerei If I had money I would buy this questo oriu9lo. watch. Se io fossi in Lei non gli If I were you I would not write scriverei questa sera. to him this evening 755- " Se "* is followed by a verb in the Pluperfect Subjunctive, if the condition refers to a time past. Ex. Se avessi conosciuto le sue in- Had I known his intentions, I tenzioni, n9n gli avrei parlato. should not have spoken to him . 756. But when " se" is not a real Conditional Conjunction, when it means, in fact, whether, as, or when, it requires after it the verb in the same mood and tense as the English conjunction if. Ex. Essi n9n sanno se ritorneremo They do not know if (whether) qui, o no. we shall return here, or not. Se aveva bisogno di me, era If (when) he needed my help, amabilissimo. he was very amiable. 757. A verb is used in the Subjunctive Mood after " quando," " ove," and " qualora," when these words are used instead of " se," meaning in case that. Ex. Quando (or ove) le piaccia, an- If you like we will go to the dremo al teatro questa sera. theatre this evening. 758. A verb is put in the Subjunctive Mood after " che " used instead of repeating " se." Ex. Se e ricca e che V9glia aver If you are rich and wish to have amici, sia bu9na e generosa. friends, be good and generous. 759. * In poetry, by a turn of the phrase, "se," if, is often omitted. Ex. " Almeno Tito trovar potessi." (METASTASIO). If, at least, I could find Titus. ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 1 67 EXERCISE LXII. Unless you invite (733) him yourself, he will not come. The elephant never attacks, unless he is provoked. I do not think he was working (724, 746) when I rang the bell. It was necessary (704) that two of our squadrons* should advance (729), and force the enemy's line. Learn your lessons for to-morrow, lest your master punish (733) you. If Mr. John comes (752) before dinner, tell him to wait for (251, 728) me, until I come back (736). I wish (718) you would (748) play this piece of music slowly and with expression. f He wishes (desiderare) that I should reflect (723) on that proposal. I wrote (707) to him by post, so that (730) he might learn the news in time. That man has given me a fearful blow with a stick. J If (754) I had some paper, I would write to him. Whatever he undertakes (730) to do, he does it diligently. Your father will pay all your debts, on condition that (730) you will exe- cute his orders faithfully. I do not know where little William is (724). There are few men whose character is (741) better known (365) than his. It is the most interesting book I ever read (741). However ingenious the Greeks and Romans were (734), still they did not discover the art of printing books. It seems as if (che) nothing could (729, 746) save him. I find it difficult to learn poetry by heart (imparare a mente). 760. * A squadron (of cavalry), is translated by " uno squadrone." A squadron (of ships), is translated by "una squad ra." 761. f " Adagio " is the technical expression for slow and with expression. Ad libitum=a/ the performer's pleasure. Decrescendo or Diminuendo= < ?W#a//)> AfFettuoso=zw'M tenderness. softer. Allegro=^zVy&, lively. Do\ce=soft ; dolcissimo=z'ry so ft> Allegretto=rj/ soft. C3i\a.n&o=gradually slower and softer. Presto=^#zV/ / prestissimo=7^rj' quick. Con brio=with spirit and brilliancy. Sostenuto=J^a/w the sound. Crescendo=?Wtta//j' louder. Volti s\lbilo=turn over quickly. Da capo repeat from the beginning. Vivace or Con vivacita=tf*V/z vivacity. 762. J The suffix " ata " signifies a blow from, &c. ; hence " una bastonata," means a blow from a stick, "una boccata," a mouthful, or a bite, " un'occhiata," a glance of the eye. 763. The pronoun it is not translated into Italian in sentences like this. 1 68 ON THE FORM AND USE OF PASSIVE VERBS. LESSON XXXIII. ON THE FORM AND USE OF PASSIVE VERBS. 764. There are three ways of expressing the Passive Form of verbs, in Italian. 765. The first way is to use the verb " Essere " as an auxiliary, followed by the Past Participle of any active transitive verb. Ex. Egli e stimato da tutti. He is esteemed by everybody. Ed i9 dico che gli Egiziani And I say that the Egyptians furono sconfitti dai Francesi were defeated by the French alia battaglia delle Piramidi. at the battle of the Pyramids. 766. A verb is rendered passive in the way indicated above only when one desires to lay a stress on the result of the action. 767. Many English sentences are best rendered into Italian by giving them an active turn, and this is done by changing the in- direct object in the sentence into the subject, and the subject into the direct object Ex. Ognuno desidera le ricchezze. Riches are desired by everybody. La sua cattiva condotta mi I was ruined by his bad con- ruinb. duct. Gli fecero regalo di un anello. They presented him with a ring. I Francesi sconfissero gli Egi- The Egyptians were defeated by ziani alia battaglia delle Pira- the French at the battle of midi. the Pyramids. 768. The second way is by using the verb " Venire,"* instead of " Essere " as an auxiliary. Ex. Venni chiamato agli esami. I was called to the examination. Vennero dichiarati innocenti. They were declared innocent. Sono sicuro che verra eletto de- I am sure he will be elected a putato. deputy. 769. * Notice that the verb "Venire" is used instead of " Essere" only in the simple tenses of passive verbs ; for instance, it would be wrong to say, " !Erano venuti dichiarati innocenti." They had been declared innocent. The right form is " Erano stati dichiarati innocenti." 770. The verb "andare" is also used in some cases instead of " $ssere " in the passive forms of verbs. Ex. La cosa va fatta cosl. The thing is done in this way. II vero m^rito va sempre congiunto True merit is always accompanied by alia modestia. modesty. ON THE FORM AND USE OF PASSIVE VERBS. 169 771. The third way of forming a Passive Verb the way most congenial to the Italian language is to employ the word " si,"* followed by a verb in the third person singular, or plural, according as the noun in the sentence is in the singular, or plural. Ex. Si dice che la Regina partira It is said that the Queen will d9mani. depart to-morrow. II bu9n vino si vende a caro Good wine is sold very dear in prezzo in Inghilterra. England. I libri si stampano a bu9n Books are printed cheaply in mercato in Germania. Germany. Vi si parlano tutte le lingue All the European languages are europee. spoken there. Se ne parla dapertutto. It is talked of everywhere. 772. The expressions, I am asked, He is promised, They are ordered, &c., are translated by " Mi sif dice," or '' Mi si domanda," " Gli si promette," " Si C9mando loro," &c. Ex. Mi si disse di parlare. I was told to speak. Si permise loro di uscire. They were allowed to go out. 773. Sometimes, and more especially when the verb is in the reflective form, "Tiupmo," " uno," " alcuni," or "la gente," is used, instead of " si," before the verb. Ex. Uno si avvezza facilmente alia We easily accustom ourselves pigrizia. to idleness. 774. Whenever "si "would cause any ambiguity in the sense of the phrase, the passive verb must be formed with "essere," or " venire," as explained above. Ex. Gli uomini virtuosi sono ammirati (not ] si ammirano, which might mean they > Wise men are admired. admire themselves). j 775. * Notice that the word "si," which translates the English words one, they, we, people, has all the appearance of always being an indefinite pronoun, the same as the French word " on," but it is not so ; the proof of this assertion is that the verb used with " si " must agree in number with the noun in the sentence. Nor is " si," as it has often been wrongly stated, a mere reflective pronoun ; for it would be a very weak way of expressing, to say, for instance, It says itself that the Queen will start to-morrow. " Si dice che la Regina, &c.," " I libri si stampano, &c.," are really passive sentences, in which the word "uomo" (which does the action expressed by the verb) is understood ; thus " Si dice (dall' uomo) che la Regina partira domani." " I libri si stampano (dall' uomo) a buon mercato in Germania." This shows that verbs in the passive form are used nearly as often in Italian as in English. 776. tin this case, when " si " is used with an indirect complement (see rule 196), it is an indefinite pronoun, like the French word " on." I/O ON THE FORM AND USE OF PASSIVE VERBS. EXERCISE LXIII. He is greatly loved (765) by (270) his parents. He has been long considered (714, 765) the best poet of the age. They were ordered (772) to keep themselves ready, in case of a sudden attack. The Austrians were defeated (767) by the Prussians at the battle of Sadowa. We went (699, 704) wandering all night through the forest. It is generally believed (771) that Rome was founded (723, 765) by Romulus, though there are no proofs in support of the tradition. Is it true that your cousin John has married (727) a Spanish lady ? I think so (271) ; they speak of it (771) everywhere in town. I have heard* the report of a gun. I am requested (772) to tell you not to go away without leave. They were allowed (772) to enter the church after Divine Service. These pictures have been admired (765), but I am sure (636) they will not be sold (771). It is reportedf that he will be made (769) Minister for Foreign Affairs. I have heard it said| that lions can be trained (771) to perform like dogs. I have not heard from my brother- in-law since the I5th (546) of January. At country fairs|| one sees very curious people. IT It is said (771) that popular songs revea'l (723) the character of a people. They were advised (767) by the judge to confess their crime. The barbarous sport of the bull fight was introduced (765) into Spain by the Arabs, amongst whom it was celebrated (771) with great pomp. They were promised (772) two pounds each (659). 777. * To hear is translated into Italian either by " Udire," or by " Sentire." Ex. Ho udito (or sentito) la voce di mio fratello. I have heard my brother's voice. 778. " Sentire " means also to feel. Ex. " Non mi sento bene." I do not feel well. 779. t It is said that, it is reported that, people will have it that, are elegantly translated into " corre la voce che," "corre fama che," "si vuole che." 780. J I have heard it said that, is translated into " ho sentito dire che." 781. To hear from, in the sense of to receive news from, is translated into " ricevere l^ttere da," " ricevere notizie da." 782. || A fair, meaning a market, is translated into Italian by "una fiera." A fair lady, is translated by " una bella signora." A fair complexion, is translated by " una carnagione bianca." A fair price, is translated by " un prezzo giusto." 783. \ The people, meaning the inhabitants of a country, is translated by " il pQpolo." (21). People, meaning persons, is translated by "la gente." Ex. " E che gent'e che par nel duol si vinta?" (Dante). What folk is this which seems by pain so vanquished? ON " VOLERE," " DOVERE," " POTERE," AND " SAPERE." I/I LESSON XXXIV. ON "VOLERE," "DOVERE," "POTERE," AND " SAPERE." 784. When do, did, will, shall, would, should, may, might, can, could, and let, are employed as auxiliary verbs, they are not translated into Italian ; but when they are used as distinct verbs of them- selves, each of them has its corresponding Italian verb. 785. When do and did are not mere auxiliaries, they are trans- lated by " Fare." Ex. H9* fatto il mio lavoro. I have done my work. 786. When will, would, and shall are not mere auxiliaries, they are translated by " V9lere" or " Dovere," according as will or duty is to be expressed. Ex. Voglio parlargli io stesso. I will speak to him myself, sempre parlare. He would always speak, lavorare. He shall (he will have to) work. 787. The expressions will you have ? will he have ? &c., meaning do you wish? do you like? or do you choose to have? &c., are translated by the corresponding tenses of the verb " V9lere." Ex. Vu9le un biglietto per il con- Would you like to have a ticket certo di mia S9rella ? for my sister's concert ? Quale vu9le dei due ? Which do you choose of the two ? 788. The expressions will you have the kindness ? will you have the goodness ? will you do me the favour to ? are translated into Italian by " Vu9l'avere la bonta di," or " Vu9l farmi il piacere di." Ex. VuoF avere la bonta di tradurmi Will you have the kindness to questa lettera in italiano ? translate this letter into Italian for me ? 789. The expressions I will have him, you would haw me, I want him, are translated into Italian by "V9lere," followed by "che," and the verb in the Subjunctive Mood. Ex. V9glio che stia a casa finche I will have him stay at home sia guarito. until he is quite well. V9rrebbe che lavorassimo dalla He would have us work from mattina alia sera. morning till night. * An o, dotted thus 9, has the broad sound of the o in the word orphan. 1/2 ON "VOLERE," " DOVERE," " POTERE," AND " SAPERE." 790. The verb to have to (to be obliged to, to think it right to), is translated into Italian by " Dpvere." Ex. Debbo essere al mio posto a I am to be at my post at noon. mezz9giorno. 791. The verbs / ought, you ought, I ought to have, &c., I should, you should, I should have, &c., are also translated by the Conditional, or the Conditional Past, of " D9vere." Ex. D9vrei andare da mio C9gnato. I ought to call on my brother- in-law. Dovrebbe scriverea suo padre. You ought to write to your father. Avrebbero dovuto pagarmi pri- They ought to have paid me ma di lasciar Londra. before they left London. 792. The verb I must, you must, &c. (/ am expected to, I am to, &c.), is also translated by " D9vere." Ex. Debbo parlare al presidente del I must speak to the chairman of C9mitato. the committee. 793. The verb " D9vere " is sometimes used to express probability that the action expressed by the chief verb in the sentence will happen (is expected). Ex. II mio viaggio deve durare My journey is to last five days. cinque giorni. Si sapeva che doveva un giorno It was known that he was likely g9vernare la Francia. one day to govern France. 794. When the verbs can and could, may and might, are not mere auxiliaries, they are translated by " P9tere." Ex. P9SSO rendervi questo servizio. I can render you this service. ?9trei andare a Parigi. I could go to Paris. P9tete venir meco. You may come with me. Avreste p9tuto venir prima You might have come before d'ora. now. 795. When can and could are used in the sense of to know how, they are translated into Italian by " Sapere." Ex. Sa ella parlar francese ? Can you speak French ? Sapeva disegnare, ma non sa- He could draw, but he could peva dipingere. not paint. Sapreste insegnarmi la via che Could you tell me the way to conduce al ponte di Londra ? London Bridge ? 796. When to let is a verb by itself it is translated by " Lasciare." Ex. Lasciatemi andar fuori. Let me go out. Two zz, dotted thus zz, have the soft sound of the zz in the word muzzle (52, 53). ON " VOLERE," "DOVERE," ETC., AND THE NEGATION. 173 EXERCISE LXIV. I would like (718, 786) to speak to you on (298) a matter of importance. They are to be (790) here this afternoon at three o'clock. I ought to (791) write to my mother. My essay must be (792) ready for the next issue of the magazine. Will you have (787) a steel pen, or a quill ? I prefer a quill, if you have one (144). Will you be so good as (788) to tell me where you buy your gloves ? With the greatest (520) pleasure; I buy them at Johnstone's (434). Our cousin Charles is expected (793) to visit us to-morrow, or the day after to-morrow. The Queen is expected (793) to leave Lon- don this week. We should (791) encourage the beautiful, (336) because the useful is sure to be sought after. They say (771) that the procession is (792) to pass through Piccadilly. It ought to have passed (791) through Oxford Street. Am I to do (792) all this work for nothing ? No, you will be paid. She is to write (792) to him three times a (the) week. Will you go (305) with me, or not ? I want you (789) to make up your mind.* I am sorry, but I cannot ; I have to be at my father's office before five o'clock (548). You should have told me (786) that last night ; I could have asked Charles to come. Do not let (796) him bring those (594) flowers in your bedroom (431). LESSON XXXV. ON THE NEGATION. 797. The Italian negatives are " No," " Non," " Ne." 798. " No " has the same meaning in Italian as in English. 799. " N9n " means not, and always precedes the verb. Ex. Egli non parla bene. He does not speak well. 800. "Ne...ne" mean ^either. ..nor, and are used when there is no verb before neither... nor. Ex. Ne leggo, ne scrivo. I neither read nor write. 801. But when there is a verb before neither... nor, they are translated by " N9n...ne...ne." (See rule 667). Ex. Non ha ne danaro ne amici. He has neither money nor friends. 802. "N9n...che," " n9n...altro che," mean nothing but, only. Ex. Pa9lo n9n fa che parlare. Paul does nothing but talk. Non avevo che un cavallo. I had but one horse. 803. * The expression to make up one's mind is translated into Italian by " prendere il suo partito." Ex. Ha preso il suo partito. He has made up his mind. 1/4 ON THE NEGATION. 804. "No, mai " and " 11911. ..mai" (in answer to a question), mean never. Ex. L'ha mai veduto ? No, mai. Have you ever seen him? Never. N9n I'h9 mai veduto. I have never seen him. 805. The words " mica," " punto," " neppure," and " gia," add strength to the negation " n9n." Ex. Non h9 mica danaro. I have no money at all. N9n credo punto quel che I do not believe a word that he dice. says. IK> neppure un soldo. I have not even a half-penny, crediate gia ch'i9 V9glia You must not think that I care sapere i V9stri affari. to know your affairs. 806. The negation " n9n " is always required after the verbs " impedire," to prevent, " evitare," to avoid, "badare" (followed by a verb in the Subjunctive Mood), mind lest, " guardarsi di," to beware of. Ex. La neve impedi che n9n venisse. The snow prevented his coming. Badi* che il cane n9n le scappi. Mind the dog does not escape you. Gli dica che si guardi di n9n Tell him to beware of believing credere la n9tizia. the news. 807. The negation " n9n " is always required after the compound conjunctions " a meno che," unless, " per paura che," " per tema che," for fear that, lest, and " che," used instead of " senza che." Ex. Verra per certo, a meno che n9n He will certainly come unless sia partito. he has departed. Me ne vado per paura che n9n I go away for fear that he m'insulti. should insult me. 808. The verbs "temere" and " aver paura," to fear, to appre- hend, require after them the negation " n9n " when they are used affirmatively, and the realisation of the action expressed by the verbs they govern is feared. Ex. Temof che Carlo n9n venga. I fear that Charles will come. " E temo che non sia gia si smarrito." (Dante). And I fear that he is already so far bewildered. 809. * Observe that "bada che," "badi che," and " badate che," followed by a verb in the Indicative Mood, means notice that. Ex. Badate che non ha fatto il suo dpvere. Notice that he has not done his duty. 810. t The use of the negation in all the cases mentioned in this lesson can be justified on the ground that the "npn " does not negative the verb expressed, but a verb left out (because of the excited state of the mind under fear, &c.), whose meaning is the reverse of the meaning of the verb expressed. For instance, in the example cited above, "Temo che Carlo non venga," the full meaning of the sentence is " Temo che Carlo non (timanga dov'e, ma che) venga," I fear that Charles will not remain -where he is, but that he will come. ON THE NEGATION. 175 811. The verbs " temere," and " aver paura," to fear, to appre- require "n9n...mica" " n9n...punto " when they are used affirmatively, and we fear the non-realization of the action expressed by the verbs they govern. Ex. Temo ch' ei n9n venga mica. I fear that he will not come. 812. But when "temere," and "aver paura," are used nega- tively, they do not require the negative after them. Ex. N9n temo che vengano. I do not fear they will come. 813. The negation " non " is also required after the noun "altro," another thing, the adjectives " migliore," letter, "peggiore," worse, " piu grande," greater, &c., and the adverbs " altrimenti," otherwise, " meglio," better, " peggio," worse, " meno," less, and " piu," wore, when the verb which precedes them is used affirmatively. Ex. Questo terreno e migliore ch'i9 This soil is better than I n9n lo credev9- thought. Egli era piu ricco che voi non He was richer than you are siete. now. PaKano altrimenti che n9n They speak otherwise than they agiscono. act. 814. But when the verbs preceding the above-mentioned adjec- tives and adverbs are used negatively, no negative is required after them. Ex. N9n parlano altrimenti che They do not speak otherwise agiscono. than they act. 815. Many authors put the negation "non" after the verbs " negare," to deny, and " dubitare," to doubt, when they are used negatively, or interrogatively with a negation. Ex. N9n nego che n9n* sia un U9mo I do not deny his being an able abile. man. EXERCISE LXV. Can (795) that boy write ? No, he can neither (801) write nor read. My brother has (802) only one horse, but it is a good one. They could (794) not deny the accusation we brought against them. Mind (806) they do not come here ; if (752) they do, I shall never come to see you again. f I recognised him, although (740) I had never (804) seen him before. He can (802) only do mathe- matics (419). It was they who prevented us from writing (to write.) Unless you speak to them, they will always prevent us coming. I apprehend (808) that he will succeed ; I wish (748) he would not.J I do not deny (815) his being extremely clever, but he is too conceited. I am afraid (808) that Frederick will not succeed (258) ; I wish he would. J I have no fear (812) of her speaking. 816. * It would be very difficult to justify the negation in such cases as this. 817. t Any more, never (verb) again, are translated into " non (verb) piu." \ Add succeed. ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE. LESSON XXXVI. ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 818. The Past Participle is a word which partakes of the nature of a verb and an adjective ; it is conjugated either with " Avere,"* or " Essere,"t used as auxiliaries. When a Participle is conjugated with "Avere," it is a verb; but when it is conjugated with " Es- sere," it may be regarded as an adjective. 819. The following rules are adhered to by most Italians at the present time. ON THE PARTICIPLE PRECEDED BY "AVERE." 820. The Past Participle of an Active Transitive verb (see rule 159) is conjugated with " Avere," and remains invariable, that is to say ends in o, when the Direct Object (see rule 195) in the sentence follows it.} Ex. Abbiamo comprato tre libri. We have bought three books. 821. But when the Direct Object precedes the Past Participle, the latter is variable. Ex. Ecco qui i libri che ho com- Here are the books I bought prati questa mattina. this morning. Li ho comprati a bu9n mercato. I bought them cheap. Le h9 vedute ballare. I have seen them dancing. Ho scritto a mia madre, e 1' ho I have written to my mother, pregata di venir qui. and asked her to come here. 822. The Past Participles " P9tuto," " creduto," " dovuto," and " desiderato," are often invariable because the Direct Object in the sentence, which ought to follow them, is left understood. Ex. GH ho reso tutti i servizi che I did him all the services I was ho potuto (rendergli). able to. 823. * All the Active Verbs both Transitive and Intransitive (see rules 159 and 160) and most Neuter verbs (see rule 274), are conjugated with "Avere." 824. t " Essere " is used to form the compound tenses (a) of Passive Verb< (see rule 765) (b) of eighteen Neuter Verbs, (see rule 275) (c) of Reflective Verbs (see rule 280). 825. J There are cases when the Past Participle, conjugated with " Avere," does not express an action, but expresses a quality of the Object in the sentence ; when this is the case the Participle agrees with the noun it qualifies. Ex. " Un altro, che forata avea la gola." (Dante). Another one, who had his throat pierced through. ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 177 826. The Past Participle of Active Intransitive Verbs (see rule 1 60) always remains invariable. Ex. Ci hanno parlato stamattina. They spoke to us this morning. 827. The Past Participle of most Neuter Verbs is preceded by " Avere " (see rule 274), and remains invariable. Ex. Abbiamo passeggiato tutta la We have been walking about mattina. all the morning. 828. With regard to the Impersonal Verbs, the Past Participle of those which, like " Piovere,"* can be conjugated either with " Essere " or " Avere " (see rule 283), always remains invariable. Ex., E or ha pi9vuto tutta la notte. It rained all night. 829. But the Past Participle of those Impersonal Verbs which are conjugated like " Bastare " (see rule 283), and have " Essere " for an auxiliary, is variable. Ex. I su9i libri gli sono bastati. His books have been sufficient for him. ON THE PARTICIPLE PRECEDED BY "ESSERE." 830. The Participle conjugated with " Essere " (or " Venire," (see rule 768) always agrees with the Subject in the sentence, whether it belongs to an active verb, used passively, or to one of the eighteen neuter verbs conjugated with " Essere," as explained in rule 275. Ex. Ella e stimata da tutti. She is esteemed by everybody. Essi sono caduti nella rete. They have fallen into the trap. 831. Notice that sometimes the auxiliary is not expressed, but understood, in that case the ellipsis must be supplied, and then the participle will be found to follow the rules given above. Ex. Oh! quante case (sono state) di- Oh! how many houses (have strutte ! been) destroyed ! Le battaglie (che sono state) The battles (which have been) vinte dagl' Inglesi. won by the English. 832. Instead of " Quand' ebbi veduto," when, or as soon as I had seen, "Quand' ebbe sentito," when, or as soon as he had heard, " Quando fui arrivato," when, or as soon as I had arrived, " Quando fu sc9perto," when, or as soon as he was discovered, &c., the more elegant expressions " Veduto che ebbe," " Sentito che ebbe," " Arrivato che fu," " Sc9perti che furono," &c., are used. Ex. Veduto che ebbi il palazzo, mi As soon as I saw the palace, venne 1'idea di comprarlo. I had the idea of buying it. * See rule 63, to understand the meaning of the letters in the darker type. 12 1/8 ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 833. In the following cases, and in scores of a similar nature, the Past Participle in Italian is illogically inflected for the sake of euphony : Egli ci ha mandati* a cercare. He sent for us. Questi quadri mi vanno a genio ; I like these pictures very much ; li h9 vedutif dipingere. ' I saw them being painted. Figliuoli, vi siete dimenticatej Children, you have forgotten le mie pamle. my words. Non mi date piu frag9le ; ne Do not give me any more straw- ho mangiate abbastanza. berries ; I have eaten enough. EXERCISE LXVI. Have you finished (820) the letter (636) I gave you to (310) write ? The heavy rains, which we had (704) in the spring, have been the cause of many diseases. We have not slept (827) for the last forty-eight hours. The painter Caracci having been plundered by some robbers, drew their likenesses so well that they were dis- covered (704, 830). The hostile army being routed (689), their camp plundered, their baggage carried away, their ammunition taken, the French re-entered triumphant. A noble but confused thought is a diamond covered with (831, 348) dust. The high mountains of (330) Switzerland are always covered with snow and ice. King Harold and his two brothers were killed (704, 830) at the battle of Hastings. Demetrius, on hearing || that the Athenians had overturned (833) his statues, remarked, " They have not overturned the virtues which erected (821) them to me." (218). Look, I have bought this box (680) to put my clothes in (198, 238) ; do you think it is large enough ? Yes, I think so (271). As soon as he had received (832) his money, he started for America. Before (730) men possessed the art of writing, all deeds worthy of being preserved were transmitted (701, 769, 830) to pos- terity in verse (verses). * " Mandati " should be " mandate," because "ci," is governed by " cercare," and not by " mandati ; " but " mandate," near to " ci," would sound inharmonious. f "Veduti" should be " veduto," because "li," is governed by "dipingere," and not by " veduti;" but " veduto," near to " li," would sound inharmonious. J " Dimenticate " should be " dimenticato " because" le mie parole" is the direct object of " dimenticato ; " but " dimenticato " would make the sentence sound inharmonious. " Mangiate " should be " mangiato," because this participle is not preceded by a direct object ; but "mangiato" would make the sentence sound inharmonious. 834. || In English when there are two or more verbs, in the same sentence, denot- ing actions done by the same subject, the verb expressing the action which was done first, is often employed in the Present Participle, but in Italian it must be used in the compound of the Gerund (as explained in rule 689) thus : "Demetrio, udito che glj Ateniesi avevano," &c. ON THE VERB " AVERE," USED IDIOMATICALLY. 179 LESSON XXXVII. ON THE VERB "AVERE," USED IDIOMATICALLY. 835. "Avere" is used idiomatically to translate the English expressions, What is the matter with you ? What is the matter with him ? &c. Ex. Npn 59 che cosa abbiano questi I do not know what is the matter fanciulli ; sembrano, molto with these children ; they addolorati. seem very grieved. 836. " Avere," followed by a noun, is used in Italian in the following idiomatical expressions, instead of the verb to lie, followed by an adjective, as in English : (a) Aver caldo, to be warm. (g) Aver torto, to be in the wrong. (b) Aver freddo, to be cold. (h) Aver paura, to be afraid. (c) Aver fame, to be hungry. (i) Aver fretta, to be in a hurry. (d) Aver sete, to be thirsty. (j) Aver piacere, caro, to be glad. (e) Aver S9nno, to be sleepy. (k) Aver cura di, to be careful of. (f) Aver ragione, to be in the right. (1) Aver giudizio, to act sensibly. EXERCISE LXVII. Are you (122) warm, (a) Charles ? Yes. I thank you ; when I came in I was very cold (b). When these men came in (705) they were (695) very hungry (c) and thirsty (d). The children are very sleepy (e). Do you think (691) that Margaret is in the right (f) (724) ? Yes, and that you are in the wrong (g). I never thought (691) that you would be so wicked as* to offend her. These little children (442) are afraid (h) of that big dog (437). Do (126, 128) not detain me, because I am in a hurry (i). I am very glad (j) to hear that your brother is going to Florence. Shut that window ; I feel very cold (b). Those who (630) think they are always in the right (f) are often wrong. They were very happy (j) to be again with us. I think you should be (791) more careful of (k) your health. If (754) he would act sensibly, (1) he would be liked by (270) everybody. If he were wise, (1) he would be rich. 837. * The expressions to be so good as, to be so wicked as, &c. , are translated into Italian by " Ssere abbastanza buono per," " CSsere abbastanza cattivo per." 180 ON THE VERB " AVERE " USED IDIOMATICALLY. ON THE VERB " AVERE " USED IDIOMATICALLY. 838. " AVERE " is USED IDIOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOWING EX- PRESSIONS : (a) Aver biwna cera, to look well. (k) Aver un bel dire, un bel fare, (b) Aver cattiva cera, to look ill. &c., to speak in vain, to act in (c) Aver male a, to feel a pain in. vain, &c. (d) Avere a mano, or in pronto, (1) Aver voce in capitolo, to have to have a thing ready. much influence. (e) Aver bisogno di, to need. (m) Aver il capo ai grilli, to be out (f) Aver 1' intenzione di, to intend. of temper. (g) Aver V9glia di, to have a wish, (n) Aver della ruggine con, to (h) Aver vaghezza di, to have a bear a grudge to. great desire to. (o) Averla con,* to be angry with. (i) Aver di mira, to aim at. (p) Aversela af male, to take of- (j) Aver luogo, to take place. fence. EXERCISE LXVIII. Your brother looked very well (a) when I saw him a few days ago. You do not look well (b) ; what (611) is the matter with you (835) ? I feel a pain in (c) my head, and in my right arm. She has the money ready (d) to pay him if (752) he comes. I intend (f) to buy a copy of Tennyson's poems for you (213). He has a wish (g) to eat some French strawberries. She had a great desire to (h) see the Tower of London. They aim at (i) making money. Now I will tell you what took place (j) at my brother's house (434). He may say what he likes (k), he may do what he likes (k), he will not succeed (258). Do not pay attention to (216) what (610) he says ; he has no influence (1). Your brother Louis is always out of temper (m). I am afraid (808) he bears you a grudge (n) ; I do not know why. He is angry with (o) me because I sold (707) the horse without telling him anything. Charles is easily offended (p). It is true thatj I intend (f) to go to Florence and remain there (239) for (311) five or six months, but I cannot make up my mind (803) thus in a moment. 839. * "Averla con" is conjugated as t "Aversela a male" is conjugated as follows : follows : L' ho con, I am angry with. Me 1' ho a male, 1 am offended. L' hai con, thou art angry with. Te 1' hai a male, thou art offended. L' ha con, he is angry with. Se 1'ha a male, he is offended. 840. J The expression It is true that is rendered in Italian by putting "ben" or " bensi " after the first verb in the sentence. Ex. Ho ben 1' intenzione di viaggiare ma It is true that I intend to travel, but not non adesso. now. 841. The expressions in a moment, on the spur of the moment, are rendered in Italian by " su due piedi," or " in quel subito." ON THE VERB " ESSERE " USED IDIOMATICALLY. l8l ON THE VERB ESSERE" USED IDIOMATICALLY. 842. " ESSERE " is USED IDIOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOWING EXPRESSIONS : (a) Essere necessario di, essere (h) Essere un p9co di buono, to d' U9po di, essere mestieri be a good for nothing. di, esser forza di,* to be (i) Essere da P9co, to be worth necessary, or /, you, one, we, little. they must, or / have to, &c. (j) Essere da piu di, to be worth (b) Essere prezzo dell'9pera, to more than. be worth while. (k) Essere a mal termine, to be (c) Essere in grado di, to have it in a critical position. in one's power. (1) Essere sul punto di, essere in (d) Esser pago, or S9ddisfatto di, procinto di, essere per, to be satisfied with. essere li li per, to be on the (e) Essere all'ordine, or pronto, point of. to be ready. (m) Essere in bu9n concetto, to (f) Essere in ritardo, to be late. bear a good character. (g) Essere d' acc9rdo, to agree. (n) Essere vago di, to desire. EXERCISE LXIX. It is necessary (a) to make all (482) preparations for the Prince of Wales, who will arrive at two o'clock, with the Princess of Wales and the Prince of Naples. I must (a) make a speech on behalf of our College. It is worth while (b) to go to (make) some expense on (650) such an occasion. They have it in their power (c) to do a great deal of good to the institution. I hope our director will be satisfied with (d) our endeavours. I am sure he will (208). Well, boys, are you ready (e) ? Yes, we are quite ready, except Mary ; she is always late (f). Those two boys never agree (g). To (225) say the truth, that little fellow there, is a good for nothing (h). When I caught hold of him, he was (695) on the point of (1) throwing a stone at my window. Does that man (606) bear a good character? (m). No, he does not (208). I should be very glad (n) to know who that lady is. I have had (d9vere)f to grant him all (610) he asked me. I have had (d9vere)j to come alone. He has not been able (p9tere)f to sleep. He has not been able (p9tere)J to succeed. They would (v9lere)f (707) not walk. They would (jvxplere)! (707) not live in (with) dishonour. * Rule 287 holds good with these verbs. 843. t When the verbs "dovere," " potere," and "volere" are followed by verbs, which, in their compound tenses, are conjugated with " avere," they (" dovere," " potere," and "volere") are also conjugated with " avere." 844. J When the verbs "dovere," "potere," and "volere" are followed by verbs, which, in their compound tenses are conjugated with "essere," they ("dovere,'' " potere," and " vplere ") are conjugated with " essere." l82 ON THE VERB " ANDARE," USED IDIOMATICALLY. ON THE VERB " ANDARE," USED IDIOMATICALLY. 845. " Andare " is used Idiomatically in the following expres- sions : (a) Andare a genio a, to like. (j) Andar di male in peggio, to (b) Andare a piede, to go on foot. get worse and worse. (c) Andare in campzza, or in le- (k) Andare a vuoto, to fail. gno, to ride in a carriage. (1) Andare a fondo, to sink. (d) Andare a cavallo, to ride. (m) Andar dietro a, to follow. (e) Andare in cpllera, to get into a (n) Andar per la mente, to be in passion. one's mind. (f) Andare in estasi, to fall into (o) Andare alle corte, to come to a ecstasies. decision. (g) Andare altiero di, tobe proud of. (p) Andare alia lunga, to goon (h) Andare a vele gonfie, to pros- slowly. per. (q) Andar di mezzo, to suffer from. (i) Andar di bene in meglio, to (r) Andarsene,* to go away. get better and better. (s) Andare a prova, a gara, to vie. EXERCISE LXX. I do not like (a) to go on foot (b). My sisters are very fond of riding in a carriage (c) ; they very seldom walk (b). Elizabeth rides (d) every morning to the topt of the hill with her brother. Why do you get into a passion (e) for nothing ? The sound of this instrument is so (536) melodious that it makes me fall into ecstasies (f). He is very proud of (g) his (560) riches ; and she is very proud of her beauty. His affairs are very prosperous (h). His business is getting better and better (i). Their condition is getting worse and worse (j). The scheme has failed (k) ; I am afraid (808) he is ruined. I do not think so (271). The ship sank (1) near the harbour, at three o'clock p.m. (548). His dog followed him (m) (697) wherever he went. Some of his verses are really beautiful, they are always in my mind (n). Let us come to a decision (o) at once ; I am tired of arguing (683). He was so slow (p) in making up his mind (803) that I lost my patience. I do not want to suffer from it (q) (240). I am going (r) now ; goodbye. 846. * "Andarsene" is conjugated thus: "me ne vo," " te ne vai," " se ne va," &c. 847. t Top (of a mountain, hill) is translated by " sommita," "sommo." Top (of a house, wall), "comignolo," "vetta." Top (of a tree), "cima." Top (of a table), " coperchio." A top, " un paleo." ON THE VERB " DARE," USED IDIOMATICALLY. 183 ON THE VERB "DARE," USED IDIOMATICALLY. 848. " Dare "*is used idiomatically in the following expressions: (a) Dare ad intendere a, to make (k) Dar conto di, to account for. believe. (1) Dar nel rosso, to border on red. (b) Dar fede a, to believe. (m) Dar del furfante a, to call one (c) Dar retta a, to mind, to listen. a rascal. (d) Dar del (or di) tu a, to address (n) Dare sf9go a, to give vent to. one in the second person singular, (o) Dar d'occhio a, to look at. (e) Dar del (or di) voi a, to address (p) Dare udienza a, to receive. one in the second person plural, (q) Dar di piglio a, to seize. (f ) Dar del (or di) lei a, to address (r) Dar ragione a, to agree that one in the third per. sing, (fern.) someone is in the right. (g) Dar parola a, to promise. (s) Dar tor to a, to say that someone (h) Dar fuoco a, to set on fire to is in the wrong. (i) Dar mano a, to begin. (t) Dar lo sfratto a, to expel. (j) Dar una mano a, to give some (u) Dar volta, to turn back. help, to give a, coat of (paint, (v) Dar carico a, to accuse. varnish, &c.). (w) Dar bene (a pen), to write well. EXERCISE LXXI. He would make me believe (a) that he was rich. I never believe (b) flatterers. He does (784) not repent of (184) having listened to (c) his bad companions. He always addresses everybody in the second person singular (d). Italian ladies and gentlemen address their inferiors in the second person plural (e). I always address him in the third person singular (f ), respectfully. He gave me his word (g) that he would be here again in a week (549). It is said (771) that he set fire to (h) his house. Why do you not begin (i) your poem ? You had better help me a little (j). They were obliged to account for (k) their (560) conduct. This cloth borders on red (1). I wish I couldf give vent to (n) my feelings. They looked at me (o) two or three times. The President received him (p) this morning. He seized (q) a stick, and began to strike me. He agrees that you are in the right (r). This pen writes well (w). 849. * The verb "Dare," used unipersonally, with the pronoun "si," means to be probable. Ex. Pu6 darsi che non vengano. It is probable that they will not come. 850. t The expressions I wish I could speak, I wish I could have -written, &c. , are translated into Italian by "Vorrei poter parlare," "Vorrei aver potuto scrivere," &c. 1 84 ON THE VERB "DARE" USED IDIOMATICALLY. ON THE VERB "DARE," USED IDIOMATICALLY. 851. "Dare" is used Idiomatically in the following expres- sions : (a) Dare alia luce, to publish. (k) Dar di naso da per tutto, to (b) Dar nella rete, to fall into a meddle with everything. snare. (1) Darsi la mano io wed. (c) Dar 1' animo a di, to be bold (m) Darsi vanto di, to boast. enough to. (n) Darsi allo studio, to apply one s- (d) Dar Iu9go a, to give vise to. self to study. (e) Dar la burla, or la baia, to (o) Darsi bel tempo, or Darsi al make fun of. dolce far niente, to live in (f) Dar la colpa a, to throw the idleness. blame on. (p) Darsi a conoscere per, to make (g) Dare in ismanie, to show a one's-self known as. great deal of irritation. (q) Darsi briga di, to meddle with. (h) Dare in uno sc9ppio di risa, (r) Darsi pensiero di, to worry to burst out laughing. one 's-self about. (i) Dare in uno scoppio di la- (s) Darsi pace, to be contented. grime, to burst out crying. (t) Darsela a gambe, :;: (j) Dare in prestito a, to lend. (u) ?9ter darsi, to be possible. EXERCISE LXXII. He has published (a) a good translation of Moliere's Comedies. He fell (704) into the snare (b) like an idiot. I am bold enough (c) to send him a challenge. His election gave rise to (d) (704) a very warm discussion. They are making fun of you (e). Mary always throws the blame on (f) her sister. When we accused him, he showed a great deal of irritation (g). When I told him the news, he burst out laughing (h). I advise you not to lend her (j) your parasol. That busybody meddles with everything (k). They are leading a life of idleness (o). He would not make himself known as (p) the author of the comedy. I wish that she would not (723) meddle with (q) my affairs. My dear friend, do not worry yourself about (r) trifles, be contented (s). The thief ran away (t) directly. It is possible (u) that Frederick and his friends will arrive (Pres. Subj.) this afternoon. 852. * The verb " Darsela a gambe " is conjugated as follows : Me la do a gambe, I run away. Ce la diamo a gambe, -we run away. Te la dai a gambe, thou runnest away. Ve la date a gambe, you run away. Se la da a gambe, he runs away. Se la danno a gambe, they run away. ON THE VERB " FARE," USED IDIOMATICALLY. 185 ON THE VERB "FARE," USED IDIOMATICALLY. 853. " Fare " is used Idiomatically in the following expres- sions :-- (a) Far bel tempo, tole fine weather. (m)Far mestieri di, or far d'uopo (b) Far cattiv9 tempo, to be bad di, to be necessary. weather. (n) Far vela, to set sail. (c) Far freddo, to be cold. (o) Far naufragio, to be shipwrecked. (d) Far caldo, to be warm. (p) Far vista, ov mostra di, to (e) Far umido, to be damp. pretend. (f) Far C9lazione, to breakfast. (q) Far piacere a, to please. (g) Far merenda, to have luncheon, (r) Far le veci di, \ (h) Far animo, to encourage, (s) Far le parti di, [ to act as. (i) Far pompa di, to boast. (t) Far da, ) (j) Far ala a, to make room for. (u) Far brindisi a, to drink the (k) Far alto, to halt. health of. (1) Fare il grugno a, to stilk. (v) Far il d9ttore, to lay down the law. EXERCISE LXXIII. It was fine weather (a) (704) during the whole month we re- mained at Brighton. The weather is very bad (b) just now ; we cannot go out. Sometimes it is very cold (c) in (207) Paris, I assure you. In summer it is very warm (d) in Italy ; perhaps too warm. In the western part of Ireland the weather is very damp (e). At home we breakfast (f) at seven o'clock (548) in (328) summer, and eight o'clock in winter. We shall have luncheon (g) before we go out. I encouraged him (h) by promising (686) that I would take him with me. He was always boasting (i) (701) of his ancestors. The crowd made room for (j) her. They halted (k) during the night. He is sulking (1) with me, because I would not lend him my horse. The ship set sail (n) for America three days ago ; she had three hundred passengers on board. They were shipwrecked (o) off the coast of Cornwall. He pretended (p) to give the money to his father, but instead of that, he put it in his pocket (572). He played another tune to please (q) the officers of the staff.* On (298) that occasion he acted as (r) chaplain. He acted as (s) a father to her. They drank the chairman's health (u). He is always laying down the law (v). 854. * Staff (military), is translated by "Stato Maggiore." Staff (of a newspaper), "redazione." Staff (stick), " bastone." Pilgrim's staff, "bordone." 1 86 ON THE WORD "FARE" USED IDIOMATICALLY. ON THE VERB " FARE," USED IDIOMATICALLY 855. " Fare " is used Idiomatically in the following expres- sions : (a) Fare i conti di, to intend. (n) Farsi fare, to have made for (b) Fare una visita, to pay a visit. one's-self. (c) Fare una passeggiata, to take a (o) Farsi animo, to take courage. walk. (p) Farsi nu9vo di, to pretend to (d) Fare un bagno, to take a bath. be ignorant of. (e) Far 1' precchio del mercante, (q) Farsi beffe di, to ridicule. to turn a deaf ear. (r) Farsi innanzi, to put one's-self (f) Far vedere a, to show. forward. (g) Far male a, to hurt. (s) Farsi in qua, to draw near. (h) Fare attenzione, to pay attention, (t) Farsi in la, or indietro, to (i) Far parola di, to mention. draw back. (j) Far prova di coraggio, to give (u) Fartantodicappelloa,fo bow proofs of courage. most respectfidly to. (k) Far capolino, to peep in. (v) Sul far del giorno, at the break (1) Far fare, to have made. of day. (m) Far risaltare, to fetch out. (w) Sul far della n9tte, at stmset. EXERCISE LXXIV. I intend (a) to pay him a visit (b). We shall take a walk (c) this evening after tea. I take a bath (d) every morning before breakfast. I asked him to lend me his gun, but he turned a deaf ear (e). I want to show him (f) that I am not easily frightened. Do not (126) hurt him (g) with that big stick. You never pay attention (h) to what I tell you. Remember that you have pro- mised me not to mention it (i) to my brother. He gave proofs of great courage (j) in the last war. We were busy preparing the exhibition* when my father peeped in (k). I have had two tables made (1) for the garden. He had a letter written (1) to me by his secretary. This dark tint fetches out (m) the colours of the flowers. Take courage, (o) my dear friend. He pretended to be ignorant of (p) all that (610) had happened. They ridicule (q) everybody. You should not be afraid ; you should put yourself forward (r). If you draw near (s), you will see the effect. Draw back (t) a little ; I cannot see the game. When they meet, they bow to one another most respectfully (u). He always gets up to work (225) at the break of day (v), and comes home at sunset (w). 856. * Exhibition is translated by " esposizione. " " Un'esibizione " means an offer. ON THE VERB "FARE" USED IDIOMATICALLY 187 ON THE VERB "FARE" USED IDIOMATICALLY. 857. "FARE" is USED IDIOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOWING EXPRES- SIONS : (a) Far caso di, to value. (j) Far rigar dritto, far stare a se- (b) Far specie a, to be astonished. gno, to take down a peg or two. (c) Far meno di, far a meno di, (k) Fare il sarto, to be a tailor. to help it, or to do without. (1) Far crocchio, to form groups. (d) Far senno, to become serious. (m) Far festa a, to greet. (e) Fare spalla, to back. (n) Farsi mallevadore, to stand (f) Fare una d9manda, to ask a guaranty. question. (o) Non fa niente, never mind. (g) Far 1'indiano, to look as if but- (p) Come si fa ? what will you do ? ter would not melt in one's mouth, (q) E un ttomo cosi fatto, that (h) Fare il bell' umore, fare il is his character. gallo, to be impertinent. (r) C' e un bel da fare, there is (i) Fare il bravo, to brag. plenty to do. EXERCISE LXXV. He does not value (a) your friendship ; so much the worse* for him. I was astonished (b) to see him dressed in mufti. I could not help it (c). He promised to become serious (d), and I backed him (e) with all my means. I asked his parents (655) some ques- tions (f). When I caught the pickpocket, at first he looked as if butter would not melt in his mouth (g), and then he began to be impertinent (h). The policeman told him that it was useless to brag (i), and that he would take him down a peg or two (j). What do these men do ? This one is a tailor (k) and that one a carpenter. The procession broke up (704) and the people began to form groups (1). They greeted us (m) warmly. He has promised my father to stand guaranty (m) for me. Never mind (o), he will be compelled to speak. What will you do (p) ? I know him ; that is his character (q). There is plenty to do (r), the members of the Commission are coming here to dine. This time the secretary will have something to do for his salary. \ 858. * The expressions so much the better, so much the -worse, are translated into Italian by " tanto meglio," " tanto peggio." 859. t The salary of a secretary is translated by " lo stipendio di un secretario." The wages of a servant " il salario di un servo." The wages of a workman "la paga di un operaio." 1 88 ON THE VERB "STARE" USED IDIOMATICALLY. ON THE VERB "STARE" USED IDIOMATICALLY. 860. "Stare" is used idiomatically in the following expres- sions : (a) Stare (di salute), to be (in health), (k) Star in forse, or Star tra il si (b) Stare di casa, to reside. e il n9, to hesitate. (c) Stare a sedere, to be seated. (1) Star quietb, fermo, to be quiet. (d) Stare in piedi, to stand. (m) Star allegro, to be merry. (e) Stare a sentire, to listen. (n) Stare zitto, cheto, to be silent. (f) Stare a.\\'erta., to beon one's guard, (o) Sta a me di,* it is my turn. (g) Stare in orecchi, to prick up (p) Stare a galla, to float. one's ears. (q) Star con le mani a cintola, (h) Star per, to be on the point of. to stand idle. (i) Star in agguato, to lie in wait. (r) Star fresco, to be in a pickle. (j) Star sull' avviso, to be prepared, (s) Nqn istar bene, to be wrong. EXERCISE LXXVI. How are (a) you to-day ? I am very well, I thank you. Do you reside (b) in this neighbourhood ? No, I am stayingf with my sister. The ladies were allowed to sit down (c), but the gentlemen had (790) to stand (d) all the time. When you came in I was listening (e) to (698) a very interesting conversation. Be on your guard (f) ; for he might (794) escape. I saw that the stranger was pricking up his ears (g) when you were speaking to my partner. Lions and tigers lie in wait (i) for their prey near streams and brooks. He wanted to (786, 307) surprise us, but we were pre- pared (j). I hesitated (k) whether I was to go (756) to Paris. Be quiet (1), John. Let us be merry, (m) children ; to-day it is little Charlie's (448) birthday. His being (683) silent (n) gave great advantage to his enemies. Now it is his turn (o) to speak. Light substances float (q) on water. Write this exercise, instead of standing idle (q). Elizabeth, we have missed our train ; we are in a pickle (r) now. It is wrong (s) to gamble. 86 1. * The expressions " tocca a me di," "a voi di," c., are frequently used instead of " sta a me di," Sec. ; but "tocca a me di," &c., has more force; it often means it is my duty, it is my right. 862. t The Italian for to stay with, is " Ssere in visita da." 863. J In speaking of dresses, " Star bene " means to suit, to become, and " Star male," to be unsuitable, to be unbecoming. Ex. Cotest'abito non le sta bene. That coat does not suit you. IDIOMS WITH " SAPERE," " TENERE," " VOLERE," " VENIRE." 189 IDIOMS FORMED WITH "SAPERE," "TENERE," "VOLERE," AND "VENIRE." 864. IDIOMS WITH " SAPERE." (a) Sapere a mente, or a menro- (e) Saper di poco, to have little ria, to know by heart. taste, or smell. (b) Saper male, to be sorry for. (f) Saper di niente, to have not any (c) Saper di biKmo, to have a good taste, or smell. taste, or smell. (g) Saper di muschio, to smell of (d) Saper di cattivo, to have a bad musk. taste, or smell. (h) Saper di pesce, to smell of fish. 865. IDIOMS WITH "TENERE." (i) Tenere a bada, to trifle with. (1) Tener le lagrime, or le risa, to (j) Tenere a battesimo, to be god- keep from weeping, or laughing, father, or godmother. (m) Tener uno per galantiwmo, (k) Tenere da uno, to side with one. to believe one an honest man. 866. IDIOMS WITH " V9LERE." (n) Voler bene a, to be fond of. (o) V9ler dire, to mean. 867. IDIOMS WITH " VENIRE." (p) Venir meno, to faint. (r) Venir V9glia a, to take a fancy. (q) Venire in mente a, to remember, (s) Venir fatto a, to succeed. EXERCISE LXXVII. My brother knows by heart (a) many Italian sonnets. I am sorry (b) to see you afflicted ; I hope that* you have not received any bad news. These apples have a good smell (c). I am sure that he is trifling with (i) you. She has been godmother (j) to all my children. I side with (k) you because you are in the right (836, f). Camelias are very beautiful flowers, but they have not any smell (f). All her clothes smell of musk (g). We could not help weeping (1). I always believed (707) him to be (m) an honest man. William is very fond of (n) your cousin Elizabeth. If I had known what he meant (o), I should have spoken to him. When she heard the news, she fainted (p) in her mother's arms. I remember (q) that I promised to meet her at my mother's house, at three o'clock this afternoon. I took a fancy (r) to go and (340) see the exhibition (856). He succeeded (s) (693) in obtaining the post. 868. * The expressions I hope that, -we hope that, &c., when referring to a present or past time, are translated by " Amo credere che," " ci piace credere die," &c. (followed by a verb in the Subjunctive). To hope for a thing that is, or has been, is I9O ON ADVERBS. LESSON XXXVIII. ADVERBS. 869. The rules for the formation of adverbs from adjectives, and the mode of forming the degrees of comparison are given in pages 122, and following. 870. Adverbs are divided into classes, according to their signifi- cation. 871. THE PRINCIPAL ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION. Si, yes. Gia, Certo, certainly. Appunto, Sicuramente, surely. Per 1'appunto, h exactly so. Indubitatamente, ] Infatti, Senza dubbio, I undoubtedly. Davvero, really. Senz' altro, j Sia cosi, be it so. 872. In giving an answer containing the verbs " credere," "sperare," "dubitare," and "temere," the idioms "di si," and "di n9," are used instead of " si " and " 119." Ex. T in casa mio zio ? Credo di si. Is my uncle at home ? I think so. 873. THE PRINCIPAL ADVERBS OF NEGATION. No, no. Niente affatto, } u XT / ux T \ \ by no means. Non (verb), not, no. In nessun modo, j J never. N9n (verb) mica, \ ,, N9n (verb) mai, ) Non (verb) punto, J n Non (verb) giammai, j 874. The negation not is translated into Italian by " n9n," and is always placed before the verb. Ex. vi h9 chiamato, Enrico. I did not call you, Henry. 875. THE PRINCIPAL ADVERBS OF ORDER. Dopo, after. first. P9i,t poscia, 1 then. J ly> . .,, Indi, quindi, {next, to begin with. Gradu \ lmentej gradually. Prima, In prima, Dapprima, Primieramente, Secondariamente, secondly. Successivamente, successively. In terzo Iu9go, in the third place. Finalmente, finally. 876. t " Poi," also means besides. Ex. "Aveva poi un modo di vestire tutto suo." Besides > he had a very peculiar way of dressing himself. ON ADVERBS. 191 877. THE Qui, qua, ci, PRINCIPAL ADVERBS OF PLACE. Li, la, cola, vi, ivi, ' Ove, dove, here, there. where. Onde, donde, ) , di dove, ! whence " Quassu, Quaggiu, Lassu, Laggiii, Di sopra, Di sotto, In su, In giu, Su e giu, Vicino,* upwards. downwards. up and down near. far. elsewhere. Da basso, up here, down here, up there, down there, above, upstairs below, downstairs [ aside. on the left, forward. everywhere. Altrove, Da banda, Da parte, A mano destra, ) ,, A destra, diritta, f On the A sinistra, manca, Avanti,* innanzi,* Da per tutto, Ovunque, Ognidove, and " ci " (here), are used to indicate the place in which the speaker is ; " C9stij" " costa " (there), the place occupied by the person addressed ; " Li," "la," " C9la," " ivi," and " vi " (there), mark a place distant alike from the speaker and the person addressed. " Qui " and " costi " are generally used with verbs expressing state, whereas " qua " and " costa " are always connected with verbs expressing movement. 879. " Ci," " vi," and " ivi," can only be used when the place to which these adverbs refer has been already mentioned in the sentence. Ex. Ora che sono in questo posto Now that I am in this place I ci voglio rimanere. will remain in it. 878. " Qui," " qua, 880. ADVERBS WHICH CAN BE USED INTERROGATIVELY. Quando ? Quanto ? Mai?t Gi animal ? Come ? when ? Ove? how much ? Dove ? Donde ? ever ? Perche ? how ? Fin dove ? where ? whence ? why? how far ? Da quando in qua ? since when ? Fino a quando ? until wjien ? 881. " Mai " and " giammai," employed without being preceded by " n9n," have the signification of ever ; but when they are em- ployed with " n9n," or " no," they mean never. Ex. Ha ella mai visto il duomo di Have you ever seen the cathedral Milano ? No, mai. of Milan ? No, I have not. * "Vicino," "lontano," "avanti," and " innanzi " can also be used as prepositions. 882. t " Unqua " is often used in poetry instead of " mai." 192 ON ADVERBS. 883. SENTENCES CONTAINING ADVERBS OF TIME. (To be learnt by heart.) Giuseppe andb al passeggio Joseph went for a walk yesterday, and I shall go to-day, and to- ieri, ed i9 v'andrb 9ggi e Vidi i miei avantieri (a), e li vedrb ancora fra p9co (b). E difficile di fare utili scoperte a I giorno d'pggi (c). Che faremo ora? (d). faremo niente fino a mani (e). Pel momento (f) n9n p9sso dar risp9sta, ma deciderb al piu presto p9ssibile. Finora (g) egli ha fatto a ir^do suo ; ormai mi obbedira. L'ho visto due ore fa, e lo rivedro 9ggi a 9tto. E ancora (i) prigioniero, ma sara liberato fra (j) un mese. Incontrai Carlo p9c'anzi (k). 1' IK> veduto da due mesi in qua. Pel passato lo vedevo rara- mente, (1) ma d' ora in avanti (m) lo vedrb S9vente (n). Quando partiremo? Subito* (o) ; ho gia preparato i miei bauli. Egli si decise su due piedi (p). Per 1' avvenire verrb a trovarla di quando in quando (q). mancherodi scriverglisu- bito che(r) arriverb aParigi. morrow. I saw my family the day before yesterday, and I shall see them again very soon. Now-a-days it is difficult to make useful discoveries. What shall we do now ? We shall do nothing till the day after to-morrow. For the present 1 cannot give an answer, but I will decide as soon as possible. Hitherto he has done what he likes ; now he will obey me. I saw him two hours ago, and I shall see him again to-day week. He is still a prisoner, but he will be liberated in a month. I have just met Charles. I have not seen him for the last two months. In past time I seldom saw him, but henceforth I shall see him often. When shall we start ? At once; I have already prepared my trunks. He made up his mind in a moment . For the future I shall come to see you now and then. I shall not fail to write to him as soon as I arrive in Paris. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (i) Or ieri 1'altro. Or tpsto, fra breve, quanto prima. Or pggidi, oggimai. Or adesso. Or domani 1'altro. Or per ora, per adesso. Or infino ad ora. Or tuttora, tuttavia. 884. (j) (k) (D (m) (n) 1 Ratio " is sometimes Or da qui a un mese. (o) Or pur dianzi, pur mo, purora,pocofa, teste. (p) Or di rado. Or d' ora innanzi, da qui in avanti, da qui (q) innanzi, d' ora in poi, d'oggi in poi. (r) Or spesso. used in poetry instead of Or a momenti, imme- diatamente. Or in un attimo, in un batter d' occhio, in menchenonsidice. Or ditempoin tempo, di tratto in tratto. Or tosto che, appena, come prima. subito." OX ADVERBS. 193 Non \'ho vista d'allora in poi (a). Altre volte era ricca, ma in questi ultimi tempi (b) divenne povera. Vi prego di venire per tempo, (c) allorquando (d) volete parlarmi. R9berto viene sempre (e) a sec- carmi, ora (f) per una cosa, ora per 1' altra. Allora Carlo arrivava per lo piu prima di me. Andiamo,sifatardi; siamo sem- pre in ritardo ; cib n9n va bene. Era fin d'allora all'apice della sua gl9ria. Lo vidi circa sei giorni fa. Qualche volta (g) restava per molto tempo sci9perato. All'ind9mani era di gran lunga innanzi dei suoi competitor!. Verrete da me qualora vi piac- cia (h). Agguantb 1'agnello addirittura, e, senz' altro, se lo divoro. I have never seen her since then. Formerly she was rich, but of late she became poor. I beg of you to come early, whenever you wish to speak to me. Robert always comes to bother me, now for one thing, then for another. Then Charles generally arrived before me. Let us go, it is getting late; we are always late ; that is not right. He was even then at the very height of his glory. I saw him about six days ago. Sometimes he remained for a long while idle. On the morrow he was far ahead of his competitors. You will come to me whenever you like. He seized the lamb, and with- out more ado, devoured it. EXERCISE LXXVIII. What are you doing here, Mrs. Vincenzi ? I am spending an hour in the fresh air ; I come here almost every morning. Where have you been? (123) I do not know from whence I came; we lost our way after (185) crossing the little green bridge, near Mr. Prati's house. We went up and down I do not know for how long ; but at last we have arrived here safe and sound. Will you go with me to see the pictures in the National Gallery ? Yes, if you will permit me to take my sister with me. With the greatest pleasure. No doubt you have seen Mascagni's new opera ? No, not yet ; I have no time at all, just now. Now we will begin this work ; we shall finish it before midnight. If I were in your place, I would remain in Nice during the winter. I often meet your cousin, Mrs. Alberti ; sometimes in the park, sometimes in the Reading Room of the British Museum. (a) Or d'allora in qua. (b) Or recentemente, non ha guari. 13 (c) Or di buon ora. (d) Or ogniqualvolta. (e) Or ognora. (f) Or quando...quando. (g) Or talora. (h) Or quando che sia. 194 ON ADVERBS. 885. SENTENCES CONTAINING ADVERBS OF QUALITY AND MANNER. (To be learnt by heart.) Ella parla bene, ma parlerebbe meglio (a) se parlasse piu adagio. II suo sarto lavora male (b) perche lavora in fretta. Credo di no ; il fatto sta che lavora malv9lentieri (c). Davvero lavora alia carlona (d) ; di male in peggio (a) ogni giorno. Si direbbe chelo fa app9sta (e), o per burla (f), per mettervi in collera. Vorrei parlarle a quattr' 9cchi (g) ; h9 qualcosa da dirle a bocca (h). Volentieri (i), ecc9mi qui, dite presto, sotto voce ma senz' ambagi. Tutta la casa e a S9qquadro (j) e sua moglie piange dirrotta- mente (k). Parlate sul serio (1) ; n9n son cose da dirsi alia pazza. Vendeva i svwi quadri di mano in mano che li finiva. Lo passb da parte a parte (m), ad onta della (n) maglia che P9rtava. Tutt'a un tratto (o) si rimisero a lavorare con amore. Me ne vivo quietamente in questo castello, merce la b9nta del g9vernatore. Agiro comunque ei voglia. You speak well, but you would speak better if you spoke slower. Your tailor works badly because he works in a hurry. I do not think so ; the fact is he works unwillingly. Really he works carelessly, worse and worse every day. One would say that he does it on purpose, or for fun, to make you cross. I would like to see you privately ; I have something to tell you by word of mouth. Willingly, here I am, be quick, in a whisper but to the point. The whole house is in confusion ; and your wife is weeping bit- terly. Speak seriously ; they are not things to be said wantonly. He sold his pictures as fast as he finished them. He pierced him through and through, in spite of the coat of mail he wore. All at once they began again to work in good earnest. I live quietly in this castle, thanks to the kindness of the governor. I shall act just as he wishes. (a) The adverbs "meglio" and "peggio" are the comparative forms of "bene" and " male." Their superlative forms are "ottimamente," " pessimamente." (b) Or malamente. (g) Or da solo a solo. (1) frdasenno. (c) Or a malincuore. (h) Or a voce, viva voce. (m) Or da banda a banda. (d) Or alia buona. (i) Or buona voglia. (n) Or malgrado. (e) Or a bello studio. (j) Or sottosopra. (o) Or alPirnprovviso, di (f) Or per ischerzo. (k) Or a dirotte lagrime. repente. ON ADVERBS. 195 Lavorarono siffattamente (a), che dapp9i il terreno pro- duce fromento a dovizie (b). In somma (c) V9lete leggere ad alta voce (or voce alta) o no ? Sicuro, C9mincero da capo. Dove debbo cominciare ? a capo di riga ? Sicuro (d). Mi chiamo da parte (h) e mi raccontb tutto sotto voce. La tratto alia bu9na (i) ci9e (j) corne vorrei ch'ella trattasse me. Usci diverse V9lte al buio (k) e di S9ppiatto,(l)ma coll' andar del tempo fu acchiappato. Guadagna piu vendendo all' in- gr9sso che vendendo a minuto. lo sto sempre alia larga (h) quando veggo barruffe. Egli si veste sempre alia nwda, per lo piu all'inglese. Fa sempre al r9vescio di quel che gli si dice. Egli va sempre a zonzo, sci9pe- rato. Invece di (m) li colle mani a cintola, venite ad aiutarmi. Vorrei rr^rire, piuttosto (n) che servire un tal tiranno. Inoltre, n9n agi bene. Forse arriveranno questa sera, ma non si sa per certo. A che ora arriva il treno ? crca saprei precisamente ; alle cinque. E C9si bravo che, per p9co che studiasse, farebbe facilmente il suo esame. They worked in such a manner that since then the soil has produced corn in abundance. In short, will you or will you not read louder ? Certainly, I shall begin over again. Where shall I begin from ? at the head of .the line ? Certainly. He called me aside and whis- pered to me all that had happened. I treat you without compli- ments, that is as I would like you to treat me. He went out several times in the dark and by stealth, but at length he was caught. He gains more by selling whole- sale than by retail. I always keep aloof when I see disturbances. H e always dresses in the fashion , generally in the English style. He always does the reverse of what he is told. He is always sauntering about, wasting his time. Instead of staying there idle, come and help me. I would sooner die than serve such a tyrant. Besides, he did not act well. Perhaps they will arrive this evening, but it is not certain. At what time does the train arrive ? I could not tell you exactly ; at about five o'clock. He is so clever that, if he studied ever so little, he would easily pass his examination. (a) Or per modo che. (b) Or a bizzeffe. (c) Or in fine, in breve. >(d) Or sicuramente, gia. (h) Or in disparte. (i) Or senza complimenti. (j) Or cioe a dire, vale a dire, (k) Or all'oscuro. (1) Or di nascosto. (m)Or in luogo di. (n) Or prima che, avanti che, innanzi che. 196 ON ADVERBS. REMARKS ON ONDE,"* " BENE," AND "PURE." 886. The adverb " Onde " is used especially in the higher style and in poetry instead of " di cui," "del quale," &c., "da cui," " dal quale," &c., "per cui," " pel quale," &c. Ex. " Di quei sospiri ond'io nutriva il C9re." (Petrarca). Of those sighs with which I nourished my heart. 887. " Onde " and " donde " have also the meaning of good reason for. Ex. " Oime, bene il conosco ed ho ben donde." (Tasso). Alas, I know him well and I have good reasons for it. 888. " Onde " has also the meaning of therefore. Ex. Si fa buio, onde e meglio andap- It is getting dark, therefore we sene. had better go. 889. " Onde " has also the meaning of in order to. Ex. Egli riparo qui, onde salvarsi. He repaired here, to save himself. 890. " Onde " has also the meaning of from whence. Ex. Onde venite, cosi tardi ? Whence do you come so late ? 891. " Bensi " (" bene si ") means it is true. Ex. Sempre mi prometteva benet It is true that he always pro- (or bensi) del danaro, ma non mises me money, but he never me ne dava mai. gives me any. 892. " Ben altro " means quite another matter. Ex. Ben altro udrai fra poco. You will soon hear more impor- tant news. 893. " Pure " is sometimes used for " solamente," only. Ex. Cio accadde n9n pure una V9lta, That happened not only once, ma cento. but a hundred times. 894. " Pure " is sometimes used to give strength to an expression. Ex. A che pur pensa ? What are you still thinking of ? Dite pure quel che volete. You may say what you like. 895. " E pure," or "eppure," means and yet. Ex. " E pur si m9ve ! " (Galileo). It moves though ! 896. " Ne pure," or " neppure " means not even. Ex. N9n avevo neppure un S9ldo. I had not even a half-penny. ,897. " Pur troppo " means alas too well, alas too true. Ex. E vero che Carlo e fuggito ? Is it true that Charles has fled ? Pur troppo! It is but too true ! * The word " onde," as a noun, means waves. 898. t " Bene" and "bensi" may be put before the verb. Ex. "Bene (or Bensi) mi prometteva sempre del danaro, ma," etc. ON ADVERBS. 197 899. SENTENCES CONTAINING ADVERBS OF QUANTITY. (To be learnt by heart.) Ho speso a bastanza (a) dana- I have spent enough money ; ro ; piu (b)di voi; non V9glio more than you; I will not spender di piu. spend any more. Studiano poco; meno (b) di They study little; less than we noi ; non piu di tre ore 9gni do ; not more than three hours giorno. a day. H9 veduto solamente (c) tre I have only seen three elephants elefanti in vita mia. in my life. Non avevo che (d) cento lire I had only a hundred pounds, sterline,eppurefuronoabba- and yet it was enough, stanza. Era alquanto (e) spiacente di He was somewhat displeased at n9n essere stato eletto, ma not having been elected, but non molto. not much. Fu quasi (f) ucciso in quella He was almost killed in that zuffa ; erano tre contr' uno. quarrel ; they were three to one. Xon penso guari, e p9i mi d9- He did not think much, and then mando un p9co (g) di danaro asked me for a little money as in prestito. a loan. V erano molti soldati alia Were there many soldiers at the rivista ? A un dipresso (h) review ? About twenty thou- ventimila. sand. EXERCISE LXXIX. At what o'clock must they depart ? At half past seven. Then, I shall la}^ the cloth at once. The dinner will be ready in half an hour. Walk slowly, my daughter, I have a pain in my foot ; I cannot walk quickly. Do what I tell you, otherwise I shall dismiss you. Do you speak in earnest ? Certainly. Why did you break my penknife ? I did not do it (209) on purpose ; it was a mere accident. I tell you frankly that you ought to apologise to him, at once. He started up suddenly (885, o) and gave Francis a fearful blow. The most beautiful flowers last but (802) a short time. The compass was not invented (799) by a mariner, nor (800) the telescope by an astronomer, nor the microscope by a philo- sopher, nor printing by a man of letters, nor gunpowder by a soldier. The loadstone always points towards the north. (a) Or a sufficienza. (c) Or soltanto. (e) Or un tantino. (b) The adverbs " piu " and (d) When only means but, (f) Or presso che. " meno " are the com- it is translated into (g) " Poco " is the only ad- parati ve forms of "mol- Italian by "non verb followed by "di." to " and " poco." (verb) che." (h) Or presso a poco. io8 ON PREPOSITIONS. LESSON XXXIX. ON PREPOSITIONS. 900. THE PRINCIPAL PREPOSITIONS ARE : Di, of. Accanto a, beside. A, In, to, at. in within. Vicino a,* Presso a, [ near. for, through, in order to. Intorno a, D'intorno a, about, - around, Con, with. Attorno a, near. Fra, or tra, Infra, or intra, In mezzo a, - between. Lontano da, :;: Lungi da, Lungo, - far. t along, Entro, j Lunghesso, | alongside. Su, or Sopra, - on, upon. Stante, Secondo, - according to. Sotto, under, A seconda di, Di sotto di, underneath. Durante, during. Dentro, Di dentro di, , in, within. Eccetto, Salvo, r except. Fuori di, Di fiwri di, outside. Mediante, Rispetto a, (by means of, concerning. Prima di, Tranne, excepting. Avanti di,* Senza, without. Davanti a, Innanzi di,* - before. Contro, Contra, r against. Dinanzi di, ; In vece di, instead of. Dietro a, Di dietro a, In faccia a, - behind. Oltre, Verso, Alia volta di, beyond. * towards. Rimpetto a, Di rimpetto a, Dopo, - opposite, after. Malgrado, N9n9stante, Ad onta di, in spite of, notwithstanding. " Avanti," " innanzi," " vicino," and " lontano " can also be used as adverbs. ON PREPOSITIONS. [99 THE PREPOSITION "DI," OF. 901. The preposition " di " is used to denote relation of pro- perty, affinity, and connection between one word and another. II padrone di questa casa. Una casa di campagna. II libro di mio fratello. La Divina Commedia di Dante. II regno di Spagna. II dvupmo di Milano. Un abito d'inverno. Questo signore e di Napoli. Ex. The master of this house. A country-house. My brother's book. Dante's Divine Comedy. The kingdom of Spain. The cathedral of Milan. A winter coat. This gentleman is from Naples. 902. The Preposition " di " is also used to connect two nouns when the second of them is the name of the material which the object indicated by the first noun is "made of," "full of," or "deals in." Ex. Un cappello di paglia. A straw hat. Un bicchiere di vino. A glass of wine. Mercanti di te. Tea merchants. 903. The Preposition " di " is also used after an adjective, or a past participle preceded by a verb, expressing any idea of rest, or state. Ex. II mio cavallo era coperto di My mio cavallo era cgperto fango. Egli era carico di onori. Ella e d9tata di b9nissimo in- gegno.' Parve contento di vedermi. Sono felice di proporle C9sa di tanta utilita. Mio padre mi ha promesso di condurmi a Milano. H9 dimenticato di mandare queste lettere alia p9sta. 904. The Preposition " di " is also used in the phrases : Viaggiar di giorno, >;; di n9tte, to travel by day, by night. Vivere di frutti, di legumi, &c., to live on fruit, on vegetables, d horse was covered with mud. He was loaded with honours. She is endowed with very great intelligence. He appeared pleased at seeing me. I am happy to propose to you a thing so useful. My father has promised to take me to Milan. I have forgotten to send these letters to the post. That is to say " in tempo di giorno." 20O ON PREPOSITIONS. THE PREPOSITION "A" TO, AT. 905. The preposition " a " is used to indicate the end or object to which the action of the verb is directed. Ex. Ho parlato a Carlo. I have spoken to Charles. Vado sovente a Parigi. I often go to Paris. 906. The preposition " a " is also used to denote a state. Ex. Mia sorella e a scuola. My sister is at school. Mio padre e a casa di Paolo. My father is at Paul's. Mio fratello e ancora a Venezia. My brother is still in Venice. 907. The preposition " a " is also used to connect two nouns, the first of which denotes the means by which the object expressed by the first noun acts. Ex. Un battello a vapore. A steam-boat. Un mulino a vento. A windmill. Un bastimento a vela. A sailing-vessel. 908. The preposition " a " is also used to indicate the form in which an object is made. Ex. Un abito a coda di rondine. A swallow'-tail coat. 909. The preposition " a " is also used in the sense of " with." Ex. Un campo a Iupp9li. A hop-field. Un cappello a larghe falde. A hat with a broad brim. Lucia portava un bel busto di Lucy wore a pretty bodice of broccato a fiori. flowered brocade. 910. The preposition " a " is also used in the following phrases : Tagliare a fette. To cut in slices. Stare a bocca aperta. To remain open-mouthed. Stare a occhi bassi. To remain with downcast e} : ,. Cantare a meraviglia. To sing wonderfully well. Darsi a conoscere. To make one's-seif known. M9rire a centinaia. To die by hundreds. Andare a due a due, &c. To go two by two, &c. Un cannone carico a mitraglia.* A cannon loaded with grapeshot. * Besides the phrases given above, the preposition " a " is used in the verbal expressions " andare a gara," to vie, "stare a galla," to float, " tener a bada," (o trifle with, &c. , which have been already given. ON PREPOSITIONS. 2OI 91 1. The preposition " a " is also used in the adverbial expres- sions "alia francese," in the French fashion, " alia rinfusa," in a confu- sion, &c., already given, rule 885. 912. The preposition "a" is also used before a verb in the Infinitive mood, preceded by another verb expressing motion. Ex. Venga a trovarmi domani. Come to see me to-morrow. Andate ad impostare queste Go to post these letters. lettere. Venga a pranzo con me. Come and" dine with me. THE PREPOSITION "DA," FROM, BY, &>c. 913. The preposition " da " is used in the sense of " from." Ex. Arrival ieri da Vienna. I arrived yesterday from Vienna. H9 ricevuto regali da lui. I have received presents from him. Rafaello da Urbino mori Raphael (from) Urbino died at all' eta di trentasette anni. the age of thirty-seven. Rimase prigioniero da maggio He remained a prisoner from fino a novembre. May to November. 914. The preposition "da " is also used in the sense of " by," " near," " in the direction of," " through." Ex. Andando a Costantinopoli In going to Constantinople I passai da Atene. passed by Athens. Nell' andare a scwla passai da In going to school I went through Strada della Croce. Cross Street. 915. The preposition " da " is also used in the sense of "by" when preceded by a past participle. Ex. Egli e stimato da tutti. He is esteemed by everybody. Ho comprato un bellissimo I have bought a beautiful picture quadro dipinto da Landseer. painted by Landseer. 916. The preposition " da " sometimes means "by myself," " by my own will," &c., " by yourself," " by your own will," &c. Ex. L'ha fatto da se. He did it by himself. Da me non venni. I did not come by my own will. * As already stated, the preposition " a" is used in Italian instead of the EnglisL conjunction and, after a verb expressing motion. Ex. Andate a prendermi il mio cappello. Go and fetch my hat. 202 ON PREPOSITIONS. 917. The preposition " da "* is also used to connect two nouns, the first of which expresses the use or destination of the second. Ex. Carta da scrivere. Writing paper. Una bottiglia da vino. A wine bottle. Una veste da camera. A dressing-gown. Un istrumento da fiato. A wind instrument. Un cavallo da corsa. A race-horse. 918. The preposition " da " is also used in the sense of " to," " towards." Ex. Ecco la i vostri amici, andate There are your friends, go to da loro. them. 919. The preposition " da " is also used in the sense of " at the house of." :;: Ex. Passerb da Lei domani, o pos- I will call on you to-morrow, or domani. the day after to-morrow. 920. The preposition " da " is also used in the sense of " where- with." Ex. Questo povero vecchio n9n ha This poor old man has nothing da mangiare. to eat. Datemi da scrivere; V9glio scri- Give me something to write vere a mio fratello. with ; I want to write to my brother. 921. The preposition "da" is also used in the sense of " fit for." Ex. Vi assicuro che non e cosa da I assure you it is no laughing ridere. matter. Mi ha fatto un azione da He played me a knavish trick. mariuolo. 922. The preposition "da" is also used in the sense of "like a." Ex. Egli combatte da eroe, e n^ri He fought like a hero, and died da Cristiano. like a Christian. L' h9 sempre trattato da amico. I always treated him as a friend. Vi parlo da padrone, e voi I speak to you as a master, and dovreste ubbidirmi da servo. you should obey me as a ser- vant. 923. The preposition "da" is also used in the sense of " on." Ex. Da una parte c' era un bel On one side there was a pretty praticello, dall' altra un vi- little meadow, on the other a gneto. vineyard. 924. * The expressions " da me," " da te," &c., must not be used instead of " a casamia," &c., when ambiguity may be incurred ; for instance, I am going home, must be translated by " vado a casa," and not " vado da me." ON PREPOSITIONS. 203 THE PREPOSITION " IN," IN, INTO. 925. The Italian preposition "in" has generally the same mean- ing as the English preposition in, into. Ex. Sua moglie e in Swizzera. His wife is in Switzerland. L'ho tradotto in francese. I translated it into French. 926. In Italian the preposition " in " does not require the definite article after it in sentences like the following : Era in giardino con Gi9vanni. He was in the garden with John, jSton vado mai in cucina. I never go into the kitchen. Carlo e in cantina a mettere Charles is in the cellar bottling vino in bottiglia. some wine. Aveva un bastone in mano. He had a stick in his hand. Essi discutono in istrada. They are discussing in the street. 927. In sentences like the following the preposition " in '"' is not translated literally into English : Non posso stare in piedi. I cannot stand on my feet. Tien e il cappello in testa. He keeps his hat on his head. Aveva in dito un anello d'oro. He had a gold ring on his finger. II pranzo era gia in tav9la. The dinner was already served. Lingua toscana in bocca The Tuscan language as it is romana. spoken by the Romans. Mi piace molto andare in I am very fond of rowing on the barca. river. Va in chiesa ogni d9menica. She goes to church every Sunday. Ando in Austria un mese fa. He went to Austria a month ago. Scrivero la mia lettera in It will take me an hour to write un'ora. my letter. THE PREPOSITION "PER," FOR, THROUGH, IN ORDER TO. 928. The preposition " per " is also used in the sense of " for." Ex. L'h9 dipinto apposta per Lei. I painted it on purpose for you. 929. The preposition "per" is also used in the sense of "in order to." Ex. Ritornero presto per compia- I will return soon to please you. cervi. 930. The preposition " per "* is also used in the sense of because, on account of. Ex. Fu espulso per aver osato He was expelled because he mettere in caricatura il suo caricatured his master, maestro. "" In this case "per " is used instead of " per causa di," because, on account of. 204 ON PREPOSITIONS. 931. The preposition "per" is also used in the expressions " per uno," each, and " per tempo," early. Ex. Ricevettero uno scellino per They received a shilling each, uno, perche vennero per because they came early. . 932. The prepositions " su per" are used together to express graphically an upward progress. Ex. Andammo su per la C9llina. We went up the hill. THE PREPOSITION "CON," WITH. 933. The preposition " con " has generally the same meaning as the English preposition with. Ex. Oggih9pranzatoconunvecchio To-day I dined with an old amico di scu9la. schoolfellow. Dipingo sempre con colori fran- I always paint with French cesi. colours. "FRA," AND "TRA," BETWEEN, AMONGST. 934. " Fra " and " tra," besides meaning "between," " amongst," " in the midst of," are used in the sense of " after the space of," " hence." Ex. Scrivero la mia lettera fra un' I shall write my letter in an hour ora. (in an hour hence). Carlo ritornera fra (or da qui a) Charles will return in two due mesi. months (two months hence). 935. " Parlare tra se" means to speak to one's self. Ex. Egli S9leva passeggiar soletto e He used to walk alone speaking parlare tra se ad alta voce. aloud to himself. THE PREPOSITIONS " SU," " SOPRA," "SOVRA," !: ON, UPON. 936. The prepositions " su," and " sopra," have generally the same meaning and are used in the same way as the English pre- position on, upon. In the following sentences, however, " su " and " sopra " are translated by other prepositions than on or upon : Egli abitava una villa a venti He inhabited a villa twenty miglia sopra Firenze. miles beyond Florence. Partimmo in sull' alba, e ritorn- We started at break of day, and ammo sulla sera. returned at dusk. Ordinarono un grandissimo They organized a very numerous esercito per andare sopra i army to go against the enemy. nemici. (Boccaccio). * The other prepositions given on page 198 do not require any explanation. ON THE COMPLEMENTS OF VERBS. 2O5 LESSON XL. ON THE COMPLEMENTS OF VERBS. One of the most difficult things for English people learning Italian, is the proper use of the complements of verbs, that is to say, the proper use of the prepositions which ought to follow verbs to complete their meaning. In some cases the English and Italian languages agree on this point, but in many instances there is a remarkable difference between them, as will be shown in the seven following exercises. 937. VERBS WHICH DO NOT REQUIRE ANY PREPOSITION IN ITALIAN, ALTHOUGH THEY REQUIRE ONE AFTER THEM IN ENGLISH. EXERCISE LXXX. Do not listen to (a) him ; if he begins to* talk, he will not stop all day. I am waiting for (b) (251) my brother. I have been looking (714) for (c) some red ink this half hour. I have bought (to buy for) (d) these steel pens for sixpence a dozen. Charles is well acquainted with (e) our affairs. We look upon (f) him as your best friend. She wished for (g) her mother's return. He puts off (h) his decision from (di) day to day ; I do not like that (608). I have asked (to ask for) (i) him for some matchesf several times (602). They were (695) ignorant of (j) what we intended to do. I never met with (I have never met with) (k) a man so witty. Martial music inspires (inspire with) (1) soldiers with courage and confidence. She set off (m) yesterday morning by (per) the first train. I cannot bear with (n) his nonsense any longer (817). He sold (to sell for) (o) his house for two hundred pounds (656). (a) Ascoltare. (b) Aspettare. (c) Cercare. (d) Comprare. (e) ConOscere. (f) Considerare. (g) Desiderate, (h) Differire. (i) Dpmandare a. (j) Ignorare. (k) Incontrare. (1) Inspirare a. (m)Partire. (n) Soffrire. (o) Vendere. 938. * The expressions to begin to, to set about to, are rendered in Italian by " Mettersi a," " Cominciare a." 939. t Match, "zolfanello." Match (in artillery), " miccia.'' Match (marriage), " matrimonio." To match, "assortire." 206 ON THE COMPLEMENTS OF VERBS. 940. VERBS WHICH DO NOT REQUIRE ANY PREPOSITION IN ENGLISH, ALTHOUGH THEY REQUIRE ONE AFTER THEM IN ITALIAN. EXERCISE LXXXI. He wants (a) money to (225) furnish his house. He was told to mind (b) the horses while we were dining. They mocked (c) him, because he was poor. I ordered (d) him to leave the house, but he would not. I distrust (e) him. They displease (f) every- body. You will be punished, because you disobeyed (707) (g) your father. We asked (h) him to take (459) us to the opera. She doubted (i) the truth of his assertion. Every time (636) he entered (j) (697) the drawing-room, he bowed to the company. For many years we enjoyed (k) (704) the advantages of his friendship. She taught us (707) (1) the art of painting upon china. She understands (m) the fine arts. He would not hurt (n) my reputation. EXERCISE LXXXH. He was punished, because he would not obey (o) the king's order. I am sure (636) she will never pardon him for (p) (184) having broken her (562) watch. They permitted (q) him to make sketches of the castle. I persuaded (r) him to buy the pictures. It pleased (s) them to make me a (360) present of this pencil-case. He resisted (t) all the entreaties of his poor parents. Those who are not able to resist (t) temptations, ought (791) to avoid them. He had to (790) renounce (u) his bad companions. They used (707) (v) cement for the foundation of that building. I am sure that he will outlive (w) his nephew. He slanders (x) everybody. He ordered (d) the waiter to bring him a glass of wine, and a bottle of soda-water. The rivulet entered (j) a dark cavern on the western side of the hill. (a) Abbisognare di. (i) Dubitare di. (q) Permettere a...di. (b) Aver cura di. (j) Entrare in. (r) Persuadere a...di. (c) Burlarsi di. (k) Godere di. (s) Piacere a. (d) Coinmandarea...di. (1) Insegnare a. (t) Resist ere a. (e) Diffidarsi di. (m)Intendersi di. (u) Rinunciare a. (0 Dispiacere a. (n) NuOcere a. (v) Servirsi di. (g) Disubbidire a. . (o) Obbedire a. (w) Sopravvivere a. {h) Domandare a...di. (p) Perdonare a...di (x) Sparlare di. ON THE COMPLEMENTS OF VERBS. 941. VERBS WHICH REQUIRE ONE PREPOSITION IN ITALIAN, AND A DIFFERENT ONE IN ENGLISH. EXERCISE LXXXIII. The garden was embellished with (a) beautiful marble statues. This country abounds with (b) corn. His sword was adorned with (c) jewels. He grieved at (d) the loss of his property. He was satisfied with (e) (696) the little he had earned. They were burn- ing with (f) indignation. When his deceit was (768) discovered, he blushed with (g) shame. I blame him for (h) having fled (685). The ship was laden with (i) provisions for the besieged fortress. All the guns were loaded with (j) balls. They loaded him with (k) kindness. He could (767, 695) not be consoled for (1) the loss of his child. They all agree (842 / g) that it is a poem to be (921) greatly admired. EXERCISE LXXXIV. They couid (704) not agree about (m) the price. All the furni- ture was (696) covered with (n) dust. I took possession of the room destined for (o) me. Everything depends upon (p) what he is going to say. He parted with (q) (704) his vicious horse as soon as he could. He was (702) endowed with (r) the finest (518) gifts that nature can give. They had filled (with) (s) the rooms with the old furniture they had taken from the castle. He was pre- sented with (t) a beautiful gold watch (346). I congratulated him upon (u) the success he has obtained. He glories in (v) the mischief he does. She wore a beautiful white satin dress trimmed with (w) pearls. He seized upon (x) our goods. (a) Abbellire di.* (i) Caricare di. (q) Disfarsi di. (b) Abbondare cii. (j) Caricare a. (r) Dotare di. (c) Adornare di. (k) Colmare di. (s) Empire di.* (d) Affliggersi di. (1) Consolare di. (t) Far regalo a...di. (e) Appagarsi di. (m) Convenire di.+ (u) Felicitare di. (f) Ardere di. (n) Coprire di.J (v) Glorificarsi di. (g) Arrossire di. * (o) Destinare a. (w) Guarnire di.* (h) Biasimare di. (p) Dipendere da. (x) Impadronirsi di.* * This verb is conjugated like " Finire." 942. t " Convenire " (irregular) besides the above meaning of to agree on, or about, and the mean- ing of to be obliged, or compelled, explained in rule 136, it has also the meaning of to meet by appoint- ment. Ex. Convennero nel Teatro della Scala. They met in the Teatro della Scala. } This verb is conjugated like " Serv're." 2O8 ON THE COMPLEMENTS OF VERBS. 943. VERBS WHICH REQUIRE ONE PREPOSITION IN ITALIAN, AND A DIFFERENT ONE IN ENGLISH. EXERCISE LXXXV. He was inflamed with (a) rage, on hearing (686) the losses he had sustained. .He inquired about (b) the state of the country. The table was (696) covered with (c) books and papers. He fell in love with (d) my cousin. He languished from (703) (e) hunger for (311) three days, and then died. He praised them for (f) their honesty. She wondered at (g) the sudden return of my brother. He was threatened with (h) (767) death if he would not confess the truth. He meddles with (i) everybody's business. His mind was stored with (j) useful knowledge. The theft was concealed a long time from (k) everybody. He was fed on (1) (703) fish and fruit for three weeks. They were oppressed with (m) taxes. I shall call upon (n) you this evening. EXERCISE LXXXVI. What were you thinking of (o) when I met you ? They wept for (p) joy when they heard that their father had arrived. They profited by (q) the ruin of their friend. He was punished for (r) the crime he had committed. They were speaking about (of) politics (419) till midnight. They rejoiced at (s) the good news. He laughed at (t) the misfortune of my brother. He returned thanks for (u) the favour he had received. He will have (790) to answer for (v) his bad conduct. They were surfeited with (w) food. In consequence of his behaviour at the last election he has (is) decreased in (x) popularity. He used (697) to take (y) the money from his sister. He triumphed over (z) his enemies at last. He lives upon (aa) a pension granted to him by the king. (a) Infiammare di. (j) Munire di.* (s) Rallegrarsi di. (b) Informarsi di. (k) Nascondere a. (t) Ridersi di. (c) Ingombrare di. (1) Nutrire di. (u) Ringraziare di. (d) Innamorarsi di. (m) Opprimere di. (v) Rispondere di. (e) Languire di.* (n) Passare da. (w) Satollarsi di. (0 Lodare di. (o) Pensare a. (x) Scemare di. (g) Maravigliarsi di. (p) Piangere di. (y) Togliere a. (h) Minacciare di. (q) Profittare di. (z) Trionfare di. (i) Ingerirsi in.* (r) Punire di.* (aa)Vivere di. This verb is conjugated like " Finire." ON CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. LESSON XLI. ON CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. i. ON CONJUNCTIONS. 944. The Italian conjunctions are followed by verbs either in the Indicative, the Subjunctive, or the Infinitive Mood. 945. THE FOLLOWING CONJUNCTIONS GOVERN THE VERB IN THE INDICATIVE Moon. and. and yet. or. E, E pure, eppure,* O, O o, ) Ovvero...ovvero, [either... or. Ossia...ossia, I Non (verb) ne...ne, neither... nor. Ma, Pero, Pertanto, Perche, Perocche, Perciocche, Conciossiache, Poiche, Giacche, Stanteche, Quindi, Laonde, Cos I, Anzi, Che dico, Di piu, Inokre, D' altronde, Oltracche, Oltraccio, but. 1 u f however. J because, since, in as much as. [therefore. 1 nav > niore, Pure, Tuttavia, Tuttavolta, Nonostante, Nondimeno, Nulladimeno, Ciononpertanto, Con tutto cio, Anche, Altresi, Eziandio, In fine, In somma, Se non che, Salvo che, Eccetto che, Tranne che, Secondo che, yet, .for all that, nevertheless. also, moreover. in fact. -except that, according as. Cioe a dire, [that is to say. Vale a dire, /on the contrary. Stante, referring to. ^P -v , fso much the 1 anto piu che, < [ more so that. besides. Quand' e cosi, in that case. Quand' ecco, when, behold. Ecco perche, that is why. 946. The conjunction "anzi" is very expressive, it means on the contrary, further, nay, rather. Ex. Egli venne a vederci, anzi He came to see us, nay more, pranzb con noi. he dined with us. " Anzi impediva tanto '1 mio cammino." (Dante). Nay, rather did impede so much my way. * " E pure " has been illustrated in rule 894. 210 ON CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 947. NOTE. As the Conjunctions which govern verbs in the Subjunctive Mood were given in rule 730 (page 162) and rule 740 (page 164), they will not be repeated here. 948. THE FOLLOWING CONJUNCTIONS GOVERN THE VERB IN THE INFINITIVE MOOD : A fine di, Avanti di A condizione di, Con patto di, in order to. before. Qn condition of> Per tema di, 1 r , Per paura di, f for fear of ' A meno di, unless. Lungi dal, far from. 2. ON INTERJECTIONS. 949. Besides the interjections ah ! 9h ! which in Italian, as in most languages, indicate almost any sudden emotion of the mind, the following are the principal Italian interjections : 950. ADMIRATION. Buono! Capperi! Affe ! Bene! Bravo! Bis! Viva ! Evviva ! good! I say ! well done! encore ! hurrah ! 951. ENCOURAGEMENT. Su ! Via ! Suvvia ! come now ! Animo ! C9raggio ! courage ! 952. ENTREATY. Deh ! Di grazia ! pray ! MercS ! mercy ! 953- WARNING. Guai a voi ! woe to you ! Badate ! take care ! Piano! Adagio! softly! 954. GRIEF AND SURPRISE. Ahi! Ahi lasso! ay! oh dear! Aime! Oime! oh me! Lasso! Lasso me! alas! Che peccato ! what a pity ! Povero me! poor me! O cielo! O heavens! 955. AVERSION AND INDIGNATION. Ma che! nonsense! Le zucche ! twice ! not I ! Via! Oibo! pshaw! fie! Vergogna ! for shame ! 956. CALLING AND SILENCING. Ehi! Ola! St! oh hey! st! Silenzio ! silence ! Zitto ! Cheto ! hush ! be still ! Basta! Bastacosi! enough! 957. * The interjection "Q...1 " is only used, before a noun, in the lofty style : it expresses different emotions of the mind. Ex. O crudel destino ! O cruel destiny ! O patria mia ! O my country ! ON PREPOSITIONS, INTERJECTIONS, ETC. 211 EXERCISE LXXXVII. The eagle rises above the clouds. The wise man acts according to (900) the dictates of reason. He has gone to America in spite of (goo) the advice of his best friends. The fleet cannot sail on account of (930) contrary winds. On (298) that occasion he acted like a (925) hero. You were playing, instead of (900) studying. When I went out, I saw :;: her leaning against the window. Here is Mrs. Pettegola ; she comes to propose an arrangement between us two. What a bore ! Why does she not mind her own affairs ; she has nothing to do with this matter. f Margaret wrote me a linej the day before yesterday, informing me of her intended de- parture for Venice, in a week (549), or ten days. EXERCISE LXXXVIII. "About that time I walked out into the fields towards Bow. Here I met a poor man walking on the bank of the river." " On the fifteenth of May they were ten miles from Pekin. They had nowj| been travelling for six months." The immediate loss of Constantinople may be ascribed (771) to the bullet, or arrow, which pierced the gauntlet of John Giustiniani. " Into the ecclesiastic federation our Saxon ancestors were admitted. *i A regular communication was opened between our shores and that part of Europe in which the traces of ancient power and policy were yet discernible." Courage ! (951) soldiers, fear nothing (672). For shame ! (955) said he, to insult a poor old man. Softly (953), do not fly into a passion. Pray ! (952) do not make such a noise. We have arrived at the end of the grammar. Hurrah ! 958. * After the verbs " vedere," to see, and "scorgere," to perceive, the Past Participle is employed to describe a person or thing in a state. Ex. L'ho veduta appoggiata alia finestra. I saw her leaning against the window. 959. t The expressions to concern, to have something to do with the matter, are translated into Italian by the verb "entrare" and the adverb " ci," thus: " Io c'entro," " tu c'entri," " egli c'entra," "noi c'entriamo," &c. It concerns me, &*c. 960. J A line in writing is translated by " una riga ; " a line made with a pencil, or a pen, by " una linea ; " and a line of poetry, by " un verso." 961. When here is used in English instead of there, it must be translated into Italian by "la," there. 962. || When now is used in English instead of then, it must be translated into Italian by " allora/' then. 963. ^j In a case like this, when, in English there are several sentences contain- ing verbs in the passive form, in Italian, each sentence should be given a different turn. In this particular case the first phrase should be translated as if it was, " Our Saxon ancestors were admitted into," &c. The second should be translated as if it was, "One opened (or established) a regular communication," &c. The third must be translated so as to introduce "si," followed by the verb in the singular, or plural, according to rule 771. 212 TRANSPOSITION OF WORDS IN ITALIAN SENTENCES. TRANSPOSITION OF WORDS IN ITALIAN SENTENCES. 964. In Italian poetry, words are constantly transposed so as to add force, and impart harmony to the verses, but in modern Italian prose the words in sentences preserve, as a rule, the most simple and direct order, and are arranged in accordance with the rules explained in this grammar.* In some cases, however, clear- ness, force, and fluency of diction are obtained by inverting the order of words. f The following examples may be interesting and instructive to the student : I. " Salirono la scala Don Michele e Etoscherino, e vennero alia camera dov'era il duca," (D'AzEGLio) instead of " Don Michele e Itoscherino salirono la scala, &c.," Don Michele andBoscherino mounted the stairs, and entered the room where the duke was. II. " Ventitre o ventiquattro giorni stettero i n9stri fuggitivi nel castello, in mezzo a un movimento continue," (MANZONI) instead of " I n9stri fuggitivi stettero nel castello ventitre o ventiquattro giorni, in mezzo a un movimento continue, " Our fugitives remained twenty-three or twenty -four days in the castle, in the midst of a general movement. III. " Egli solo delle V9stre ragioni e della mia fede potra esser giudice," (MONTI) instead of " Egli solo p9tra esser giudice, &c.," He alone can be the judge of your reasons, and of my fidelity. IV. " Alle premure reiterate ed autorevoli, Caterina rispose sempre con un rifiuto," (TOMMASEO) instead of " Caterina rispose sempre con un rifiuto alle premure reiterate ed autorevoli," Catherine always answered with a refusal to the often repeated and authori- tative entreaties. V. " Ma a nessuno (dei forni) la gente accorse in numero tale da p9ter intraprender tutto," (MANZONI) instead of " Ma la gente n9n accorse a nessuno, &c.," But to none (of the bakers' shops) did the people rush in sufficient numbers tj be able to undertake everything. VI. " Fin qui pub cOPrere il mio servigio," (MONTI) instead of " II mio servigio puo correre fin qui," Thus far my services may extend. VII. " La fantasia si rifugio fredda nella mia men^ria," (FoscoLo) instead of " La fredda fantasia si rifugio nella mia mem9ria," My fancy (imagination] shrank cold into my memory. * In Manzoni's celebrated novel " I Promessi Sposi," which is the best written book in modern Italian, upwards of ninety sentences out of every hundred are written in direct syntax, entirely in harmony with modern thoughts and feelings. t This matter belongs rather to rhetoric than to grammar, nevertheless it may be acceptable not to leave it wholly unnoticed here. IDIOMS AND SAYINGS. 213 IDIOMS AND SAYINGS. Non vrggo 1' ora di parlargli. Costui e nato vestito. 9- 10. ii. 12. J3- 14. J 5- 16. Egli vuol salvar la capra e i Sfido 19! sa ben condurre la sua barca. Oramai siamo a buon porto. N9n si puo fare un buco nell' acqua. Questo ragazzo ha il ciwre in bocca. Suo fratello n9n ha sale in zucca. Gli e venuto il grillo di viag- giare. E come p9rtar acqua al rnare. Egli ha perduto la tramon- tana (or la bussola). Ei cerca sempre il pelo nell' 9vo. Costui si compra brighe a denari contanti. Parlate sul serio o per ischerzo ? Fare un viaggio e due servizi. Questo c'entra come il cav9lo a merenda. I long to speak to him. That fellow was born with a silver spoon in his mouth. He wants to run with the hare and hunt with the hounds. I rather think so ; he can pad- dle his own canoe. We are now out of danger. There's no washing the black- a-moor white. This boy is very sincere. His brother is weak-minded. He has taken a fancy to travel. It is like carrying coals to New- castle. He is quite bewildered (or at his wit's end). He is always very particular. This man wants to get into trouble. Do you speak in earnest or in jest? To kill two birds with one stone. This is entirely beside the ques- tion. LITERAL TRANSLATION. 1. I do not see the hour of speaking to him. 2. That fellow was born dressed. 3. He wishes to save the goat and the cabbages. 4. I challenge (any one to do better) ; he knows how to steer his boat. 5. Now we are in a good harbour. 6. One cannot make a hole in the water. 7. This boy has his heart in his mouth. 8. His brother has no salt in his pump- kin (head). 9. The grasshopper (whim) has come to him to travel. 11. He has lost the point marking north (or the mariner's compass). 12. He always looks for a hair in the egg. 13. This man buys troubles with cash. 1 6. This enters in it like the cabbage in a picnic. 2I 4 IDIOMS AND SAYINGS. IDIOMS AND SAYINGS. 1. Ma sapete che ne va la vita ? 2. Colui fa la gatta morta, ma e molto astuto. 3. Promette mari e monti, per tenermi a bocca dolce. 4. Egli viwl vendere lucciole per lanterne. 5. N9n p9sso trovare il bandolo della matassa. 6. I paper! vogliono menar a her le oche. 7. Carnminavano a braccetto. 8. Non so cosa. abbia nome. 9. La mia finestra da sur un belli ssimo giardino. 10. La co Hera ha la meglio della sua ragione. 11. Non li posso S9ffrire perche lavorano sempre sott'ac- qua. 72. Essa rende sempre pane per focaccia. 13. II b9sco si estende oltre il tiro dell'9cchio. 14. Egli s'intende di libri. 15. Ma perche la prende con me ? 16. Auguro a tutti felicissime feste e buon capo d' anno. But do you know that life is at stake ? That fellow looks as if butter would not melt in his mouth, but he is very astute. He is very prodigal of promises with me, in order to keep me quiet. He wants to make one believe that the moon is made of green cheese. I cannot find the proper way. The goslings try to teach the ganders how to swim. They were walking arm-in-arm. I don't know what his name is. My window looks upon a beau- tiful garden. Passion prevails over his reason. I cannot bear them because they always act in an underhand manner. She always gives tit for tat. The wood extends further than the eye can see. He is a good judge of books. Why do you find fault with me ? I wish you all a merry Christmas and a happy new year. LITERAL TRANSLATION. 1. But do you know that for it goes life (life is risked). 2. That fellow shams the dead cat, but he is very astute. 3. He promises seas and mountains to keep my mouth sweet. 4. He wishes to sell glow-worms for lan- terns. 5. I cannot find the end of the skein. 6. The goslings wish to lead the ganders to drink. 10. Anger has the better over his reason 11. "Sott'acqua" literally means under water. 12. She always gives bread for bun. 13. The wood extends beyond the reach of the eye. 14. He understands books. 15. But why do you take (up) the matter. with me ? 1 6. I wish to all very happy feasts, and a good head of the year. PROVERBS. 215 ITALIAN PROVERBS. i. Vblere, e potere. 10. ii. 12. 13. 14. 15. 1 6. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. manca A chi ha testa, cappello. Acqua cheta rovina i ponti. Batti il ferro quand' e caldo. Bixm principio e la meta dell' Opera. Chi e in difetto, e in sospetto. Chi la dura, la vince. Chi parla, semina, chi tace, racc9glie. Chi tr9ppo abbraccia, nulla stringe. Chi va piano, va sano. Dal detto al fatto vi e gran tratto. Dim mi con chi vai, e ti diro chi sei. E meglio piegare che rom- pere. Meglio e fringuello in man, che tordo in frasca. L'abito nn fa il monaco. La bell a gabbia non nutre 1'uccello. Oro n9n e tutto quel che ri- splende. ve r9sa senza spna. Pietra mossa n9n fa musco. Poverta n9n ha parenti. Patti chiari, amici cari. 22. La fine corona 1' opera. Where there's a will, there's a way. A good head is never in want of a hat. Still waters run deep. Make hay while the sun shines. Well begun is half-done. He that is in fault, is in suspicion. A mouse in time may cut a cable. The talker sows, the listener reaps. Grasp all, lose all. Slow and sure wins the race. Easier said than done. Birds of a feather flock together. Better bend than break. A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush. It is not the cowl that makes the friar. The fine cage won't feed the bird. All is not gold that glitters. No rose without a thorn. A rolling stone gathers no moss. Poverty has no kin. Short reckonings make long friends. All's well that ends well. LITERAL TRANSLATION. 2. He who has a (good) head, is never short of a hat. 3. Quiet water ruins bridges. 7. He who persists, conquers. 8. He who speaks, sows, he who listens, reaps. 9- He who embraces (grasps) too much, grasps nothing. 10. He who goes slow, goes safe. 11. From the said to the done there is a great distance. 12. Tell me whom you go with, and I will tell you who you are. 14. It is better a chaffinch in the hand, than a thrush on the branch. 21. Clear arrangements, dear friends. 2l6 ENGLISH-ITALIAN DIALOGUES. ENGLISH-ITALIAN DIALOGUES. (To be learnt by heart.) Good morning, how do you do ? Very well, thank you, madam, and how are you ? Pretty well ; I have had a slight cold in my chest, but I am better now. I am glad to see you well again. How is your brother ? He has been ill for some days ; he has to keep his room. I am very sorry for that ; I hope it is not anything serious. I do not think so ; it is only a slight illness. Pray take a seat ; you are not in a hurry, are you ? Oh no; I have nothing to do to-day, but to make a few calls. Then you had better stay and have luncheon with me. I do not usually take luncheon so early ; however to keep you company, I will eat a little. Let us go into the dining room. Pray be seated. May I offer you some oysters ? I will trouble you for a few. Allow me to pour you out a glass of white wine. Give me very little, I am not accustomed to drink wine. Will you take a mutton chop, or some fowl ? Thank you, I will take the wing or the leg of a fowl. Buon giorno, come sta?* Benissimo, signora, a' suoi co- mandi, e come sta lei ? Benino ; IK> avuto una lieve in- freddatura di petto, ma oggi stp meglio. G9do di vederla ristabilita in salute. Come sta il suo signer fratello ? Da qualche giorno e ammalato ; deve rimanere in camera. Me ne rincresce assai ; amo cre- dere che non sia cosa seria. Credo di no, la a una leggera in- disposizione. S'accomodi, la prego, non ha fretta, e vero ? Oh no ; non ho altra 9ccupa- zione 9ggi che da fare alcune visite. Quand' e C9si, fara meglio di rimanere a fare una seconda C9lazione con me. Non son solito di fare una seconda C9lazione C9si per tempo ; pero per farle com- pagnia, mangero un boccone. Andiamo nella sala da pranzo. Si segga qui, la prego. P9SSO offrirle delle ostriche ? Ne accettero qualcuna. Lasci che le mesca un bicchiere di vino bianco. Me ne dia ben p9co n9n 119 1'a- bitudine di ber vino. Preferisce una C9st9letta di ca- strato 9 del polio ? La ringrazio, mi favoriscaun' ala od una C9scia di polio. * These Dialogues are intended as a beginning to speak Italian. They are all in the third person singular, because, as explained in rule 120 (page 19), of this grammar, that is the mode of address between people not intimately acquainted, wishing to show respect to each other. ENGLISH-ITALIAN DIALOGUES. 217 Will you have any fruit ? No, thank you; I would rather have a small piece of cheese. Do you take tea or coffee ? I do not take either in the middle of the day. Well do as you like. Now if you like we will go out together. Very well, let us go. prendere un P9'di frutta ? N9, la ringrazio ; preferirei un bocconcino di formaggio (or cacio). Beve te o caffe ? N9n bevo ne dell'uno ne dell" altro durante la giornata. Ebbene faccia a suo genio. Adesso se vuole usciremo in- sieme. Benissimo, usciamo. Shall we go on foot or drive ? I should like to walk a little way, and then take a cab. We can do that. It is cold to-day, is it not ? Yes, it is rather cold, but the sky is clear. I prefer dry cold to damp un- healthy weather. So do I ; I hate rain, snow, and fog. I like when there is a hard frost, because I am very fond of skating. At what time must you be back to your hotel ? I should like to be in a little before dinner, so as to have time to dress. Then we had better take a cab. I say, cabman, are you engaged? No, sir. Very well, then ; drive us to 43, St. John's Street. Andremo a piedi 9 in vettura ? Amerei camminare un p9chino e p9i prendere un calessino. Ebbene si fara C9si. Fa freddo 9ggi, n9n e vero ? Anzi che n9, ma pero il cielo e sereno. Preferisco un freddo secco ad un tempo umido e malsano. Ed 19 pure ; detesto la pi9ggia, la neve e la neb'bia. Amo quando c' e ghiaccio sull' acqua, perche mi piace molto pattinare. A che ora deve ritornare al suo albergo ? M'aggradirebbe d'esser di ritor- no un p9'prima dell' ora del pranzo, per aver tempo di cambiar vestito. In questo caso sara meglio di prendere un cabri9let. Ehi ! C9cchiere siete impegnato ? N9, signore. Va bene ; guidate (p9rtateci) Via San Gi9vanni, No. 43. How well you speak Italian, Miss Field; have you studied it long ? I do not know exactly, I think about two years. Come parla bene 1' italiano, Signo- rina Field ; e molto tempo che lo studia ? me ne rammento precisa- mente ; da circa due anni. 218 ENGLISH-ITALIAN DIALOGUES. Have you ever been to Italy ? No, I have never been there. Really? I have been there three times, and yet I can- not speak Italian as correctly as you do. That is because you do not study it ; you cannot learn a foreign language without studying it. Have you taken many lessons ? Yes, I take two lessons regu- larly every week. Have you read many Italian books ? Yes ; I have read three novels, about half of the " Divina Commedia," also " Saul," by Alfieri, several comedies, and the lyrics of Le9pardi. Which is the most interesting of the Italian books you have read ? Dante, of course ; and of modern books, " I Promessi Sp9si " is the one I care most for. Do you intend to visit Italy ? Indeed I do; I intend to go there next spring. I wish you would allow me to accompany you. I shall be very pleased ; we will start together next March, if all goes well. -Very well, that is settled; goodbye. E ella mai stata in Italia ? No, n9n vi sono mai stata. Davvero ? 19 vi sono stata tre volte, eppure n9n 59 parlare italiano C9si C9rrettamente come lei. Cib e perche n9n lo studia ; n9n si pub imparare una lingua straniera senza studiarla sul serio. Ha prese molte lezioni ? Si, ho lezione reg9larmente due volte la settimana. Ha ella letti molti libri italiani ? Si ; h9 letto tre romanzi, la meta della " Divina Com- media," anche " il Saul," dell' Alfieri, parecchie comme- die, e le liriche del Le9pardi. Qual'e il piu interessante dei libri italiani che ha letti ? Dante, non 9ccorre dirlo ; e dei libri moderni preferisco " I Promessi Sp9i " a tutti gli altri. Ha 1' intenzione di veder 1' Italia? Altroche ! faccio i conti di an- darvi la primavera prossima. Vorrei ch'ella mi permettesse d' accompagnarvela. Ne saro contentissima ; partire- mo insieme il prossimo marzo, se n9n accad9n disgrazie. Benissimo, siamo d'acc9rdo; addio. Well, did you go to Mr. Well's concert, last night ? Yes, I did ; and I liked it very much. Were there many people ? Yes ; the place was crowded. Who were the performers ? Ebbene, andb ella al concerto del Signor Well, ieri sera ? Si, v'andai; e mi piacque assai. C'erano molte persone ? Si ; un vero f9rmic9laio. Chi vi si produsse? ENGLISH-ITALIAN DIALOGUES. 219 There were many artistes, but the most distinguished was the celebrated pianist Brook. Well, is the artiste really de- serving of his great reputa- tion ? Yes, I think so. He can draw from the piano the most exquisite sounds, and his execution is full of expression and grace. Did the performance consist of instrumental music only ? Oh no ; there was plenty of vocal music. Miss M9retti sang a beautiful duet with Mr. Barnott. What sort of voices have they ? Miss M9retti has a powerful and thrilling soprano voice, and she can make it very soft and melodious. Mr. Barnott has a fine tenor voice, I have heard him several times ; he is our best tenor. His voice is not very powerful, but it is clear and very sympathic. Was the orchestra well managed ? As well as it could be ; let it suffice to say that it was conducted by Mr. Warbling. I see that you are, like myself, passionately fond of music. I am indeed ; I think it the best recreation we can enjoy. C'erano molti virtuosi ; ma il piu distinto era il celebre pianista Brook. Or bene, questo virtuoso merita veramente la grande riputa- zione che gode ? Credo di si. Egli sa cavare dal pian9forte suoni tali che in- cantano, e la sua esecuzione e oltre nwdo espressiva e graziosa. Fu eseguita soltanto musica strumentale ? Oh no ; la musica vocale n9n venne dimenticata. La Signorina M9retti canto un bel duetto col Signer Barnotc. Che voce hanno ? La Signorina M9retti ha tma voce di S9prano, forte e vi- brata, e sa renderla dolcissima ed arm9niosa. II Signer Barnott ha una bellis- sima voce di tenore ; 1'ho sen- tito cantare parecchie V9lte, e il miglior tenore che abbiamo. La sua voce n9n e molto forte, ma e chiara e assai simpatica. Era ben condotta l'rchestra ? si p9teva meglio ; basti dire che ne era conduttore il Signer Warbling. Veggo che lei, al par di me, e amantissima della musica. Lo sono davvero ; credo che sia il miglior divertimento che ci sia dato di g9dere. What o'clockisit, Mr. Trench? It is a quarter past eight. Have you had your breakfast ? No ; I have only just got up. When do you take your meals ? Che ora e, Signer Trench ? Sono le 9tto e un quarto. Ha fatto C9lazione ? No ; mi sono appena alzato. A che ora fa i su9i pasti ? 22O ENGLISH-ITALIAN DIALOGUES. We breakfast at nine, luncheon at half past one, and dine at six o'clock. What are you going to do before breakfast ? I am going to write a letter to my uncle. Do you write with steel pens or quills ? I always write with steel pens, I am so accustomed to write with them that I can scarcely write with any others. Have you got a sheet of blot- ting paper to lend me ? Yes, here is some, but it is not of very good quality. To complete my obligation to you, sell me a postage-stamp. Here it is, I give it to you, but will not sell it to you. Waiter, run and take this letter to the post. Facciamo C9lazione alle n9ve, la seconda C9lazione a un'ora e mezzo, e pranziamo alle sei. Di che C9sa si 9ccupera prima di far C9lazione ? Voglio scrivere una lettera a mio zio. Scrive con penne metalliche, o con penne d' oca ? Scrivo sempre con penne metal- liche, ho tant'abitudine di ser- virmene, che con altre penne n9n so quasi piu scrivere. Avrebbe un f9glio di carta sugante da prestarmi ? Si ; ecc9gliene, ma non e di eccellente qualita. Perche le sia vieppiu 9bbligato, mi venda un francobollo. Ecc9gliene uno, glielo do, ma n9n V9glio venderglielo. Garzone, correte presto ad im- P9stare questa lettera. Do you draw, Miss Barretti ? Yes, a little ; I am only a be- ginner ; but I am very fond of it. Do you draw from copies or from nature ? As yet I only draw from copies, but I long to copy from nature. Have you been to the Royal Academy, this year ? Yes, I went there last Monday. Well, what do you think of it ? It is a very fine exhibition ; much more interesting than that of last year. Have you seen the New Gal- lery in Regent Street ? Yes, I have ; I think it ex- cellent. Ella disegna, Signorina Barretti ? Si, un p9chino ; sono una princi- piante sa ; ma mi piace tanto. Copia da modelli o dalla natura ? Finora C9pio soltanto da mo- delli ; ma n9n veggo 1' ora di poter ritrarre dalla natura. E ella stata a vedere I'esp9si- zione dei quadri all' Accademia Reale, quest' anno ? Si, v' andai lunedi scorso. Ebbene, che gliene pare ? E una bellissima esp9sizione ; molto piu interessante che quella dell' anno scorso. Ha visitata la Galleria Nuova nella strada del Reggente ? SI, 1'ho visitata ; mi pare eccel- lente. ENGLISH-ITALIAN DIALOGUES. 221 As you take an interest in art, allow me, Miss Barretti, to introduce to you an intimate friend of mine, Mr. Trivelli. How do you do, I am very happy to make your ac- quaintance. You are very kind. Is this the first time you have been in England ? No; I came here in 1891, to see the Naval Exhibition. How do you like England ? I like it very much, except the climate however, which at times is really very bad. Siccome ella si occupa di belle arti, mi permetta, Signorina Barretti, di presentarle un mio intimo amico, il Signer Trivelli. La riverisco, ho molto caro di fare la sua conoscenza. Ella e molto cortese. E questa la prima V9lta che viene in Inghilterra ? No; ci venni nel 1891, per ve- dere 1' Esp9sizione Navale. Come le piace 1' Inghilterra ? Mi piace moltissimo, ma n9n il clima, pero, che qualche volta e veramente cattivo. How happy I am to see you, Miss Vestri ; where have you been all this time ? I have been out of town with my family ; we have been to the sea-side. You look very well ; and how are you all ? We are all very well, thank you, except Mary ; she sprained her ankle, just be- fore we left Folkestone. Oh that is where you have been; it is a pretty place, is it not ? Beautiful ; the air is very good, and the place has not be- come common yet. I am very glad to hear that, because we ourselves intend to go there next month. Oh, if that is the case, you had better call on me one day next week, and then I will tell you all about the place. Very well, I will ; let us say on Thursday. Goodbye, for the present. Oh come sono lieta di vederla Signorina Vestri ; dov' e ella stata dacche non 1' ho veduta ? Sono stata fuori di citta con tutti i miei ; siamo stati ai bagni di mare. Che bella cera ha ; e come stanno tutti i suoi ? Stiamo tutti in ottima salute, la ringrazio, tranne Maria che si e stogato un piede, appunto quando si lasciava Folkestone. Oh sono stati la ; e un bel sito, n9n e vero ? Beliissimo; I'ariaesalubePrima, e quel paese n9n e ancora divenuto volgare. Son ben contenta d'udir cio, per- che noi abbiamo 1'intenzione d'andarvi il mese prossimo. Oh, quand' e cosi venga da me qualche giorno della settimana prossima, e allora le diro quanto mi sappia del Iu9go. Benissimo n9n manchero di ve- nirci ; sia deciso per gi9vedi. Per ora, Addio. 222 TITLES AND EXPRESSIONS USED IN ITALIAN LETTERS. TITLES AND EXPRESSIONS USED IN WRITING LETTERS IN ITALIAN. IN WRITING TO MINISTERS, (MINISTRI DI STATO) AMBASSADORS, (AMBA- SCIATORI) GENERALS, (GENERALI D'ARMATA) AND CHIEF MAGISTRATES : Commence Illustrissimo ed Eccellentissimo Signore, or Eccellenza. In the body Of the letter Illustrissimo ed Eccellentissimo Signore, or Vostra Eccellenza, Conclude Coi sensi del piu profondo ossequio sono Or Desiderando occasioni per poterle dar pi-ova della /ia dcvozione, ho Fonoredi protestarmi Or Pregandola di conservarmi la di Lei grazia, mi dico, Di Vostra Eccellenza, umilissimo e devotissimo servitore * AddreSS Aff ItttUtritSUlU ed Eccellentissimo Signore, il Signor, d~Y. IN WRITING TO MARQUESSES, (MARCHESI) COUNTS, (CONTI) BARONS, (BARONI), KNIGHTS OF ALL ORDERS, (CAVALIERI) AND JUDGES : COUJ mence Illustrissimo Signore. In the body Of the letter Illustrissimo Signore, or Vossignoria illitstrissima. Conclude Colla massima stima ho f 'onore di segnarmi Or Ossequiandola distintamente, ho F 'onore (f essere, Di Vossignoria illustrissima, umilissimo e devotissimo servo AddreSS AlP Illustrissimo Signore, il Signor Marchese, &*c. IN WRITING TO DOCTORS, (DOTTORI, MEDICI) PROFESSORS, (PROFESSORI) /.ND ESQUIRES (SIGNORI) : Commence Pregiatissimo, or Stimatissimo, or Ornatissimo Signore. In the body Of the lettQIPrtgiatt'ssimo, or Stimatissimo, or Ornatissimo Signore. Conclude Sono e sard sempre, con tutto F animo, suo devotissimo e, Stimatmo, Ortiafmo, Umil, Devmo, Obbl!g">, Sig. Sign, are written instead of Hliist'-issimo, Revcrtndissimo, Prcgiatissiino, Vossignoria, or Vostra Signoria, &c. ; but to write the title in full is an additional mark of respect. 224 A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION. A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION. Note. The translations of the words occurring in these extracts, not given in the foot notes, are to be found in the English-Italian Vocabulary, beginning at page 246 of this grammar. THE CONJUGATING DUTCHMAN.* Two Italian (468) gentlemen once stepped (entered) into a coffee-house in (di) Paris, where they observed a tall, odd-looking (a) man, who appeared not to be a native (b), sitting (seated) at one of the tables, and looking around with the most stone-like gravity of countenance upon every object (c). Soon after the two Italians had entered (832), one of them told the other that a cele- brated dwarf had arrived in (207) Paris. At this (d), the grave- looking personage above mentioned (e) opened his mouth (705) and said : " I arrive, thou arrivest, he arrives ; we arrive, you arrive, they arrive." The Italian, whose (625) remark (word) seemed to have sug- gested this mysterious speech, stepped up to (f) the stranger and asked, " Did you speak (do you speak) to me (210), sir ? " " I speak," replied the stranger, " thou speakest, he speaks ; we speak, you speak, they speak." " How is this ? " (g) said the Italian much astonished ; " do you mean (h) to insult me ? " The other replied, " I insult, thou insultest, he insults ; we insult, you insult, they insult." t * "L'Qlandese sma- ^l^J?S% t c n nioso di coniugare." (a) di strano aspetto. bilita. (h) " avreste 1' inten- (b) che pareva straniero. (d) All'udirci6. zione" (rule 119). A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 225 "This is too much ! " (a) said the enraged Italian. " I will have satisfaction ! (b). If you have any spirit with your rudeness (c), come along (come) with me." To this defiance the stranger replied, "I come, thou comest, he comes; we come, you come, they come;" and thereupon (d) he rose with great coolness (calm), and followed his challenger (e). In those days, when every gentleman wore (the) a sword, duels were speedily despatched (771) (f). They went into a neighbour- ing alley, and the Italian, unsheathing (834) his weapon, said to his antagonist, "Now, sir, you must fight me" (g). "I fight," replied the other, "thou fightest, he fights; we fight (here he made a thrust) (h), you fight, they fight" (and here he disarmed his antagonist). "Well," said the Italian, "you have the best of it (i), and I hope (868, 636) you are satisfied." "I am satisfied," said the original, "thou art satisfied, he is satisfied ; we are satisfied, you are satisfied, they are satisfied." " I am glad (836, j) everybody is satisfied," said the Italian ; " but pray leave off quizzing me (j) in this strange manner, and tell me what is your object, if you have any, in doing it " (k). The grave gentleman now, for the first time, became intelligible. "I am a (354) Dutchman," said he, "and am learning your language. I find it (763) very difficult to remember the peculiari- ties of the verbs; and my tutor has advised me, in order to fix them in my mind (1), to conjugate every Italian verb that I hear spoken (m). This I have made it a rule to do (n). I don't like to have my plans broken in upon (o) while they are in operation, or I would have told you this before." (a) " Cio e troppo." (b) "Me ne darete ra- gione." (c) " Se avete cuore che basti alia vostra rozzezza." (d) cost dicendo. (e) colui che 1'aveasfi- dato. (f ) si decidevano presto. 15 (g) " bisogna battersi in duello meco." (h) lancib una botta. (i) "mi do per vinto." (j) " non si faccia piu beffe di me, la prego." (rule 120). (k) " what is your..." " a quale scopo, se pur ne ha uno, agisce cosl." (1) se voglio fissarmeli bene in mente. (m) che sento pronunciare (rule 690) (n) "a questa rgola ade- risco sempre." (o) Npn amo che si con- travenga ai miei disegni. " 226 A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION. The Italians laughed heartily at this explanation (p) and invited the conjugating Dutchman to dine with them. " I will dine," replied he, " thou wilt dine, he will dine ; we will dine, you will dine, they will dine, we will all dine together." This they accordingly did (q), and it (r) was difficult to say whether the Dutchman ate or conjugated with more perseverance (s). (* * *) A CLEVER RETORT.* A friend of Dean Swift one day sent him (193) a turbot, as a present (a), by a servant lad (b) who had frequently been on similar errands (c), but who had never received the most trifling mark (d) of the Dean's generosity. Having gained admission (e), he opened (704) the door of the study, and abruptly putting down the fish, cried, very rudely, " Master has sent you (sends you) (120) a turbot." " Young man," said the Dean, rising from his easy chair, " is that the way you deliver your message ? (f). Let me teach you better manners (g) : sit down in my chair ; we will change situa- tions (character), and I will show you (118, 197) how to behave in future " (h). The boy sat down, and the Dean, going (834) to the door, came up to the table at a respectful pace, and making a low bow (i), said, " Sir, my master (146) presents his kind compli- ments (j), hopes (868) you are well, and requests your acceptance of (k) a small present." " Does he ?" (1) replied the boy ; " return him my best (m) thanks, and there's (n) half-a-crown for yourself." The Dean, thus drawn (o) into an act of generosity, laughed heartily, and gave the boy a crown for his wit. (* *) (p) "The Italians laughed * "ArgutaRisposta." come si agisce meno villana- ... Sentito lo schiarimento, (a) "as a present," mente. gl' Italian! scoppiarono nelle in regalo. (h) come dovresti com- risa. (b) ragazzotto. portarti all'avvenire. (q) II che fecero. (c) che aveva sovente (i) profondo inchino. (r) " it," in cases like this, eseguito simili ordini. (j) "presents his..." la is not translated. (d) la minima prova. saluta caramente. (s) "whether the Dutch- (e) Tosto che si trov5 (k) la picga di accettare. man ate or conjugated..." se nella casa. (1) " Davvero ? " 1'Olandese fosse piu perse- (f) ecosicheeseguisci (m) ringrazialo pure da verante nel coniugare o nel gli ordini che ti son dati? parte mia. mangiare. (g) Ti fo veder silbito (n) ecco. (o) spinto. A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 227 THE DERVIS.* A Dervis, travelling through (a) Tartary, having arrived (689) at the town of Balk, went (704) into the king's palace by mistake, thinking it to be (b) a public inn or caravansary. Having looked about him for (311) some time, he entered into (c) a long gallery, where he laid down his wallet and spread his carpet, in order to (932) repose himself upon it (d), after the manner of (e) the Eastern nations (468). He had not been long (f) in this posture before he was (g) discovered by some of the guards, who asked him what was his business (h) in that place ? The Dervis told them (636) he intended (838, f) to take up his night's lodging (i) in that caravansary. The guards let him know (j), in a very angry manner (k), that the house he was in (1) was not a caravansary, but (m) the king's palace. It happened (n) that the king himself passed through the gallery during this debate (o), and smiling at (p) the mistake of the Dervis, asked him how he could possibly be so dull as (q) not to distinguish a palace from a caravansary ? "Sire," said the Dervis, "give me leave to ask your majesty (r) a question (306) or two. Who were the persons that lodged in this house when it was first built ? " The king replied " My ancestors." " And who," said the Dervis, " was the last person that lodged here ? " (s) The king replied, " My father." " And who is it," said the Dervis, " that lodges here at present ? " The king told him that it was he himself (t). " And who," said the Dervis, " will be here after you (your Majesty) (563) ? " The king answered, " The young prince, my son." Ah! Sire," said the Dervis, "a house that changes its inhabitants so often (u) and receives such a perpetual succession of guests, is not a palace, but (m) a caravansary." ADDISON. * "11 Dervigio." (h) ci5 che venisse fare. (q) abbastanza stupido (a) che viaggiava in. (i) d' alloggiarsi per la per. (b) cred^ndolo. notte. (r) mi sia permesso di (c) infilo. (j) gli fecero sapere. fare a Vostra Maesta. (d) " upon it" is not (k) con gran cpllera. (s) " E chi fu 1' ultimo translated. (1) in cui si trovava. che vi ebbe alloggio ? " (e) alia moda di. (m)ma bensi. (t) che vi alloggiava egli (f) Non era stato guari. (n) il caso voile. stesso. (g) "before he was," al- (o) discussione. (u) che cambia cosi spes- lorquando fu. (p) See p. 208, note (t). so di a bit ami. 228 A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION. RABELAIS A TRAITOR.* This celebrated wit (a) was once at a great distance from Paris, and without money to bear his expenses thither (b). The ingen- ious author being sharp set (c), got together (d) a convenient quantity of brickdust, and having disposed of it (e) into several papers (f), wrote upon one, Poison for Monsieur (g) ; upon a second, Poison for the Dauphin (h) ; and on a third, Poison for the King. Having made this provision for (i) the royal family of France, he laid his papers so that (j) the landlord, who was an inquisitive man and a good (faithful) subject, might get a sight of them (k). The plot succeeded as he desired (1) ; the host gave immediate intelli- gence to (m) the secretary of state. The secretary presently sent down (n) a special messenger, who brought up the traitor to court, and provided him, at the king's expense, with proper accommoda- tion on the road (o). As soon as he appeared, he was known to be (p) the celebrated Rabelais, and his powder, upon examination, (q) being found very innocent, the jest was only laughed at (r) ; for which a less eminent droll would have been sent to the galleys. BUDGELL. THE CUNNING CUTLER.* There is (154) in London, at a place called Charing Cross, a very fine statue in bronze of Charles the First (543) on horseback (a). After the revolution and the decapitation of that monarch, the statue was taken down (b) and sold to a cutler who undertook to demolish it. He immediately manufactured great numbers * " Rabelais Colpe- vole di Lesa Ma$st&." (a) bell'ingegno. (b) "tobearhis..."pagar le sue spese, fin Ik. (c) ridotto all' ultima ri- sorsa. (d) raccolse. (e) messala (rule 689). (f) " papers," involtini. (g) A title given to the eldest of the brothers of the kings o France. (h) A title given to the eldest son of the king of France. (i) Avendo provveduto cosl a' bisogni di. (j) in modo tale che. (k) potesse vederli. (1) come lo desiderava (notice the pronoun "lo " referring to plot). (m) ne avverti immedia- tamente. (n) spedl subito. (o) "and provided him..." fac^ndogli dare sulla via, a spese del re, alloggio e vitto. (p) riconobbero esser lui. (q) analisi fatta. (r) non si fece che ridere della burla. * "II Sagace Coltel- linaio." (a) a cavallo. (b) si tir6 giu la statua. A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 22Q (quantity) of knives and forks with bronze handles, and exposed them (c) in his shop as the produce of the statue which was sup- posed (771) to have been melted. They were so rapidly bought, (d) both by (e) the friends and the enemies of the late monarch, that the cutler soon made a (360) fortune and retired from business. Soon after the restoration it was proposed (771) to erect a new statue to the memory of the unfortunate king ; the cutler hearing of this, (834) informed the government that he could spare them (456) the trouble and expense of casting a statue, as the old one (f) was yet in his possession, and that he would sell it to them (456) at a moderate price. The bargain (affair) was concluded (771), and the statue, which he had secretly preserved, was re- elevated (705) (g) on the pedestal at Charing Cross, where it now stands (h). " (* * *) THE MONKEY AND THE TWO CATS.* Two cats, having stolen some cheese, could not agree (842, g) about dividing their prize (a). In order, therefore, to settle the dispute (b), they consented to refer the matter (c) to a monkey. The proposed arbitrator very readily (d) accepted the office, and, producing (taking) a balance, put a part (bit) into each scale. " Let me see," said he, " ay ! this lump outweighs (e) the other ; " and immediately he bit off a considerable piece (f) "in order to reduce it," he observed, "to an equilibrium" (g). The opposite scale had now become the heavier, which (628) afforded our conscientious judge an additional (other) reason for a second mouthful. " Hold ! hold ! " (h) said the two cats, who began to be alarmed for the result (i), " give us our respective shares (j) and c) li mise in mostra nella * "La Scimia e i (e) pesa piu che. sua bottega dicen- due Gratti." (f) ne Iev6 co'denti un doli fatti col bronzo. (a) quanto nl modo di buon boccone. (d) t)bero tale smercio. dividere il bottino. (g) "in order... "per ista- (e)" by" is translated by "e." (b) "In order..." Quin- bilire, disse, 1'equilibrio. (f ) stante che la veccnia. di per decidere la lite. (h) basta ! basta ! (g) posta di bel nuovo. (c) sottomettere il caso. (i) temerne il risultato. (h) si vede tuttora. (d) con gran premura. (j) dacci la nostra parte. 230 A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION. we are satisfied." " If you are satisfied," returned (j) the monkey, justice is not (k) ; a case of this intricate nature is by no means (1) so soon determined." Upon this (m) he continued to nibble first at one piece and then the other, till the poor cats, seeing (834) their cheese gradually diminishing (314), entreated him to give himself no further trouble, but deliver (restore) to them what remained. " Not so fast, I beseech you, friends," replied the monkey ; " we owe justice to ourselves as well as (n) to you : what remains is due to me in right of my office." Upon which (m) he crammed the whole into his mouth, (o) (572) and with great gravity dismissed the court (p). DODSLEY. CURIOUS EXPEDIENT.* Two Irishmen, blacksmiths by trade (857, k) went to Jamaica. Finding soon after their arrival, that they could do nothing with- out money to begin with (a), but that, with sixty or seventy pounds and industry, they might be able to do some business, they hit upon (b) the following ingenious expedient. One of them made the other black (blackened) from head to foot. This being done (c), he took him to one of the negro-dealers, who, after viewing (834) and approving his stout, athletic appear- ance, made a bargain (d) to pay eighty pounds for (251) him and prided himself on (845, g) the purchase, supposing him to be (e) one of the finest negroes on the island. The same evening this newly manufactured negro (f) made off to (g) his countryman, washed himself clean, and resumed his former appearance. Re- wards were in vain offered in hand bills (h), pursuit was eluded, and discovery, by care and caution, was made impossible (i). (j) rispose. * "Curioso Spediente." (g) scappo e ando dal. (k) non lo e. (a) per cominciare. (h) avvisi al pllbblico. (1) "by no..." punto. (b) immaginarono. (i) Turn "pursuit..." (m) Detto cio. (c) Cio fat to. " they eluded pursuit, and (n) non meno che. (d) convenne. with care and caution made (o) si ficco il resto. (e) credendo che fosse. it impossible that any one (p) fini 1' udienza. (f) negro improvvisato. should discover them." A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 231 The two Irishmen with the money commenced business (j), and succeeded (258) so well, that they returned to England with a for- tune of several thousand (migliaia di) pounds (656). Previous however to their departure from the island (k), they went to the gentleman from whom they had received the money, recalled the circumstances of the negro to his recollection (1), and made amends, both for principal and interest, with thanks (m). (* * *) NAPOLEON AND THE BRITISH SAILOR.* Whilst the French troops were encamped at Boulogne, public attention was much excited by (270) the daring attempt at escape (a) made by an English sailor. This person (man) having escaped (689) from the depot and gained (b) the borders of the sea, the woods near which served him for concealment (c), constructed, (704), with no other instrument than a knife, a boat entirely of the bark of trees. When the weather was fair (853), he mounted (d) (697) a tree and looked out for (e) the English flag ; and having at last observed (discovered) (689) a British cruiser, he ran to the shore with his boat on his back, and was about (842, p) to trust himself in his frail vessel to the waves, when he was (705) pursued, arrested, and loaded with chains. Everybody in the army was anxious (desired) (300) to see the boat ; and Napoleon, having at length heard of the affair (f), sent for (g) the sailor and interrogated him. "You must" (h), said Napoleon, "have had a great desire (j) si misero a negoziare. ..." "thanked him, paying diglio. (d) Add " su di." (k) "Previous..." Per6 him capital and interest." (e) guardava se potes>e prima di lasciar 1'isola." * " Napoleone e il vedere. (1) "recalled..." " gli Marinaro Inglese." (f) "having..." sentito rammentarono 1'affare del (a) audace tentativo di parlare dell'accarluto. negro." evadersi. (b) pervenuto. (g) mand6 a chiamare. (m) Turn " made amends (c) servivano di nascon- (h) Dovete, ne son certo. 232 A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION. to see your country again, since you could resolve (i) to trust your- self on the open (full) sea in so frail a bark. I suppose you have left a sweetheart there ? " (239) " No," said the sailor, " but a poor infirm mother, whom I was (695) anxious (I desired) to see." " And you shall see her," said Napoleon, giving at the same time orders to set him at (j) liberty, and to bestow upon him (k) a con- siderable sum of money for his mother, observing that " she must be a good mother who had so good a (such a) son." (* *) DESCRIPTION OF ENGLAND.* Few countries exhibit a greater variety of surface than England, or have been more highly favoured by (270) nature. " Although," says Dr. Aikin, "its features are moulded on a comparatively minute scale (a), they are marked with all the agreeable inter- change (varieties) which constitute picturesque beauty. In some parts, plains clothed in (covered of) the richest verdure, watered by copious streams, and pasturing innumerable cattle, extend as far as the eye can reach (b) ; in others (c) gently rising hills (d) and bending vales (e), fertile in corn (f), waving with woods (g), and interspersed with (266) flowery meadows, offer the most delightful landscapes of rural opulence and beauty. Some tracts furnisli (offer) prospects of the more romantic and impressive kind ; lofty mountains, craggy rocks, deep dells, narrow ravines, and tumbling (precipitous) torrents : nor are there wanting, as a contrast to (h) those scenes in which every variety of nature is a different charm, the vicissitude of (i) black barren moors and wide inanimated heaths." Such is (j) a vivid description of the general appearance of England. But the beauty and fertility of the country are not the only things to excite (which excite) admiration. The mild- (i) v'e bastato il cuore. cola proporzione. mento in abhondanza. (j) metterlo in. (b) fin dove pu6 giun- (g) coperti di boschi on- (k) e di dargli. ger 1' occhio. deggianti. * " Descrizione dell' (c) altrove. (h) "nor are there..." ne Inghilterra." (d) collinette a dolce mancavi, come per far risal- (a) " its features.. " le clivo. tare. sue prospettive non siano (e) valloncelli tortuosi. (i) 1'aspetto vicendevole relativamente che di pic- (f) che producono fru- di. (j) Ecco. A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION 233 ness of the climate, removed alike from the extremes of heat and cold (j) ; the multitude of rivers ; their (560) depth, and the facility they afford to internal navigation ; the vast beds of coal and other valuable minerals hid under the surface (k) ; the abundance and excellence of the fish in the rivers and surrounding seas ; the extent of sea-coast ; the number, capaciousness (1), and safety of the ports and bays ; and the favourable situation of the country for commerce ; give (m) England (330) advantages that are not enjoyed in an equal degree by any other nation (n). Dr. AIKEN and J. R. M'CULLOCH. CHARACTER OF RICHARD I. This renowned prince was (701) tall, strong, straight and well- proportioned. His arms were remarkably long, (574) his eyes blue, and full of vivacity ; his hair was of a yellowish colour ; his complexion fair (782), his countenance comely, and his air majestic. He was endowed with good natural understanding ; his penetra- tion was uncommon ; he possessed a fund of manly eloquence ; his conversation was spirited, and he was admired for his talents of repartee (a) ; as for his courage and ability in war, both Europe and Asia resound with his praise. The Saracens stilled their children with the terror of his name ; and Saladine, who was an accomplished prince, admired his valour to such a degree of enthusiasm, that immediately after Richard had defeated (710) him on the plains of Joppa, he sent him a couple of fine Arabian horses, in token of his esteem ; a (342) polite compliment, which Richard returned with magnificent presents. These are the shin- ing parts (b) of his character, which, however, cannot dazzle the judicious observer so much, but that he may perceive a number of blemishes, which no historian has been able (c) to efface from the memory of this celebrated monarch. His ingratitude and want of filial affection are unpardonable. He was proud, haughty, ambi- tious, choleric, cruel, vindictive, and vicious ; nothing could (794) (j) "removed alike..." (n) "that are not..." di (b) qualita ammirabili. ne troppo freddo, ne troppo cui nessun altra nazione (c) "the judicious observer caldo. gode al medesimo grado. ..." un osservatore di senno (k) che il suolo nasconde. al punto di nascondergli i (1) grandezza. (a) " for his talents of re- tanti difetti, che niuno sto- (m) tutto cio da. partee," per la sua arguzia. rico ha saputo. 234 A GUIDE TO ITALIAN COMPOSITION. equal his rapaciousness but his profusion, and, indeed, the one was the effect of the other ; he was a tyrant to (d) his wife, as well as (e) to his people (456), who groaned under his taxations to such a degree, that (f) even the glory of his victories did not exempt him from their execrations : in a word, he has been aptly compared to a lion, a species of animal which he resembled not only in courage, but likewise in ferocity. SMOLLETT. WILLIAM PITT, EARL OF CHATHAM. On the stage, Pitt would have been the finest Brutus or Corio- lanus ever seen (a)... His figure when (b) he first appeared in Parliment, was strikingly graceful and commanding ; (c) his features high and noble ; his eye full of fire. His voice, even when it sank to a whisper (d), was heard (771) to the remotest benches ; and when he strained it to his full extent (e), the sound rose like the swell of the organ (f) of a great cathedral shook the house with its peal (g) and was heard through lobbies (h) and down staircases, to the Court of Requests and the precincts (i) of Westminster Hall. He cultivated all these eminent advantages with the most assiduous care. His action is described by a very malignant observer (j) as equal to that of Garrick. His play of countenance (k) was wonder- ful ; he frequently disconcerted a hostile orator by a single glance of indignation or scorn. Every tone, from the impassioned cry (1) to the thrilling aside, was perfectly at his command. It is by no means improbable (m) that the pains which he took to improve his great personal advantages had in some respects a prejudicial operation, and tended to nourish in him that passion for theatrical effect which, as we have already remarked (n), was one of the most conspicuous blemishes (defects) in his character. MACAULAY. (d) verso. (e) "he strained it..." (k) 1'espressione del suo (e) come pure. quando se ne serviva a piii volto. (f) a segno tale che. non posso. (1) " Every tone..." (f) "like the swell of Tenevo in freno completo (a) che si vedesse mai. the organ," come quello ogni emozione dell' animo ; (b) Turn, "When he first dell'prgano. dal grido della passione, fi- appeared...his..." (g) ne faceva tremare la no all' aparte commovente. (c) imponente. sala del senato. (m) Egli e probabile. (d) " even " persino (h) galierie. (i)circuito. (n) Come si e gia fatto quando parlava sotto voce. (j) critico ostile. osservare. ITALIAN POETRY. 235 ITALIAN POETRY. VERSES* AND SYLLABLES. Italian " versi "* consist of a fixed number of syllables ; and their expression and harmony depend on the words they contain, and the manner in which these words are arranged. In Italian a syllable in poetry is not exactly the same as a syllable in prose ; often a syllable in a verse consists of two prose syllables pronounced together so as to require but one emission of the voice ; for instance, the following verse, which contains seven prose syllables, is counted as a verse of five syllables : Metrical Syllables i 2 3 4 5 "Gia il cielo indora" t (ZENO). Prose Syllables i 2 34 567 Italian verses have different names given them, according to the number of the syllables they contain. VERSI QUINARI. Verses of five (metrical) syllables J are called "versi quinari." They have generally two rhythmical accents ; one on the first, or second, and one (essential) on the fourth syllable. LA MELANCONIA. FONTI e C9lline Chiesi agli dei : M'udiro al fine,|| Pago io vivro : Ne mai quel fonte Co' desir miei, Ne mai quel monte Trapassero. Gli onor che sono ? Che val ricchezza ? Di miglior dono Vommene altier:H D'un' alma pura, Che la bellezza Delia Natura Gusta e del Ver. * In these pages the word verses is used in the sense of lines in poetry. In Italian the word " versi " means lines of poetry. t " It (the dawn) already gilds the sky." J There are Italian verses of four syllables, called " versi quadrisillabi," which, though not musical, when used alone, have a very pretty effect when they are judiciously mixed with verses of eight syllables. (See " Riso di Bella Donna," page 241.) There are also verses of three, or even two syllables, but these are very seldom used, except to versify short trifles ; they are utterly unmusical. For translation see Italian-English Vocabulary (page 260). I " Udiro," poetical form for " udirono," they heard me (see rule 261). ^ Vpmmene "=" me ne vo," I am (see rule 194, and rules 218 and 845 r). 236 ITALIAN POETRY. Ne puo di tempre* Cangiar mio fato ; Dipinto sempre II ciel sara ; Ritorneranno I fior nel prato Sin che a me 1'anno Ritornera. Melanconia, Ninfa gentile La vita mia Consegno a te : I tuoi piaceri Chi tiene a vile Ai piacer veri Nato n9n e. PlNDEMONTE (1753-1828). VERSI SENARI. Verses of six syllables are called "versi senari." They have two rhythmical accents ; one on the second and the other (essential) on the fifth syllable. Nell'ora pietosa Che ass9nna ogni cura, L'affanno sol dura Che amore destb. Solingo, sc9rato, Disotto al verone D' Imelda si pone Sprezzato amator. Mentr' ella tornata NeU'erma stanzetta Le vesti s' affretta Del ballo a sp9gliar. E a lei che disdegna D'amor la parola Al siK>n di mandola Ei dice cosi : A IMELDA. Nell'ora pietosa Che add9rme 9gni cura, La pena sol dura Che amore destb. La n9tte serena Che al S9nno ti chiama, Delgiovin che t'ama Raddoppia il sospir. Ah ! solo un istante M'ascolta, ben mio, Alonzo son i9 Che il C9re perde. E tu che il rapivi, O Imelda crudele, D' Alonzo fedele Non senti pieta ! I. RICCIARDA CAPECELATRO (1800-1860?). The student is again desired to read over rules 5, 9, 48, 53, and 63, in order to thoroughly understand the directions for the double pronunciation of the letters " E," " O," " S " and " Z," and the meaning of the letters in darker type. ITALIAN POETRY. 237 VERSI SETTENARI. Verses of seven syllables are called " versi settenari." They have two or three rhythmical accents. When they have two accents, the first can be on any of the first four syllables, and the other (essential) on the sixth syllable ; when they have three accents, one is on the first or second syllable, the other on the fourth, and the last (essential) on the sixth syllable. IL CINQUE MAGGIO.* Ei fu. Siccome immobile,! Dato il mortal S9spiro, Stette la sp9glia immemore Orba di tanto spiro, 0951 percossa, attonita, La terra al nunzio sta,J Muta pensando all' ultima Or a deU'vupm fatale; Ne sa quando una simile Orma di pie mortale La sua cruenta polvere A calpestar verra. Lui sfolgorante in solio Vide il mio genio e tacque ; Quando, con vece assidua,|| Cadde, risorse e giacque, Di mille voci al sonito Mista la sua nn ha : Vergin di servo enc9mio1I E di C9dardo oltraggio, Sorge or comnwsso al subito Sparir di tanto raggio ; E sci9glie all' urna un cantico, Che forse non morra. * This sublime ode, the best Italian lyric of modern times, was written by Manzoni in commemoration of the 5th of May, 1821, the day on which Napoleon I. died at St. Helena, where he had been kept a prisoner for six years. Manzoni, who had always kept aloof alike from the detractors and the flatterers of the great man, takes a rapid survey of the hero's life, but leaves it to posterity to judge ; and, like a true Chrstian poet, kneels down at the death-bed of the dying penitent, and prays. f Notice that this line consists of eight metrical syllables, because it ends with a " parola sdrUCciola " (see rule 60), but still it is reckoned as a " verso settenario," for the reason that the last (essential) rhythmical accent falls upon the sixth syllable. J Notice that this line consists of six metrical syllables only, because it ends with a " parola tronca " (see rule 62), but still it is reckoned as a " verso settenario," for the reason that the last (essential) rhythmical accent falls upon the sixth syllable. " Fatale," marked by fate. || " Vece assidua," rapid vicissihuies (changes). ^f "Vergin di servo encpmio," pure from servile flattery (praise). 238 ITALIAN POETRY. Dall' Alpi alle Piramidi, Dal Mansanare al Reno,* Di quel secure il fulmine Tenea dietro al baleno;t Scoppib da Scilla al Tanai,J Dall' uno all' altro mar. Fu vera gl9ria ? Ai poster! L'ardua sentenza : nui Chiniam la fronte al Massimo Fattor, che voile in lui Del creator suo spirto Piu vasta orma stampar. La procellosa e trepida Gi9ia d'un gran disegno, L'ansia d'un C9r che indocile Ferve, pensando al regno, E il giunge, e ottiene un premio Ch' era follia sperar ; Tutto ei provb : la gl9ria Maggior dopo il periglio, La fuga e la vitt9ria, La reggia e il tristo esiglio : Due volte nella polvere,j| Due volte sull' altar. Ei si n9mo : due sec9li L' un contro 1' altro armato, Sommessi a lui si volsero Come aspettando il fato ; Ei fe' silenzio, ed arbitro S'assise in mezzo a lor. Ei sparve, e i di nell' ozio Chiuse in si breve sponda,U Segno d'immensa invidia, E di pieta profonda, D'inestinguibil 9dio E d'indomato amor. Come sul capo al naufrago L' onda s' avvolve e pesa, L'onda, su cui del misero, Alta pur dianzi e tesa, Scorrea la vista a scernere Prode renrote invan ; Tal su quell' alma il cumulo Delle mem9rie scese ! Oh ! quante V9lte ai posteri Narrar se stesso imprese, E suH'eterne pagine Cadde la stanca man ! * From the Mansanare (a small river near Madrid) to the Rhine. + This hold image means : " The thunderbolt (fulmine) of that fearless man (Napoleon) followed quickly its flash (baleno) " ; i.e., He no sooner appeared on the battle-field than he smote down his enemies. J from Scylla (a famous rock in the Strait of Messina) to the River Don. " Nui " is used, as a poetical licence, instead of " noi." || "Due volte...," an allusion to Napoleon's exile at Elba, and at St. Helena. ^f " In si breve sponda," on so narrow a shore (St. Helena). ITALIAN POETRY. Oh quante volte al tacito Mprir di un giorno inerte, Chinati i rai fulminei, Le braccia al sen conserte, Stette, e dei di che furono L' assalse il S9vvenir ! E ripenso le mobili Tende, e i perc9ssi valli, E il lampo de' manipoli E 1'onda dei cavalli, E il concitato imperio, E il celere obbedir. Ahi ! forse a tanto strazio Cadde lo spirto anelo, E dispero ; ma valida Venne una man dal cielo, E in piu spirabil acre Pietosa il trasportb ; IL POTERE DI DIO. DOVUNQUE il guardo io giro, Immense Dio ti vedo : Nell' opre tue t'ammiro, Ti riconosco in me. La terra, il mar, le sfere Parian del tuo potere : Tu sei per tutto, e noi Tutti viviamo in te. E 1' avvi'6 pei floridi Sender della speranza, Ai campi eterni, al premio Che i desideri avanza,* Dov' e silenzio e tenebre La gl9ria che passo. Bella imm9rtal ! benefica Fede ai trionfi avvezza ! Scrivi ancor questo, allegrati ; Che piu superba altezza Al disonor del Golgotaf Giammai nn si chinb. Tu dalle stanche ceneri Sperdi ogni ria parola : II Dio che atterra e suscita, Che affanna e che consola, Sulla deserta col trice Accanto a lui p9so. MANZONI (1785-1873). LA GRATITUDINE. Benche di senso privo, Fin 1' arboscello e grato A quell' amico rivo, Da cui riceve umor ; Per lui di fronde ornato, Bella merce gli rende, Quando dal sol difende II suo benefattor. METASTASIO (1698-1782). * Exceeds all desires. t " Al disonor del Golgota," to the disgrace of Calvary, which by Christ's death became a sign of salvation : an allusion to the Crucifix which Napoleon held in his haua oil his death-bed. 240 ITALIAN POETRY. VERSI OTTONARI. Verses of eight syllables are called " versi ott9nari." They can have only two accents ; one on the third and the other (essen- tial) on the seventh syllable. LA RONDINELLA. RONDINELLA pellegrina Che ti p9si in sul verone, Ricantando 9gni mattina Quella flebile canzone, Che vuoi dirmi in tua favella, Pellegrina rondinella ? Solitaria nell'9blio, Dal tuo sp9so abbandonata, Piangi forse al pianto mio Vedovetta sconsolata ? Piangi, piangi in tua favella, Pellegrina rondinella. Pur di me manco infelice Tu alle penne almen t' affidi, Scorri il lago e la pendice, Empi 1'aria de'tu9i gridi, Tutto il giorno in tua favella Lui chiamando, o rondinella. Oh se anch'io !...Ma lo contende Questa bassa, angusta V9lta, Dove sole non risplende, Dove 1'aria ancor m' e tolta, Donde a te la mia favella Giunge appena, o rondinella. II settembre innanzi viene, E a lasciarmi ti prepari : Tu vedrai lontane arene, Nu9vi monti, nu9vi mari Salutando in tua favella, Pellegrina rondinella : Ed 19 tutte le mattine Riaprendo gli 9cchi al pianto, Era le nevi e fra le brine Credero d'udir quel canto, Onde par che in tua favella Mi compianga, o rondinella. Una croce a primavera Troverai su questo suolo : Rondinella, in sulla sera Sovra lei racc9gli il volo : Dimmi pace in tua favella, Pellegrina rondinella. * This very pretty song, a masterpiece of harmony and elegnnce, is taken from " Marco Visconti," a fine novel by Grossi (1800-1850). It is very popular in Italy, and has been set to music by several celebrated composers. ITALIAN POETRY. 241 RISC DI BELLA DONNA. Se bel rio, se bell' auretta Tra 1'erbetta Sul mattin mormorando erra ; Se di fiori un praticello Si fa bello, Noi diciam : jide la terra. Quando avvien che un zeffiretto Per diletto Bagni il pie nell'onde chiare, Sicche 1'acqua in sull' arena Scherzi appena, Noi diciam che ride il mare. Se giammai tra fior vermigli, Se tra gigli Veste 1' alba un aureo velo, E su rote di zaffiro Move in giro, Noi diciam che ride il cielo. Ben e ver, quand'e gi9condo Ride il mondo ; Ride il ciel quand' e gioioso ; Ben e ver ; ma n9n san poi, Come voi, Fare un riso grazi'oso. CHIABRERA (1552-1637). VERSI NOVENARI. Verses of nine syllables are called " versi n9venari ; " but, as they are seldom used, they need not be illustrated. VERSI DECASILLABI. Verses of ten syllables are called "versi decasillabi." They have three rhythmical accents ; one on the third, one on the sixth, and the last (essential) on the ninth syllable. LA BATTAGLIA DI MACLODIO.* S' 9de a destra uno squillo di tromba ; A sinistra risponde uno squillo ; D'ambo i lati calpesto rimbomba Da cavalli e da fanti il terren. Quinci spunta per 1' aria un vessillo ; Quindi un altro s' avanza spiegato : Ecco appare un drappello schierato ; Ecco un altro che incontro gli vien. * This masterly lyric is a part of the chorus in " II Conte di Carmagnola/' a fine tragedy by Manzoni. The great poet deplores the intestine warfare which desolated Italy in the Middle Ages, and, with words breathing the greatest humanity and purest patriotism, conjures his countrymen to keep friendly and united. 16 242 ITALIAN POETRY. Gia di mezzo sparito e il terreno ; Gia le spade respingon le spade ; L' un dell' altro le immerge nel seno ; Gronda il sangue, raddoppia il ferir. Chi son essi ? Alle belle contrade Qual ne venne straniero a far guerra ? Qual e quei che ha giurato la terra Dove nacque far salva, 9 D' una terra son tutti ; un linguaggio Parian tutti ; fratelli li dice Lo straniero : il comune lignaggio A ognun d' essi dal volto traspar. Questa terra fu a tutti nudrice, Questa terra di sangue ora intrisa, Che natura dall' altre ha divisa, E recinta coll' Alpe e col mar. Ahi ! qual d' essi il sacrilege brando Trasse il primo il fratello a ferire ? O terror ! del conflitto esecrando La cagione esecranda qual'e? Non la sanno : a dar rrmrte, a morire Qui senz'ira ognun d'essi e venuto ; E venduto ad un duce venduto, Con lui pugna, e n9n chiede il perche. Ahi sventura ! Ma sp9se n9n hanno, Non han madri gli stolti guerrieri ? Perche tutti i lor cari non vanno Dall' ignobile campo a strappar ? E i vegliardi, che ai casti pensieri Delia tomba gia schiudon la mente, Che non tentan la turba furente Con prudenti parole placar ? MANZONI (1783-1873). I very much regret to have no space here to print the whole of this splendid chorus, but I intend to republish it, in full, in ray " Italian Reader." The poetry of Manzoni should be cherished by all who value heartfelt, religious, and patriotic senti- ments expressed by a great poet. ITALIAN POETRY. 243 MESSINA. Chi non vide a marina Messina, Mai puo dir ch' egli vide belta : Di Triquetra e la figlia, e conchiglia, E la perla che pari n9n ha ! Sei pur vaga supina, 6 Messina, Sul guancial di tue rose odorose, Cinta ognor dal m9nile d' Aprile, Circonfusa d' aroma e fulgor ! Mattutina, sei cara, 6 Messina, Se 1' aurora ti bacia e colora, Se in te cada, e t' imperil rugiada, S'hai nel grembo un bel nembo di fior! Sei divina al meriggio, 6 Messina, Tra palmeti, bei fonti e laureti, Tra gli aurati ed 9lenti cedrati, Con torrenti di luce e d' ardor ! Vespertina sei maga, o Messina, S' hai pacato, sereno stellato : Sei portento s' hai luna d' argento, Danze, su9ni e canzoni d' amor ! Sei regina, p azzurrina Messina, Per giardini di fate beate, Per convalli sott' onda in C9ralli, Coronata Sirena del mar ! Chi n9n vide a marina Messina, Mai puo dir ch' egli vide brillar Le belta che rinserra la terra, Chiude il flutto, ed il ciel sa versar ! Pepou (1801-1881). VERSI ENDECASILLABI. Verses of sleven syllables are called "versi endecasillabi," or "versi eroici.'' They are the principal Italian verses and the best wherewith to express great and noble thoughts. These verses may have two, three, four, and even five (rhythmical) accents, arranged in almost every conceivable manner. 244 ITALIAN POETRY. BEATRICE. Tanto gentile e tanto onesta pare La ckmna mia, quand ella altrui saluta, Ch'ogni lingua divien tremando muta, E gli 9cchi n9n ardiscon di guardare. Ella sen va sentendosi laudare, * Benignamente d' umilta vestuta ; f E par che sia una C9sa venuta Di cielo in terra a miracol mostrare. Mostrasi si piacente a chi la mira, Che da per gli occhi una dolcezza al C9re, Che intender n9n la pub chi n9n la pr9va. E par che dalle sue labbia si m9va J Uno spirto soave e pien d' amore, Che va dicendo all' anima : S9spira. DANTE (1265-1321). LAURA. Erano i capei d'9ro all' aura sparsi, Che 'n mille dolci nodi gli avvolgea ; E '1 vago lume oltra misura ardea Di quei begli 9cchi, ch' or ne son si scarsi ; E '1 viso di pietosi color farsi, N9n so se vero o falso mi parea : I' che 1'esca amorosa al petto avea, Qual maraviglia se di subit' arsi ? Non era 1' andar suo C9sa m9rtale, Ma d' angelica forma ; e le parole Su9navan altro che pur voce umana. Uno spirto celeste, un vivo sole Fu quel ch' i' vidi : e se n9n fosse or tale, Piaga per allentar d' arco n9n sana. PETRARCA (1304-1374). * In order to understand " sen va," see rule 845, r. f " vestuta," for " vestita," clothed, full of. \ " labbia," for " labbra," lips. " Piaga per allentar d'arco non sana," means : " A wound (piaga) does not get healed (non sana) when the bow (arco) relaxes." After the words "the bow," the words " from which the arrow which inflicted the wound came," are understood. This pretty " concetto " of Petrarca, one of the earliest in the Italian language, is now used as a proverb. ITALIAN POETRY. 245 SOPRA LA MORTE. Morte, che se' tu mai ? Primo dei danni L' alma vile e la rea ti crede e teme ; E vendetta del ciel scendi ai tiranni, Che il vigile tuo braccio incalza e preme. Ma 1' infelice, a cui de' lunghi affanni Grave e 1'incarco, e morta. in cu9r la speme, Quel ferro implora troncator degli anni, E ride all' appressar dell' ore estreme. Fra la polve di Marte e le vicende Ti sfida il f9rte, che ne' rischi indura ; E il saggio senza impallidir ti attende. M9rte, che se'tu dunque ? Un'ombra 9scura, Un bene, un male, che diversa prende Dagli affetti dell' 119111 forma e natura. MONTI (1754-1828). VERSI DODECASILLABI. Verses of twelve syllables are called " versi d9decasillabi." They have four accents ; one on the third, one on the fifth, one on the eighth, and the other (essential) on the eleventh syllable. UN POPOLO DEGRADATO. Dai guardi dubbiosi, dai pavidi volti, Qual raggio di sole da nuvoli folti, Traluce de'padri la fiera virtu : Ne' guardi, ne' volti confuso ed incerto Si mesce e disc9rda lo spregio sofferto Col misero org9glio d'un tempo che fu. MANZONI (1785-1873). Blank verses are called in Italian " versi sciolti." I regret also to have no space here for more than these few lines taken from one of the two beautiful choruses in the other excellent tragedy by Manzoni, " Adelchi," but this also I intend to republish in full in my " Italian Reader." 246 VOCABULARY. PART I. ENGLISH ITALIAN. NOTE. Nouns ending in o are masculine, ami those in a, as a rule, feminine. The gender of nouns ending in e is given. A Afford, v. a. dare, procu- Antagonist, avversario,ri- A, an, un, uno, una. rare. vale. Abandon, v. a. abbandonare. After, dopo. Any, del, dello, &c., al- Ability, abilita. Afternoon, dopo pranzo. cuno, &c. Able, 'abile. Afterwards, dopo. Any, chiunque, ognuno, About, circa. Again, ancora, di nupvo. qualunque. one, al- Above, al di sopra. men- Against, contro. cuno. thing, qualche tioned, suddetto. Age, eta, s^colo. cosa. Abruptly, bruscamente. Agitation, agitazione. Anyone, alcuno. Abundance, abbondanza. Ago, fa. Apartment, appartamento. Abyss, goJfo, abisso. Agreeable, piacevole. Apologise, v. a. far delle Academy, accademia. Air, aria. scuse a. Accent, accento. Album, album. Appear, v. n. apparire. Accept, v. a. accettare. All, tutto, tutti. Appearance, apparenza. Accident, accidente. Allege, v. a. addurre. Apple, mela, porno. Accompany, v. a. accom- Alley, chiasso. Apprehend, v. a. temere. pagnare. Allow, v. a. permettere. Approve, v. a. approvare. Accomplish, v. a. compire. Almost, quasi. Aptly, attamente. Accomplished, compito. Alone, solo. Arab, Arabian, Arabo. According, secondo. Along, lurfgo. Arabia, Arabia. Accusation, accusa. Alps, Alpi, f. Arbitrator, arbitro. Accuse, v. a. accusare. Already, gia. Architect, architetto. Acquaintance, conoscenza, Also, anche, ancora, altresi, Argue, v. n. argomentare, (friend), conoscente. eziandio. discorrere, ragionare. Acquit, v. a. assplvere. Altar, altare, m. Arm, braccio. Act, atto. Although, benche, sebbene. Army, esercito, armata. Act, v. a. agire. Always, sempre. Arrangement, accomoda- Action, azione, f. Ambitious, ambizioso. mento. Address, indirizzo. America, America. Arrest, v. a. arrestare. Admiration, ammirazione,f. American, Americano. Arrival, arrive. Admire, v. a. ammitare. Amiable, amabile. Arrive, v. n. arrivare. Admission, entrata. Ammunition, munizione, f. Arrow, freccia. Admit, v. a. ammettere. Among, amongst, fra, tra. Art, arte, f. Adorn, v. a. adornare. Ancestors, antenati, pre- Artificial, artificiale, finto. Advance, v. a. avanzarsi. decessori. Artillery, artiglieria. Advantage, vantaggio. Ancfent, antico. Artist, artista, m., rule 370. Advice; consiglio. And, e, ed. As, mentre, come. Advise, v. a. consigliare. Anger, collera. As far as, fino a. Affair, affare, m. Animal, animate. As if, come se. Affection, affetto. Another, un'altra. As soon as, tosto che. Afflicted, afflitto. Answer, v. n. rispondere. Ascribe, v. a. attribuire. ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY. 247 Asia, Asia. abbisognare. sorry, Botany, botanica. Ask, v. a. chiedere, dpman- rincrescere. willing, Both, tutti e due, e...e. dare. volere, esser disposto. Bottle, bottiglia. Asleep, addormentato. Beat, v. a. battere. down, Boulogne, Bologna. Assembly, adunanza. buttar giu. Bow, v. a. fare un inchino a. Assertion, asserzione, f. Beautiful, bello, leggiadro. Box, scatola, cassetta. Assiduous, assiduo. Beauty, bellezza. Boy, ragazzo, fanciullo. Assistance, aiuto. Because, perche, per causa Branch, ramo. Assure, v. a. assicurare. di. Brandy, acquavite. Astonished, attonito. Become, v. n. divenire. Brass, lottone. Astronomer, astronomo. Bed, letto. room, camera Brave, bravo, animoso. Astronomy, astronomia. da letto. Bed (of Bravely, bravamente. At, a, all, punto. last, coal), strato. Bread, pane, m. finalmente. once, Before (prep, of time), Breadth, larghezza. subito. present, ora, avanti, prima di,(prep. Break, v. a. rompere. up, adesso. of place), davanti. separarsi. Athenian, Ateniese. Beg, v. a. pregare. Breakfast, colazione, f. Athletic, d'atleta. Begin, v. n. principiare. Breakfast, v.a. far colazione. Attack, attacco, assalto. Behave, v. n. comportarsi. Brick-dust, polvere di mat- Attack, v. a. attaccare. Behaviour, condotta. toni. Attend, v. a. accudire a Behind, indietro, (adv.) Bridge, ponte. (like Finire). dietro di, (prep.) Brilliant, brillante. Attendant, servo. Belgium, Belgio. Brim (of a hat), le falde (di Attention, attenzione, f. Believe, v. n. credere. un cappello). Aunt, zia. Bell, campanello. Bring, v. a. portare. up, Austrian, Austriaco. Belong, v. n. appartenere. menare. Author, autore. Bench, scranno. British, Brittanico. Autumn, autunno. Bertha, Berta. Brittle, fragile. Avenge , (one's-self), v. r. Beseech, v. a. pregare. Broad, ampio, largo. vendicarsi. Besiege, v. a. assediare. Bronze, bronzo. Avoid, v. a. evitare. Best, migliore. Brook, ruscello. Awake, v. a. svegliare. Betray, v. a. tradire (like Brother, fratello. in-law, Awfully, terribilmente. Finire). cognato. Better, meglio, migliore. Browse, v. a. pascersi. B Between, betwixt, fra, tra. Brutus, Bruto. Back, dosso, schiena. Big, grosso, grande. Build, v. a. fabbricare. Bad, cattivo. Bind, v. a. legare. Building, edifizio, fabbri- Bag, sacco. Bird, uccello. cato. Baggage, bagaglio. Birthday, giorno di nascita. Bullet, palla di fucile. Balance, bilancia. Bit, pezzo. Bull-tight, combattimento Ball, palla, (dancing) ballo. Black, nero. fra uOmini a piedi o a Bank, riva. Blacksmith, fabbroferraio. cavallo con un toro. Banker, banchiere. Blame, v. a. biasimare. Burn, v. a. abbruciare. Barbarous, barbaro. Blotting-paper, carta su- Business, affare, affari. Bark (boat), barca. gante. Busy, affaccendato. Baron, barone. Blow, colpo, botta. Busybody, affannone. Baroness, baronessa. Blue, turchino, azzurro. But, ma. still, pero, ep- Barren, sterile. Board, asse, f. on , a bor- pure. Basket, canestro, paniere. do di. Buy, v. a. comprare. Battery, batteria. Boat, barca, battello. Battle, battaglia. Body, corpo. C Bay, baia. Bonnet, cappellino. Cabbage, cavolo. Be, v. n. and auxiliary, es- Book, libro. binder, lega- Cage, gabbia. sere. able, potere. tore di libri. Cairo, Cairo. afraid, temere. born, Boot, stivale, m. Call, v. a. chiamare. nascere. due, ap- Border, margine, m. orlo, Calm, calma. partenere a. - -obliged, spiaggia. Cambric, cambraia. dovere. necessary, Bore, seccatura. Camelia, camelia. 248 ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY. Camp, campo. Can, I can, posso ; we can, ppssiamo. Cannon, cannone. Canto, canto. Capital (of a country) la capitale ; (funds) il ca- pitale. Captain, capitano. Caravansary, caravansera- glio. Card, carta. Care, pensiero, cura. Carpenter, falegname. Carpet, tappeto. Carriage, carrozza, vettura. Carry, v. a. portare. away, portar via. Cart-load, carro, plur. , carra. Case, caso, soggetto. Cast, v. a. gettare. Castle, castello. Cat, gatto. Catch, acchiappare. hold of, afferrare. Cathedral, cattedrale. Cattle, bestiame. Cause, causa, cagione. Cause, v. a. cagionare. Caution, cautela. Cavern, caverna. Celebrate, v. a. celebrare. Celebrated, (famous), cle- bre. Celebrity, celebrita. Cement, cemento. Century, secolo. Certainly, certamente. Chain, catena. Chair, sedia, s^ggiola. Arm > s ?8Tgi9la a brac- cioli. Easy , sedia d'appoggio. Chairman, presidente. Challenge, sfida. Chance, caso, ventura. Change, v. a. cambiare. Chaplain, cappellano. Character, carattere, m. Charity, carita. Charles, Carlo. Charlotte, Carlotta. Charm, incanto. Cheek, guancia, gota. Cheerful, allegro. Cheese, cacio, formaggio. Cherry, ciriegia. Chicken, pollastro. Child, fanciullo. Chimney-piece, quadro di camino. China, porcellana. Chirp, v. n. cantare. Choleric, collerico. Choose, v. a. scegliere. Christmas, Natale. Chronology, cronologia. Church, chiesa. Circumstance, circpstanza. City, citta. Clean, netto, pulito. Clergyman, parroco, pie- vano. Clever, abile, destro. Climate, clima. Clock, pendola, orologio. O'clock (see rule 548). Cloth (of linen, or cotton) tela, (of wool) panno. Clothes, panni. Cloud, nube, nUvola. Coal, carbon fossile. Coast, costa, spiaggia Coat, vestito, abito. Coffee and coffee-house, caffe. College, collegio. Colonel, colonnello. Colour, colore. Columbus, Colombo. Come, v. n. venire. back, ritornare. in ,entrare. Comedy, commedia. Comely, piacevole, vago, avvenente. Comfortable, confortevole, cQmodo. Command, comando. Command, v. a. comandare. Commerce, commercio. Commercial, commerciale. Commission, commissione. Commit, v. a. commettere. Committee, comitato. Communication, comunica- zione. Companion, compagno. Company, compagnia. Compare, v. a. paragonare. Compass, bUSsola. Compel, v. a. forzare. Complexion, carnagione, f. Compliment, complimento. Compose, v. a. comporre. Conceited, vanitoso. Concert, concerto. Conclude, v. a. conchiu- dere. Condemn, v. a. condannare. Condition, condizione, f. Conduct, v. a. condurre. Conduct, condotta. Confess, v. a. confessare. Confidence, confidenza. Confused, confuso. Conjugate, v. a. coniugare. Conquer, v. a. conquistare. Conscientious, coscienzioso. Consequence, consequenza. Consider, v. a. considerare. Considerable, considera- ble. Conspicuous, cospicuo. Constitute, v. a. cpstituire (like Finire). Construct, v. a. costruire, (like Finire). Contain, v. a. contenere. Continue, v. a. continuare. Contrary, contrario. Contribute, v. a. contri- buire (like Finire). Convenient, conveniente. Conversation, conversazio- ne, f. Copious, abbondante. Copper, rame. Copy, copia. Coriolanus, Coriplano. Corn, frumento. Cornelia, Cornelia. Correct, v. a. corr^ggere. Cost. v. n. costare. Costly, dispendioso. Cottage, capanna. Cotton, cotone, m. Countenance, viso, aspetto, carnagione, f. Country, (in ageneral sense) paese, (out of town), in campagna, (in opposi- tion to the capital) pro- vincia. house, casa di campagna. man, paesano, compatriota. Couple, coppia, paio. Courage, coraggio. Course, corso. Court, corte, f. cortile, m. Cousin, cugino, cugina. Cover, v. a. coprire (like Servire). Craggy, scosceso,diroccato. ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY. 249 Crime, delitto. Description, descrizione, f. Drawing, disegno. Criminal, criminale. Deserve, v. n. meritare. Dress, abito, veste. Croesus, Creso. Desire, desiderio. Dress, v. a. vestire. one's- Cross, v. a. attraversare. Desire, v. a. desiderare,pre- self, vestirsi (like Ser- Crowd, calca, folia. gare ; see rule 300. vire). Crown, corona. Despise, v. a. disprezzare. Drink, v. a. bere. Cruel, crudele. Despotic, despotico. Drinking, il bere. Cruiser, vascello di corso. Dessert, dopopasto. Drive, v. a. guidare. Cry, v. a. grid are. Destine, v. a. destinare. Droll, originale. Crystal, cristallo. Detain, v. a. ritenere. Ductile, duttile. Cultivate, v. a. coltivare. Determine, v. a. determi- Duel, duello. Cur, cagnuccio. nare. Durable, durabile. Curious, curioso. Diamond, diamante, m. During, durante. Custom-house, dogana. Dictates, precetti. Dust, pOlvere, f. Dictionary, dizionario. Duty, dovere, m. D Die, v. n. morire. Dwarf, nano. Danger, pericolo. Difference, differenza. Dangerous, pericoloso. Different, differente. Dare, v. a. ardire, (like Difficult, difficile. E Finire). Diligently, diligentemente. Each, ogni. Dark, oscuro, tenebroso. Diminish, v. n. diminuire Eagle, aquila. Daughter, figlia. (like Finire). Ear, orecchio. Day, giorno, di. Dine, v. n. pranzare. Early, per tempo. Day after-to-morrow, pos- Dining-room, sala da pran- Earn, v. a. guadagnare. domani, m. zo. Earnest, in earnest, sul Dazzle, v. a. abbagliare. Dinner, pranzo. serio, con amore. Dean, decano. Directly, in un subito. Earth, terra. Dear, caro. Director, direttore. Easily, facilmente. Death, morte, f. Disaffection, scontento. Eastern, orientale. Debt, debito. Disarm, v. a. disarmare. Easy-chair, poltrona. Decapitation, decapitazio- Discernible, potevansi ve- Eat, v. a. mangiare. ne, f. dere. Eating, il mangiare. Deceit, frode, f. Disconcert, v. a. sconcer- Ecclesiastic, ecclesiastico. Decide, v. a. decidere. tare. Education, educazione, f. Decision, decisione, f. Discover, v. a. scoprire (like Edward, Odoardo. Deed, azione, f. fatto. Servire). Efface, v. a. cancellare. Deep, profondo. Discovery, scoperta. Effect, effetto. Defeat, v. a. sconfiggere. Discussion, discussione, f. Egg, uovo. Defect, difetto. Disease, malattia. Egypt* Egitto- Defiance, sfida. Disguise, travestimento. Eight, otto. Defray, v. a. pagare. Dishonest, disonesto. Eighty, ottanta. Degree, grado, segno. Dishonour, disonore. Either, o...o, ovvero...ov- Delight, delizia. Dismiss, v. a. dar licenza. vero. Delight, v. a. dilettare. Displease, v.a. dispiacerea. Elect, v. a. eleg-gere. Delightful, dilettevole. Distance, distanza. Election, elezione, f. Dell, valle, f. vallone, m. Distant, distante. Elephant, elefante. Demetrius, Demetrio. Distinguish, v. a. discer- Elizabeth, 'Elisabetta. Demolish, v. a. demolire nere. Eloquence, eloquenza. (like Finire). Divine, divino. Elude, v. a. sfuggire. Deny, v. a. negare. Do, v. a. fare. How do Embark, v. n. imbarcarsi. Depart, v. n. partire (like you do ? come sta ? or Embellishment, abbelli- Servire). come state ? mento. Departure, partenza. Doctor, dottore. Emblem, emblema, m. Depend, v. n. dipendere. Dog, cane. Embroider, v. a. ricamare. Depict, v. a. dipingere. Door, porta. Eminent, eminente. Depot, dep6t. Down, giu. Emperor, imperatore. Depth, profondita. Dozen, dozzina. Empress, imperatrice. Describe, v. a. descrivere. Draw, v. a. disegnare. Encamp, v. n. accamparsi. 250 ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY. Encourage, v. a. incorag- Extend, v. a. stendere. Fire, fuoco. - -wood, legna. giare. Extent, ampiezza. First, primo. End (termination), fine, f. Extraordinary, straprdina- Fish, pesce. Endeavour, sforzo, rio. Five, cinque. Endow, v. a. dotare. Extravagance, stravaganza. Flag, bandiera. Enemy, nemico. Extremely, estremamente. Flatterer, lusingatori. England, Inghilterra. En- Eye, occhio. Fleet, flotta. glish and Englishman, Florence, Firenze. Inglese. F Flower, fiore, m. Enjoy, v. a. godere. Facility, facilita. Flowery, fiorito. Enough, abbastanza. Fair, biondo, hello. Fly,v.n.volare, fuggire(like Enraged, arrabbiato. Faithful, fedele. Servire). into a pas- Enrich, v. a. arricchire (like Faithfully, fedelmente. sion, andare in collera. Finire). Family, famiglia. Follow, v. a. seguire. Enter, v. n. entrare. Famous, famoso. Following, seguente. Enthusiasm, entusiasmo. Far, lontano. Food, cibo, vivanda. Entirely, intieramente. Farm, podere, m. Foot, piede, m. Entreat, v. a. supplicare. Farther, piii lontano. For, per. Entreaty, preghiera. Fashion, moda, guisa. In Force, v. a. forzare. Entrenchments, fortifica- the , alia moda. Foreigner, straniero. zismi, f. Fast, presto. Forest, foresta. Equal, eguale, simile. Fat, grasso. Forget, v. n. scordarsi di. Equal, v. a. pareggiare. Father, padre. in law, Forgive, v. a. perdonare. Erect, v. a. erigere, innal- suocero. Fork, forchetta. zare. Fault (mistake), sbaglio, Form, v. a. formare. Escape, fuga. (error), errore. Former, d'altrevolte. Escape, v. n. scappare, fug- Favour, favore. Formerly, altre volte. gire (like Servire). Favour, v. a. favorire (like Fortress, fortezza. Essay, saggio. Finire). Fortune, fortuna. Establish, v. a. stabilire Favourable, favorevole. Forty, quaranta. (like Finire). Favourite, favorito. Found, v. a. fondare. Esteem, stima. Fear, timore. Foundation, fondamento. Esteem, v. a. stimare. Fear, v. n. temere. Fountain, fontana. Europe, Europa. Fearful, terribile. Four, quaitro. Even, persino. Features, fattezze. Fourteen, quattordici. Evening, sera. February, febbraio. Fourteenth, decimo quarto. Event, evento. Federation, federazione. Fourth, quarto. Ever, mai, sempre. Feeling, sentimento. Fragrance, fragranza. Every, ogni. one, ognuno. Feigned, finto. Frail, fragile. thing, tutto. body, Fellow, compagno. little, Frame, cornice, f. tutti. birichino. France, Francia. Everywhere, da per tutto. Ferdinand, Ferdinando. Francis, Francesco. Examination, esame, in. Fern, felce, f. Frankly, francamente. Excellence, eccellenza. Ferocity, ferocita. Frederick, Federio>. Except, eccetto, tranne. Fertility, fertilita. Freeze, v. n. gelare. Excite, v. a. eccitare. Fetch, v. n. andare a cer French, Francese. Excuse, scusa. care. Frequently, spvente. Execration, esecrazione, f. Few, pochi, poche. Freshness, freschezza. Execute, v. a. eseguire (like Field, campo. Friday, venerdi. Finire). Fifteen, quindici. Friend, amico. Exempt, v. a. esentare. Fifth, quinto. Friendship, amicizia. Exercise, esercizio, tema. Fifty, cinquanta. From, da. Exhibition, esppsizione, f. Fight, v. n. combattere. Fruit, frutto. Exile, esiglio Figure, figura. Fulfil, v. a. adempire. Expect, v. a. aspcttare. Filial, filiale. Full, pieno. Expense, spesa. Find, v. a. trovare. Fund, fondo. Explain, v. a. spiegare. Fine, bello, fino. Furnish, v.a. ammobigliare. Exploit, gesto (rule 420) Finish, v. a. finire. Furnituie, mQbili. ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY. 251 G Green, verde. Himself, egli stesso. Gain, v. a. guadagnare. Grey, grigio. His, il suo, la sua. Gallery, galleria. Groan, v. n. gemere. Historian, storico. Galley, galera. Ground-floor, pianterreno. History, storia. Gamble, v. a. biscazzare. Guard, guard ia. Hollow, cavita. Game, giuoco. Guess, v. n. indovinare. Home, dimora. Garden, giardino. Guest, convitato. Homer, Omero. Gardener, giardiniere. Guide, v. a. guidare. Honest, onesto. Gather, v. a. cOgliere. Guinea, ghinea ; pi. ghinee. Honesty, onesta. Gauntlet, guanto ferrato. Guitar, chitarra. Hope, v. a. sperare. General, generale. in Gun, cannone, fucile. Horse, cavallo. chief, generalissimo. powder, pOlvere da Host, oste. Generally, generalmente. cannone. Hostile, ostile, nemico. Generosity, generosita. Hour, ora. Gentleman, Signore. H House, casa. Geography, geografia. Hair, capelli. How ? come ? many ? George, Giorgio. Half, (noun) meta a. (adjec- quanti ? much, German, Tedesco. tive) mezzo. a crown, quanto. Get, v. a. guadagnare, ot- mezza corona. However, per6, nulladi- tenere. dark, v. i. an- Hall, sala. meno. nottare. Hand, mano, f. Hundred, cento. Gift, dono, regalo. Handle, manico. Hunger, fame, f. Girl, fanciulla, raggazza. Handsome, bello, vezzoso. Hurrah ! Evviva ! Give, v. a. dare. Happen, v. n. accadere. Glance, occhiata. Happy, felice. I Glass, bicchiere. Harbour, pprto. I, io. Gloomy, buio, d'apparenza Hardship, privazione. Ice, ghiacco. melanconica. Harmonious, armonioso. Idiot, idiota, sciocco. Glorious, glorioso, Harold, Aroldo. If, se. If you please, per Glory, gloria. Hat, cappello. piacere. Glove, guanto. Hate, v. a. odiare. Ignorance, ignoranza. Go, v. n. andare. out, Haughty, altiero. Illustration, disegno. uscire. away, andar Have, v. a. avere. Imitate, v. P. imitare. via. He, egli, esso. Immediate, immediate. Goat, capra. Head, testa, capo. Immediately, immediate- God, Dio, Iddio. Health, salute, "f. mente. Gold, oro. Hear, v. a., intendere, Immense, immenso. Good, buono. sentire (like Servire). Importance, importanza. Good-bye, addio. Heart, by heart, a mente. Impossible, impossibile. Good-for-nothing fellow, Heartily, di cuore. Impressive, impressivo. buono a niente. Heaven, cielo. Improve, v. n. migliorare. Goods, beni, roba. Heavy, pesante. Imprudence, imprudenza. Govern, v. a. governare. Height, altezza. at the , Imprudent, imprudente. Government, governo. all' apice. In, in, (hence), fra. Governor, gpvernatore. Help, v. a. aiutare. Inanimated, inanimato. Graceful, grazioso. Henry, Enrico. Inch, dito. Gradually, piii e piu, gra- Her, lei, essa. Indeed, in verita. dualmente. Here, qui, qua. Indignation, indignazio Grammar, grammatica. Here is, ecco qui. ne, f. Grandfather, nonno, avo. Here it is, ^Ccolo, eccola. Induce, v. a. indurre. Grant, v. a. accordare. Here they are, Ccoli, ec- Industry, industria. Grapes, uva. cole. Inferior, inferiore. Grave, grave. Hero, eroe. Infirm, infermo. Gravity, gravita. Hide, v. a. nascondere. Influence, influenza. Great, grande. A great High, alto, pronunciato. Influence, v. a. influenzare. deal, moltissimo. Highly, generosamente. Inform, v. a. istruire (like Greatly, moltissimo. Hill, collina. Finire). Greek, Greco. Him, lui, lo. Ingenious, ingegnoso. 252 ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY. Ingratitude, ingratitudi- Joy, gioia. Leave, v. a. lasciare. ne, f. Judge, giudice. Lecture, discorso, lettura. Inhabitant, abitante. Jug, boccale, m. Lemon, limone, m. Ink, inchiostro. stand, Jump, v. n. saltare. Lend, v. a. prestare. calamaio. Jupiter, Giove. Length, lunghezza. At Inn, albergo. Just, adj. giusto, adv. (just rinalmente. Innocent, innocente. now) questo momento, Less, meno. Innumerable, innumera- or appunto. Lesson, lezione, f. bile. Justice, giustizia. Lest, per paura che (see In order to, per, onde. rule 733). Inquisitive, curioso. K Letter, lettera. Inspire, v. a. inspirare. Keep, v. a. tenere. wait- Liberty, liberta. Instead of, in luogo di, in ing, far aspettare. Life, vita. vece di. Kill, v. a. uccidere. Light, leggero. Institution, istituzione, f. Kind, buono. Light, v. a accendere. Instrument, istrumento. Kind, qualtita, sorte, f. Like, come, simile. Insult, v. a. insultare. Kindness, bonta. Like, v. a. amare, and a re Intelligible, intelligibile. King, re. a genio. Intend, v. a. aver 1'inten- Kneel v. n. inginocchiarsi. Likeness, ritratto. zione, fare i conti. Knife, coltello. Likewise, parimente.anche. Interest, interesse. Knight, cavaliere. Lily, giglio. Interesting, interessante. Knock, v. a. picchiare, bus- Limb, membro. Internal, interne. sare. Line, linea, riga (of writ- International, internazio- Know, sapere, conOscere. ing or print). nale. Knowledge, conoscenze, Lion, leone. Interrogate, v. interrogare. sapere. Listen, v. n. ascoltare. Intersperse, v. a. framesco- Literary, letterario, lette- lare. L rato. Into, in. Lace, merletto. Little, piccolo. Intricate, imbrogliato. Lady, Signora. Young Live, v. n. vivere. Introduce, v. a. introdurre. signorina. Load, v. a. caricare. Invent, v. a. inventare. Lake, lago. Loadstone, calamita. Invention, invenzione, f. Lame, v. a. storpiare. Lodge, v. n. alloggiare. Invest, v. a. investire (like Landlord, proprietario, pa- Lofty, alto, sublime. Servire). drone. London, Londra. Invitation, invito. Landscape, paesaggio. Lonely, isolate. Invite, v. a. invitare. Language, lingua. Long, lungo. Irishman, Irlandese. Large, grande, grosso. Look, v. a. guardare. Iron, ferro. Wrought , Last, passato. night (yes- upon, considerare. ferro battuto. Cast , terday evening) ieri- out, cercardegli occhi. ghisa. sera. Last-night, mean- Looking-glass, specchio. Isabella, Isabella. ing till this morning, Lord, conte, marchese. Island, isola. is translated by " La Lose, v. a. perdere. Issue, successo, impres- notte scorsa." Loss, perdita. sione, f. Late, defunto. Louis, Luigi. It, esso, lo, la. Latter, questo, questi. Louisa, Luigia. Italian, Italiano. Laugh, v. n. ridere. Love, amore, m. Italy, Italia. Law, legge, f. Love, v. a. amare. Lay, v. a. metiere. down, Lowest, infimo. J deporre. the cloth, Luncheon, la seconda co- Jamaica, Giamaica. mettere la tovaglia. lazione, merenda. James, Giacomo. Lean, magro. Lustre, lustro. Jane, Giovanna. Learn, v. a. imparare. January, gennaio. by heart, imparare a M Jewel, gioia. mente. Madeline, Maddalena. John, Giovanni, Learning, sapere. Magazine, rivista, niagaz- Joppa, Giappa. Leather, cuoio. zino. Journey, viaggio. Leave, permissione, f. Magnificent, magnih'co. ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY. 253 Majestic, maestoso. Minister, ministro. for Necklace, monile, vezzo. Majesty, maesta. Foreign Affairs, Mini- Needle, ago. Make, v. a. fare. haste, stro degli AffariEsteri. Negro, negro. dealer, affrettarsi. up one's Minute, minuto. mercante di schiavi. mind, deciders!. Mischief, male. Neighbourhood, vicinato. Man, upmo. of letters, Misfortune, disgrazia. Neighbouring, nel vicinato. letterato. Miss, v. a. mancare. Neither, ne. Mankind, genere umano. Mistake, sbaglio. Nephew, nipote. Manly, virile. Moderate, moderate. Neptune \ettuno. Manner, maniera, usanza. Modesty, modestia. Nest, nido. Manufacture, v. a. fabbri- Moment, momento. Never, non...mai, no, mai. care. Monarch, monarca. New, nuovo. born, pur Many, mold. Monday, lunedi. mo' nato. Marble, marrr.o. Money, danaro, soldi. News, nuova, notizie. Margaret, Margherita. Monkey, scimia. paper, giornale. Mariner, marinarc. Month, mese, m. Next, prossimo. Mark, pegno. Moor, landa, brughiera. Nibble, v. a. morsecchiare. Mark, v. a. marcare. Moralist, moralista. Nice, Nizza. Market, mercato. More, piu. Night, notte, f. Marry, v. a. sposare. Morning, mattina. Nine, nove. Mars, Marte. Mosaic, mosaico (rule 410). Ninth, npno. Marsh, palude, f. Most, il piii. No, no. body, nessuno. Martial, marziale. Mother, madre. in-law, doubt, senza dubbio, Mary, Maria. suOcera. scnz'altro. longer, Master, maestro, padrone, Motive, motivo. non...piu. (see rule 146) piece, Mountain, montagna. Noble, nobile. capo-lavoro. Mouth, bocca. Noise, rumore, strepito. Match, zolfanello. Mouthful, boccata. Nonsense, sciocchezze, Mathematics, matematica. Mr., Signore. spropOsiti. Matter, materia. Mrs., Signora. Noon, mezzogiorno. May, maggio. Much, molto. Nor, ne. Me, mi, me, a me. Mufti, alia borghese. Norman, Normanno. Meadow, prato. Multitude, moltitudine, f. Normandy, Normandia. Means, mezzo. Municipal, municipale. North, tramontana, set- Measure, misura. Museum, museo. tentrione. Meet, or meet with, v. a. Music, mllsica. Not, non. incontrare. Must. I must,debbo. we Nothing, niente, nulla. Meeting, riunione. must, dobbiamo, &c. Nourish, nutrire. Melodious, melodioso. My, il mio, la mia, i miei. Now, adesso, ora. Melt, v. a. fondere. Mysterious, misterioso. Number, numero. Member, membro, pi. Mythology, mitologia. Numerous, numeroso. membri, or membra (rule 420). N O Memory, memoria. Name, nome. Occasion, occasione. Mercury, Mercurio. Naples, Napoli. O'clock, dell' orologio. Mere, puro, mero. Napoleon, Napoleone. Six alle sei (see rule Merit, merito. Narrate, v. a. raccontare. 548). Messenger, messaggiero. Narrow, stretto. October, ottobre. Metal, metallo. Nation, nazione. Obey, v. a. ubbidire (like Microscope, microscopic. National, nazionale. Finire). Midnight, mezzanotte. Natural, naturale. Observe, v. a. osservare. Mildness, dolcezza. Nature, natura. Obtain, v. a. ottenere. Mile, miglio, plur. miglia. Navigation, navigazione. Odd, singolare, bizzarro. Milk jug, boccale da latte. Navigator, navigatore. Of, di. Mind, spirito, mente, f. Near, vicino. Off, in vista di. Mind, v. a. badare a. Nearly, quasi. Offend, v. a. offendere. Mine, il mio, la mia, &c. Necessary, necessario. Offer, v. a. pffrire (like Mineral, minerale, m. Necessity, necessita. Servire). 254 ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY. Office, carica, officio. Parliament (member of),de- Pleasure, piacere. Officer, ufficiale. putato al parlamento. Plot, congiura, trama. Often, sovente, spesso. Parlour, satotto. Plunder, v. a. (persons) sva- Old, vecchio. Part, parte, f., p9rzione, f. ligiare ; (habitations), Olive, uliva. tree, ulivo. Partner, socio. saccheggiare. On, su, sopra. behalf of, Partridge, pernice, f. Pocket, tasca, scarsella. in favore di. Pass, v. n. passare. Poem, poema, m. Once, una volta. At , Passenger, passaggero. Poet, poeta. subito. Passion, passione, f. Poetry, poesia. One, uno, una. Past, passato. Point, v. a. indicare. Only, solo, solamente, non Pasture, v. a. pasturare. Poison, veleno. ...che. Patience, pazienza. Policeman, agente di poli- Open, aperto. Paul, Paolo. zia, sbirro. Open, v. a. aprire (like Pay, v. a. pagare. atten- Policy, politica. Servire). tion to, badare a. Polite, civile, cortese. Opera, Opera. Peace, pace, f. Politics, politica. Operation, operazione, f. Pear, pera. Pomp, pompa. Opposite, opposta. Pearl, perla. Poor, pOvero. Opulence, opulenza Peculiarities, singolarita. Pope, papa. Or, o, ovvero, ossia. Pedestal, piedestallo. Popular, popolare. Orange and or.ange-tree, a- Pekin, Pechino. Popularity, popolarita. rancio. Pen, penna. Port, porto. Orator, oratore. Pencil, lapis, m., matita. Portrait, ritratto. Orchard, pometo. case, porta-lapis. Positively, positivamente. Order, ordine, m. Penetration, acume. Possess, v. a. possedere. Order, v. a. commandare. Penknife, temperino. Possession, possessione, f. Origin, origine, f. Penny, due soldi. Possible, possibile. Original, originale. Pension, pensione, f. Post (for letters), posta ; Other, altro. People, pppolo, gente. (place), posto. Otherwise, altrimenti. Perfectly, perfettamente. Postage-stamp, francobollo. Our, il nostro, &c. Perform, v. a. (to fulfil), a- Posterity, posterita. Ourselves, noi stessi. d empire. To perform, Posture, ppsizione, f. Oval, ovale. (to play) prodursi. Pound, libbra, lira (see rule Over, sopra, di sopra. Perhaps, forse. 656). Overturn, sowertere, ro- Perpetual, perpetuo. Poverty, poverta. vesciare. Perseverance, perseveranza. Powder, polvere, f. Owe, v. n. dovere. Person, persona. Power, potere, m. Own, proprio. Personage, personaggio. Practise, v. a. practicare, Personal, personale. esercitarsi. P Philosopher, filosofo. Praise, lode. Pace, passo. Piano, pianoforte. Praise, v. a. lodare. Pain, male, dolore, m. Pickpocket, borsaiuolo. Precede, prec^dere. Painful, doloroso. Picture, quadro, pittura. Precious, prezioso. Paint, v. a. dipingere. Picturesque, pittoresco. Precipice, precipizio. Paint brush, pennello. Piece, pezzo. Precipitous, precipitoso. Painter, pittore. Pierce, v. a. forare. Prefer, preferire, v. a. (like Painting, pittura, quadro. Pincushion, cuscinetto per Finire). Pair, paio, coppia. le spille. Prejudicial, pregiudicativo. Palace, palazzo. Pink, garpfano. Preparation, preparative. Paper, carta. Place, luogo, sito, posto. Prepare, v. a. preparare. Parasol, ombrellino. Place, v. a. porre. Present, dono, regalo. Parchment, pergamena, Plain, pianura, chiaro. Present, v. a. presentare. carta p^cora. Planet, pianeta, m. Preserve, v. a. preservare. Pardon, v. a. perdonare a. Platina, platino. President, presulente. Parent, padre, madre, ge- Play, v. a. giuocare. on an Pretty, bello, vago. nitore. instrument, suonare. Prevent, v. a. evitare, im- Paris, Parigi. Plead, piatire (like Finire). pedire (like Finire). Park, parco. Pleasing, piacevole. Previous, prima di. ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY. 255 Prey, preda. R Respectfully, rispettosa- Price, prezzo, valore. Rage, rabbia. mente. Pride one's-self, v. r. inor- Rain, pioggia. Respective, rispetliva. goglirsi. Rain, v. i. piovere. Restoration, restaurazione. Prince, principe. Rapaciousness, rapacita. Restore, v. a. rendere. Princess, principessa. , Raphael, Raffaello. Result, risultamento. Principal, principale. Raven, corvo. Resume, v. a. ripigliare. Principle, principio. Ravine, burrone, m. Retire, v. n. ritirarsi. Print, v. a. stampare. Reach, v. a. giungere. Return, ritorno. Printing, stampa. Read, v. a. leggere. Return, v. n. ritornare, Prison, prigione, f. Reading-room, sala di let- scambiare, rispondere. Probably, probabilmente. tura. Reveal, v. a. rivelare. Procession, processione, f. Ready, pronto. Review, rivista. Produce, prodotto. Really, realmente. Revolution, rivoluzione, f. Produce, v. a. produrre. Reason, ragione, f. senno. Reward, ricompensa, taglia. Production, produzione, f. Recall, v. a. richiamare. Ribbon, nastro, fettuccia. Profit, v. n. profittare. Receive, v. a. ricevere. Rich, ricco. Profusion, profusione, f. Recognise, v. a. ricpnOscere. Richard, Riccardo. Progress, progresso. Recommend, v. a. raccom- Riches, ricchezze. Promise, v. a. promettere. mandare. Ride, v. n. cavalcave, an- Proof, prova. Red, rosso. dare a cavallo, Property, proprieta, beni. Re-enter, v. n. rientrare. Right, diritto. Proportioned, proporzio- Reflect, v. a. riflettere. Ring, anello. nato. Regular, regolare. Ring. v. a. and n. suonare. Proposal, proposizione, f. Reign, v. a. regnare. Ripe, maturo. Propose, v. a. proporre. Reindeer, cervo (della Lap- Rise, v. n. levarsi. Prospect, prospettiva,vista. pQnia). River, fiume, m. riviera. Prosperous, prospero. Rejoice, v. a. rallegrarsi. Rivulet, ruscellino. Proud, orgoglioso. Relation, parente, m. Road, strada, cammino. Prove, v. a. provare. Religion, religione, f. Robber, ladro. Provision, provvisione, f. Remain, v. n. rimanere, re- Rock, roccia, rupe, balza. Provoke, v. a. provocare. stare. Roman, Romano. Prudence, prudenza. Remark, v. a. farosservare, Romantic, romantico. Prudently,prudentemente. dire. Rome, Roma. Prussia, Prussia. Remarkably, notevolmente. Romulus, Romolo. Prussian, Prussiano. Remember, v. n. ricordarsi. Room, camera, stanza. Public, pubblico. Remote, rimoto. Drawing , salone. Punish, v. a. punire (like Renowned, rinomato. Rose, rosa. Finire). Repent, v. n. pentirsi. Round, adj. rotondo, prep. Pupil, scolare, allievo. Reply, v. a. rispondere. attorno, intorno. Purchase, compra. Report, rapporto. of a Rout, v. a. sfrattare. Pure, puro, semplice. gun, lo str^pito d'un Royal, reale, regale. Purpose, inter.done. On, cannone. Rude, grossolano, 7,otico, a disegno. Repose, v. r. riposarsi. impertinente. Pursue, v. a. inseguire. Represent, v. a. rappre- Rudely, rozzamente. Pursuit, incalzo. sentare. Ruin, rovina. Put, v. a. mettere. off, Republic, repubblica. Ruin, v. a. rovinare. v. n. indugiare. Reputation, riputazione. Rule, regola. Request, richiesta, do- Run, v. n. correre. Q manda. Rural, campestre. Quantity, quantita. Request, v. a. domandare. Queen, regina. Resemble, v. a. somigliare. S Question (see rule 306). Resist, v. a. resistere. Sack, v. a. saccheggiare. Quickly, presto. Resolve, v. a. risolvere. Safe, adj. sano. Quietly, tranquillamente. Resound, v. a. risupnare, Safety, sicurezza. Quill, penna d'oca. rimbombare. Sail, v. a. far vela. Quire, quinterno di carta. Respect, rispetto. Sailing-vessel, bastimentoa Quite, affatto, interamente. Respectful, rispettoso. vela. 2$6 ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY. Sailor, marinaio. Ship, nave, f. vascello. Spare, v. a. risparmiare. Saladin, Saladino. Shop, bottega. Speak, v. a. parlare. Salary, stipendio. Shore, spiaggia, lido. Speaker, oratore. Same, medesimo, stesso. Short, corto. Special, speciale. Saracen, Saraceno. Show, v. a. mostrare. Species, spezie. Sardinia, Sardegna. Shudder, v. n. tremare. Speculation, speculazione,f. Satin, raso. Shut, shut up, v. a. chiu- Speech, discorso. Satisfied, soddisfatto, con- dere. Spend, v. a. spendere. tento. Side, parte, f. Spirited, animato. Satisfy, v. a. soddisfare. Side-board, credenza. Spite, rancore, m. Inspite Saturday, sabato. Siege, assedio. of, ad onta di. Saturn, Saturno. Sight, vista, prospettiva. Splendid, magnifico. Save, v. a. salvare. By , di vista. Spoil, v. a. guastare. Saxon, SaSsone. Silver, argento. Sport, divertimento. Scale, bilancia, guscio. Simple, semplice. Spread, v. a. distendere. Scene, scena, teatro. Simplicity, semplicita. Spring (season), primavera. Scheme, progetto. Since, di poi, da, poiche. (source), fonte, sor- School, scupla. since that, dacche. gente. Science, scienza. Sing, v. a. cantare. Squander, v. a. sciala- Scorn, disprezzo. Singer, cantante. cquare. Scotland, Scozia. Single, solo, semplice. Stage, scena, teatro. Sculptor, scultore. Sir, Signore. Staircase, scala. Sculpture, scultura. Sire, Sire. Star, stella. Sea, mare. coast, spiaggia Sister, sorella. Start, v. n. partire. up, del mare. Sister-in-law, cognata. saltar su. Season, stagione, f. Sit, v. n. sedere, sedersi. State, stato. Seat-one's-self, v. n. sedersi. Situation, situazione, f. Statement, dichiarazione, f. Second, secondo. Six, sei. Statue, statua. Secretary, secretario. Sixth, sesto. Steal, v. a. ruhare. Secretly, segretamente. Sixty, sessanta. Steam-boat, battello a va- See, v. a. vedere. again, Sketch, schizzo. pore. rivedere. Skip about, v. n. saltellare. Steel, acciaio. Seek, or seek for, v. a. cer- Slate, lavagna. Steward, castaldo. care. after, ricercare. Sleep, v. n. dormire (like Stick, bastone, m. Seem, v. n. parere, sem- Servire). Still, v. a. quietare. brare. Slow, slowly, adagio. Still, adv. eppure. Seldom, di rado, raramente. Small, piccolo. Stock, v. a. fornire. Sell, v. a. vendere. Smile, v. n. ridere. Stone, pietra, sasso. Send, v. a. mandare. Snow, neve. Stop, v. a. and n. fermare, Sentry, sentinella, m. and f. Snow, v. i. nevicare. fermarsi. Separate, v.a. disgiungere. So, cosl. Story, storiella. Servant, servo. Society, societa. Stout, grosso. Service, servizio. Soldier, soldato. Straight, diritto. Seven, sette. Seventeen, Solon, Solone. Strange, strano, bizzarro. diciassette. Seventy, Some, del, dello, &c., al- Stranger, forestiero. settanta. cuno, &c. , qualche, Strawberry, fragpla. Several, molti, parecchi. poco (po'). Stream, ruscello, riviera. Severely, severamente. Something, qualche cosa.. Street, strada, via. Sew, v. a. cucire. again, Sometimes, qualche volta. Strength, robustezza, forza, ricucire. Son, figlio. fortezza, potere, m. Shadow, ombra. Song, canzone, f. Strike, sciopero. Shame, vergogna. Sonnet, sonetto. Strike, v. a. battere, ferire Share, parte, f. Soon, tosto, presto. (like Finire). She, ella, essa. Sound, suono, rimbombo. Strikingly, sorprendente- Sheep, pecora. Source, sorgente, f. mente. Sheet, foglip. South, mezzogiorno. Strong, forte, potente. Shield, scudo. Spain, Spagna. Student, scolare, alunno. Shilling, scellino. Spanish, spagnuolo. Study, studio. ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY. 257 Study, v. a. studiare. Telescope, cannocchiale,m. Title, titolo. Style, stile, in. Tell, v. a. dire. To, prep, a or onde (see Subject (of a monarch), Temptation, tentazione, f. rule 225). sllddito. Ten, died. To, a verbal prefix, is not Substance, materia. Tend, v. n. inclinare translated (see rules Succeed, v. n. riuscire, suc- Terror, spavento. 226 and 227). c^dere (see rule 258). Than, che. To-day, oggi. Success, successo, esito. Thank, v. a. ringraziare. Together, insieme. Succession, successione, f. That, quello, quel, quella, Token, segno. Such, tale. a, un tale. che. To - morrow, domani. as, tale quale. The, 51, lo, la, &c. after, posdomani. Sudden, improvviso. Theatre, teatro. Too, anche. Too (mean- Suddenly, all' improvviso. Theatrical, teatrale. ing too much), tropj o. Suffer, v. n. soffrire (like Theft, ladrocinio. Tooth, dente. Servire), patire (like Their, il loro, la loro, &c. Top, sommita, vetta. Finire). Them, loro, essi, esse. Torrent, torrente. Sufficiently, abbastanza. Then (at that time), allora. Toulon, Tolone. Suggest, v. a. suggerire Then (therefore), dunque. Towards, verso. (like Finire). There, la, li. Tower, torre, f. Sum, somma. There is, c'e, or v'e. Town, citta. Summer, estate, f. There are, ci sono, or Trace, traccia. Sun, sole, m. vi sono, &c. 1 Tract, tratto. Superfluous, superfluo. These, questi, queste. Trade, mestiere, m. com- Superstition, superstizione. They, eglino, elleno, essi. mercio. By , di Support, in support, per Thief, ladro. mestiere. corroborare. Thimble, ditale, m. Tradition, tradizione, f. Support, v. a. sostenere, Thing, cosa. Tragedy, tragedia. sopportare. Think (of), v. n. pensare a, Train, treno, traino. Suppose, v. a. supporre. credere. Train, v. a. allevare, istrui Sure, sicuro, certo. Third, terzo. re. Surface, superficie, f. Thirteen, tredici. Traitor, traditore. Surprise, v. a. sorprendere. Thirty, trenta. Translate, v. a. tradurre. Surround, v. a. circondare. This, questo, questa. Translation, traduzione, f. Surrounding, circonvicino. Thomas, Tommaso. Transmit, v.a. trasmettere. Sustain, v. n. subire (like Thorn, spina. Travel, v. n. viaggiare. Finire). Thoroughly, completamen- Treasure, tesoro. Sweet, dolce. te. Tree, albero. Sweetheart, amante. Those, quelli, quei, quelle. Trifles, coserelle. Swim (about), v. n. guiz- Thou, tu. Triumphant, trionfante. zare. Though, quantunque, seb- Troops, trwppe, esercito. Switzerland, Svizzera. bene. Trouble, fatica. Sword, spada. Thought, pensiero. Troy, Troia. Thousand, mille, migliaio. True, vero. T Thread, filo. Trunk, tronco, baule. Table, tavola. Three, tre. Trust, v. a. confidare. Take, v. a. prendere. a Through, per, a traverso. one's-self, confidarsi. walk, fare una passeg- Throsv, v. a. gettare. Truth, verita. giata. away, condur Thunder, tuono. Tune, aria. via. care, aver cura. | Thursday, giovedi. Turbot, rombo. off, levare, 0rlevarsi. ( Thy, il tuo, la tua, i tuoi, Turk, Turkish, Turco. Talent, talento. le tue. Turmoil, fracasso. Talk, v. a. chiacchierare. Ticket, biglietto. Tutor, precettore, maestro. Talker, parlatore, ciarlone. Tiger, tigre, f. Twelve, dodici. Tall, grande, alto. Till, fino, infino. Twenty, venti. Tartary, Tartaria. Time, tempo, volta (see Twice, due volte. Tax, taxation, tassa. rule 602). Twilight, crepUscolo. Tea, te. cup, tazza da te. Tint, tinta, colore, m. Two, due. Teach, v. a. insegnare. Tired, stance. Tyrant, tiranno. 2 5 '* ENGLISH-ITALIAN VOCABULARY. u View, vista prospettiva. While, whilst, mentre. Ugly, brutto. v. a. esaminare. White, bianco. Umbrella, ombrello. Village, viliaggio. Who, he who, chi. Uncle, zio. Vinditive, vindicativo. Whole, tutto. Uncommon, straordinario. Virtue, virtu, f. Whom, cui, quale, &c. Under, sotto. Visit, v. a. visitare. Whose, di che, del quale, Understand, v. a. capire Vivacity, vivacita. &c. (see rule 619). (like Finire). Vivid, vivido, allegro. Why ? perche ? Understanding, ingegno. Voice, voce, f. Wide, largo. Undertake, v. a. intrapr^n- Volcano, vulcano. Widower, vedovo. dere. Vote, v. a. votare. Wife, moglie. Undertaking, impresa. William, Guglielmo. Unfortunate, sfortunato. W Wind, vento. Unfortunately, sfortunata- Waistcoat, panciotto, sot- Window, finestra mente. toveste, gile. Wine, vino. Uniform, uniforme, m. Wait, v. n. aspettare. Winter, inverno. Universal, universale. Waiter, garzone. Wise, saggio, savio. University, universita. Wales, Gallia. Wisely, saviamente. Unless, a meno che. Walk, passeggiata. Wish (to desire), v. a. bra- Unpardonable, imperdona- Walk, v. n. camminare. mare, desiderare. To bile. Wall, muro. wish (to somebody Unsheath, v. a. sguainare. Wallet, valigia. else), v. a. augurare. Until, fino. Wander, v. a. vagare. Wit, ingegno, spirito, bell" Up, upon, su, sopra. up Want, mancanza. ingegno. and down, su e giii. Want, v. n. abbisognare di. With, con. Uranus, Urano. War, guerra. Without, senza, fuori. Us, noi. Warble, v. a. cantare. Witness, v. a. assistere a. Use (to be accustomed), v. Warlike, bellicoso. Witty, spiritoso. n. solere. To use (to Warm, caldo, ardente. Woman, donna. make use of), v. a. ser- Warmly, affezionatamente. Wonderful, meraviglioso. virsi di. To use (to Warrior, guerriero. Wood, bosco. wear out), v. a. usare. Wash (one's-self), v. r. la- Wool, lana. Useful, Utile. varsi. Word, parola. Useless, inutile. Watch, oriuolo. Work, lavoro. Water, v. a. annaffiare. Work, v. a. lavorare. Water, acqua. Soda , ac- Workman, operaio. V qua di seltz. World, mondo. Vain, vano, inutile. In , Wave, onda. Worst, peggiore. invano. Way,strada,modo,maniera. Worthy, degno. Valour, valore, m. We, noi. Wound, ferita. Valuable, prezioso. Weapon, arma. Write, v. a. scrivere Variety, varieta. Wear, v. a. portare. Writing-desk, scrittoio. Vase, vaso. Weather, tempo. Writing-paper, carta da Vast, vasto. Wednesday, mercoledl. scrivere. Venice, Venezia. Week, settimana. Venus, Venere. Weight, peso. Y Verb, verbo. Well, bene. Yard, braccio. Verdure, verdura. Well ! Ebbene ! Year, anno. Verse, verso, poesia. Western, occidentale. Yellowish, giallognolo. Blank , verso sciolto. What, che, che cosa, quale, Yes, si. Very, molto, assai. much, cio che. Yesterday, ieri. moltissimo. soon, Whatever, checche. Yet, ancora. presto, fra poco. When, quando. Yield, v. a. c^dere. Vessel, vascello, nave, f. Whence, donde. You, voi, ella. Vice, vizio. Where, dove. Young, giovane. man, Vicious, vizioso. Wherever, ovunque. giovinotto. Victim, vittima. Whether, se. Your, vpstro. self, voi, Victory, vittoria. Which, che, quale. voi medesimo. 259 VOCABULARY. PART II. ITALIA NENGL ISH. A Angusta, narrow. Avvolve (s') coils up. A, to, at. Anima, soul. Azzurrina, azure. Abbandonata, abandoned. Anno, anni, year, years. Accanto, at the side of. Ansia, anxiety. B Acqua, water. Appare, it appears. Bacia, it kisses. Addorme, v. a. lulls to Appena, scarcely. Bagni, it bathes. sleep. Appressar, approaching. Ballo, ball, dance. Acre, air (see page 1 14). Aprile, April, spring. Basso, low. Affanna, he afflicts. Arbitro, judge. Battaglia, battle. Affanno, affanni, sorrow, Arboscello, shrub. Beate, happy. sorrows. Ardea, it was burning. Bel, bello, bella, bell', bei, Affetti, affections. Ardiscon, they dare. begli, beautiful. Affidi, you trust. Ardor, warmth. Bellezza, beauty. Affretta, she hastens. Ardua, difficult. Belta, beauty, beauties (see Ahi '! alas ! Arena, arene, sands, shores. page 114). Al, all', alle, ai, to the. Argento, silver. Ben, love. Alba, dawn. Aria, air. Benche, although. Allegrati, rejoice. Armato, armed. Bene, blessing. Alma, soul, mind (see page Aroma, fragrance. Ben e ver, it is quite true. 114). Arsi, I burnt. Benefattor, benefactor. Almen, at least. Ascolta, listen. Benefica, beneficent. Alpe, Alpi, Alps. Aspettando, awaiting. Benignamente, kindly. Alta, high. Assalse, it assailed. Braccio, braccia, arm, arms. Altar, altar. Assise (si), placed himself. Brando, sword. Altezza, height. Assonna, it lulls to sleep. Brillar, to shine. Altier, proud. Attende, he awaits. Brine, hoar-frosts. Altro,other, another. che, Atterra, he prostrates. more than. Attonita, astonished. C Altrui, others. Aura, breeze (see page Cada, it falls. Ama, he loves. 114). Cadde, he, it fell. Amator, lover. Aurati, golden. Cagione, cause. Ambo, ambe, both. Aureo, golden. Calpestar, to trample on. Amico, friendly. Auretta, gentle breeze (see Calpesto, trodden upon. Ammiro, I admire. page 114). Campo, campi, field, fields. Amor, amore, love. Aurora, dawn. Cangiar, to change. Amorosa, love inspiring. Avanza, it advances. Cantico, song. Anche, anch', also. Avea, I had. Canto, song. Ancor, also. Avvezza, accustomed. Canzone, canzoni, song, Andar, gait. Avvien, it happens. songs. Anelo, breathless. Avvio, it sent him. Capei, hair (see page 114). Angelica, angelic. Avvolgea, twisted. Capo, head. 260 ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. Caro, cari, dear. Casti, chaste, pure. Cavalli, horses. Cedrati, citron trees. Celere, rapid. Celeste, heavenly. Ceneri, ashes. Che, ch', who, that, what, which, so that. Che, for, why. Chi, who, he who, whom. Chiama, he, it calls. Chiamando, calling. Chiare, clear. Chiede, he asks. Chiesi, I asked. Chinati, bent down. Chiniam, we bend low. Chino (si), it beni itself. Chiude, it encircles. Chiuse, he ended, finished. Cielo, ciel, sky, heavens. Cinta, girt. Circonfusa, bathed. Codardo, cowardly. Col, coll', co', with the. Colline, hills. Color, colours. Colora, it colours. Coltrice, bed (lit. coverlet). Come, how, as if, like. Commosso, moved. Compianga,you sympathise with. Comune, common. Con, with. Conchiglia, sea shell. Concitato, rapid. Conflitto, conflict. Confuso, confused, inter- mingled. Consegno, I consign. Conserte, crossed. Consola, gives consolation. Contende, it objects. Comrade, countries. Contro, against. Convalli, valleys. Coralli, corals. Core, cor, heart. Coronata, crowned. Cosa, thing, being. Cosi, thus, even so. Creator, creating. Crede, it believes. Creder6, I shall think. Croce, cross. Crudele, cruel. Cruenta, blood-stained. Cui, whom, which. Cumulo, heap. Cuor, cuore, heart. Cura, care. D Da, from, by. Da, she gives. Dal, dall' dai, dagli, from the. Danni, ills, woes. Danze, dances. Dar, to give. Dato, (having) given. Degradato, degraded. Dei, gods. Del, della, dell', dei, de', degli, of the. Deserta, deserted. Desir, desires. Desto, it kindled. Destra, right. Di, d', of. Di, day, days. Dice, he, she says, names. Dicendo, saying. Diciam, we say. Difende, it defends. Diletto, delight, pleasure. Dimmi, tell me, bid me. Dio, God. Dipinto, painted. Dir, v. a. to say. Dirmi, to tell me. Discorda, it is out of har- mony. Disdegna, she disdains. Disegno, design. Disotto, under. Dispero, he lost hope. Diversa, different. Divien, it becomes. Divina, heavenly. Divisa, divided. Dolcezza, sweetness. Dolci, sweet. Donde, whence. Donna, woman, lady. Dono, gift. Dopo, after. Dov', dove, where. Dovunque, wherever. Drappello, troop of soldiers. Dubbiosi, anxious. Due, duke, leader Due, two. Dunque, then. Dura, it lasts. E, ed, and. E, he, she, it is. Ecco, behold. Egli, he. Ella, she. Empi, you fill. Era, it was. Erano, they were. Erbetta, grass. Erma, secluded. Erra, it wanders. Esca, food, bait. Esecrando, esecranda, exe- crable. Esiglio, exile. Essi, they. Estreme, last. Eterne, eterni, eternal. Fa, makes. Si fa, it makes itself. Falso, false. Fanti, foot-soldiers. Fare, far, to make, to do. Farsi, to make itself. Fate, fairies. Fato, fate, destiny. Fattor, maker. Favella, language. Fe', he did. Fede, faith, belief. Fedele, faithful. Ferire, ferir, to wound, wounding. Ferro, weapon. Ferve, it is fervent, boils. Fiera, fierce, brave. Figlia, daughter. Fin, even. Fine, end. Fior, fiori, flowers. FIbile, doleful. Flpridi, blooming. Flutto, waves, sea. Follia, folly. Folti, thick. Fonte, fonti, fountain, fountains, springs. Forma, form. Forse, perhaps. Forte, brave man. Fosse, he was. Fra, between, amongst. Fratelli, brotheis. ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 26l Fronde, leaves, branches. I If Fronte, brow. I, the. Ma, but. Fu, he, it was. Ignobile, ignoble. Madri, mothers. Fuga, flight. 11, the, it. Maga, enchantress. Fulgor, splendour. Immemore, unconscious, Maggior, greater. Fulmine, thunderbolt. uncared for. Mai, ever. Fulminei, beaming. Immense, immense. Mai, badly. Furente, maddened. Immerge, he plunges. Male, ill, woe. Furono, they were, they Immobile, motionless. Man, hand. have gone. Immortal, immortal. Manco, less. Impalidir, becoming pale. Mandola, mandoline. G Imperio, command. Manipoli, battalions. Genio, genius. Imperli, it decks with pearls. Mar, mari, sea, seas. Gentile, gentle. Implora, he implores. Maraviglia, wander. Gia, already. Imprese, he undertook. Marina, sea-shore. A by Giacque, he laid down, he In, on. the sea-shcre. lay low. Incalza, pursue hotly. Marte, mars, war. Giammai, ever. But when Incarco, burden. Massimo, greatest. " giammai " is used Incerto, uncertain. Mattin, morning. with a negation, it is Incontro, against. Mattine, mornings. translated by never. Indocile, unchecked. Mattutina, in the morning. Giardini, gardens. Indpmato, unabated. Me, m', me, from me. Gigli, lilies. Indura, he hardens himself. Melanconia, melancholy. Giocondo, pleasant. Inerte, idle. Memorie, recollection. Gioia, joy. Inestinguibil, unquenched, Mente, mind, memory. Gioioso, happy. unassuaged. Mentr', whilst. Giorno, day. Infelice, unhappy. Merce, reward. GiOvin, youth. Innanzi, forward. Meriggio, mid-day. Giro (noun) turn. In giro, Intender, to understand. Mesce, it mixes itself. around. Move in giro, Intrisa, soaked. Mezzo, middle. spans the heavens. Invan, in vain. Mi, in', me, to me. Giro, I turn. Invidia, jealousy. Miei, my. Giunge, it arrives at it. lo, i', I. Miglior, better. Giurato, sworn. Ira, anger. Mille, a thousand. Gli, the, to him, to it, to Istante, instant. Mio, mia, my, mine. them. Mira, he looks. Gloria, glory. L Miracol, miracle. Gran, great. La, le, P, the, her, it. Misero, miserable. Gratitudine, gratitude. Lago, lake. Mista, mingled. Grato, grateful. Lampo, lightning. Misura, measures. Grave, heavy. Lasciarmi, to leave me. Mobili, changing. Grazi'oso, graceful. Lati, sides. Mondo, world. Grembo, lap. Laudare, v. a. to praise. Monile, necklace. Gridammo, we cried. Laureti, laurel groves. Montagna, mountain. Grido, gridi, cry, cries. Le, the, from her. Monte, monti, hill, hills. Gronda, pours down. Lei, her, it. Morir, morire, to die. Guancial, pillow. Li, them. Mormorando, murmuring. Guardando, looking. Lignaggio, race, lineage. Morra, he, it will die. Guardare. to look. Lingua, tongue. Morta, dead. Guardo, guardi, look, looks. Linguaggio, language. Mortal, mortale, mortal. Guerra, war. Lo, the, him, it. Mortalmente, mortally. Guerrieri, warriors. Lontana, distant. Morte, death. Gusta, it enjoys. Lor, them, their. Mostrare, to show. Luce, light. Mostrasi, she shows her- H Lui, him, he, it. self. Ha, he, it has. Lume, light, brilliancy. Mova (si), there moves. Hai, you have. Luna, moon. Move, it moves. Hanno, they have. Lunghi, long. Muta, dumb-struck. 262 ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. N P Prepari (ti), you prepare Nacque, he was born. Pacato, calm. yourself. Narrar, to relate. Pace, peace. Primavera, spring. Nato, born. Padri, fathers. Primo, first. Natura, nature. Pagine, pages. Privo, deprived. Naufrago, shipwrecked. Pago, satisfied. Procellosa, stormy. Ne, of it, to us. Palmeti, palm groves. Prode, shores. Ne, nor. Par, pare, it appears. Prpfonda, profound. Nel, nella, nell', nei, ne', Parea, it appeared. Prova, he experiences. in the. Pari, equal. Provo, he experienced. Nembo, cloud, shower. Parian, they speak. Prudenti, prudent. Nevi, snows. Parola, parole, word, words. Pugna, he fights. Ninfa, nymph. Nodi, curls. Pass5, it passed away. Pavidi, terrified. Puo, he, it can. Pur, yet, merely, really. Noi, we. Pel, pei, for the, through Pura, pure. Nom6 (si), he named him- self. the. Pellegrina, wandering. Pur dianzi, just now. Non, not. Pena, pain. Q Notte, night. Pendice, brow of the hill. Qual, quale, who, which, Nudrice, mother. Penne, feathers, wings. what, like. Nunzio, announcement. Pensando, thinking. Quando, when. Nuovi; new. Pensieri, thoughts. Quante, how many. Nuvoli, clouds. Per, for, through, in order to, on account of. Quei, those, he who. Quel, quella, quell', that. Perche, why. Questo, questa, this. Percossa, struck. Qui, here. O, or, either. Perde, he lost. Quinci, on this side. 6, O! Periglio (poet, for pericolo), Quindi, on that side. Obbedir, to obey. danger. Oblio, oblivion, neglect. Perla, pearl. R Occhi, eyes. Pesa, it weighs. Raccogli, stay. Ode, s'ode, one hears. Petto, breast. Raddoppia, redoubles. Qdio, hatred. Piacente, charming. Raggio, ray. Odorose, perfumed. Piacer, piaceri, pleasures. Rai, rays (see page 114). Qgni, each, every. Piangi, weep. Rapivi, you stole. Ognor, always. Pianto, weeping. Rea, wicked (see page 121). Ognun, each one. Pie, foot. Recinta, surrounded, girt. Olenti, sweet scented. Pien, full. Reggia, royal abode. Oltra, beyond. Pieta, pity, sympathy. Regina, queen. Oltraggio, outrage. Pietosa, solemn. Regno, reign, power. Ombra, shade. Pietosi, compassionate. Remote, distant. Ombroso, shady. Piramidi, Pyramids. Rende, it gives. Onda, onde, wave, waves. Piii, more, il piu, the most. Respingon, clash against. Onde, by which. Placar, to pacify. Ria, insulting. Onesta, honest, modest. Poi, then, after. Riaprendo, re-opening. Onor, honours. Polve (poet. ), polvere, dust. Ricantando, singing over Onorava, he honoured. Pone, he places himself. again. Opre, works. Popolo, people. Ricchezza, riches. Or, ora, now. Portento, miracle. Riceve, it receives. Ora, ore, hour, hours. P9si, you rest. Riconosco, I recognise. Orba, bereaved. Pos6, he rested. Ride, he, it smiles. Orgoglio, pride. Posteri, posterity. Rimbomba, re-echoes. Orma, mark, foot-print. Potere, power. Rinserra, it contains. Ornato, adorned. Praticello, meadow. Rio, brook. Oro, gold. Preme, weighs you down. Ripens6, he thought again. Qscura, dark. Premio, reward. Rischi, risks, perils. Ottiene, he, it obtains. Prende, it takes. Riso, smile. Ozio, idleness. Preparazione, preparation. Risorse, he rose again. ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 263 Risplende, it shines. Sfolgorante, shining. Sta, it remains. Risponde, it answers. Si, s', himself, herself, Stampar, to mark. Ritornera, it will return. itself, themselves. Stanca, fatigued. Ritorneranno, they will SI, so much. Stanche, fatigued. return. Sia, she may be. Stanzetta, little room. Rivo, brook. Sicche, in such a manner Stellate, starry sky. Rondinella, swallow. that. Stesso, himself. Rose, roses. Siccome, just as. Stette, he, it stood. Rote, wheels. Silenzio, silence. Stolti, foolish. Rugiada, dew. Simile, similar. Straniero, foreigner. Sin che, so long as. Strappar, to snatch away. S Sinistra, left. Strazio, torture. Sa, it knows how to, it can. Sirena, syren. Su, upon, on. Sacrilege, sacrilegious. So, I know. Subit', di subit', at once. Saggio, wise man. Sofferto, suffered. Subito, sudden. Saluta, she greets, salutes. Soglio, throne. Sul, sulla, sull', on the, in Salutando, greeting. Sogno, dream. the. Salva, safe, free. Sol, solo. Suo, sua, sue, his, hers, its. San, they know. Sola, alone, only. Suolo, soil. Sangue, blood. Sole, sun. Suon, supni, sound, sounds. Sanno, they know. Solingo, lonely. Supnavan, they sounded. Sara, it will be. Solitaria, solitary. Superba, proud. Scarsi, scarce, bereft. Sommessi, humbly. Supina, languid. Scendi, you descend. Son, I am. Suscita, it raises up. Scernere, to perceive. Sonito, sound, din. Sventura, misfortune. Scese, it descended. Sonno, sleep. Scherzi, it may sport, it Sono, I am, they are. T may ripple. Sopra, on, concerning. Tacito, silent. Schierato, in battle array. Sorge, it rises. Tacque, it was silent. Schiudon, they open. Sospir, sospiro, sigh. Tale, tal, such, even so. Scioglie, it bestows. Sospira, sigh. Tanto, so great. Sconsolata, disconsolate. Sott' onda, submarine. Te, t', you, to you. Scoppio, it burst out. Sovra, upon. Teme, it fears. Scorato, discouraged. Sovvenir, remembrance. Tempo, time. Scorrea, it was looking. Spade, swords. Tempre, quality. Scorri, you cross over. Sparir, disappearing. Tenea dietro, it followed. Scrivi, write. Sparito, disappeared. Tenebre, darkness. Se, s', if. Sparsi, dishevelled. Tende, tents. Se stesso, himself. Sparve, he disappeared. Terra, earth, land. Secoli, centuries. Speme,hope (see page 1 14). Terreno, terren, ground. Secure, secure, fearless. Speranza, hope. Terror, terror. Segno, sign, mark. Sperar, to hope. Tesa, extended, intent. Sei, se', you are. Sperdi, do thou divert. Ti, t', you, yourself. Sempre, always. Spiegato, unfurled. Tiene, he holds. Sen, seno, breast. Spirabil, breathing. Tiranni, tyrants. Senso, sense, sentiment. Spiro, spirit. Tolta, taken away. Sentendosi, hearing her- Spirito, spirto (see page Tomba, tomb. self. 114), spirit. Tornata, having returned Sentenza, decision. Spoglia, corpse. (see rule 200). Senti, you feel. Spogliar, to take off. Torrenti, torrents. Sentier, paths. Spose, wives. Tra, amongst, between. Senz', senza, without. Sposo, husband, mate. Traluce, appears, shines. Sera, evening. Spregio, contempt, thral- Trapassero, I shall outpass. Sereno, serena, cloudless. dom. Traspar, appears. Serve, he serves. Sprezzato, despised. Trasporto, it transported. Settembre, September. Spunta, it appears, looms Trasse, unsheathed. Sfere, spheres. in the distance. Tremando, trembling. Sfida, he defies. Squillo, blast of a trumpet. Trepida, anxious. 264 ITALIAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. Trionfi, triumphs. Val, it is worth. Vicende, events. Triquetra, ancient name for Valida, helping. Vide, he, it saw. Sicilia, Sicily. Valli, bulwarks. Vidi, I saw. Tristo, sad. Vanno, they go. Viene, vien, it comes. Tromba, trumpet. Vasta, vast, wide. Vigile, vigilant. Troverai, you will find. Vedo, I see. Vile, vile. A , in con- Troncator, abbreviator Vedovetta, little widow. tempt. Tu, thou. Vedrai, you will see. Virtu, virtue, valour. Tua, tue, thy. Vegliardi (poet, for " vec- Viso, face. Tuo, thy. chi)," old men. Vista, sight, view. Tuoi, thy, your. Velo, veil. Vita, life. Turba, crowd. Vendetta, vengeance. Vittoria, victory. Tutte, tutti, all. Venduto, sold. Viviamo, we live. Tutto, tutta, all, everything. Venga, he comes. Vivo, lively, brilliant. Venne, nevenne, he, it came. Vivro, I shall live. U Venuto, venuta, come. Voce, voice. Ubbidir, v. n. to obey. Ver, truth. Voi, you. Udir, v. a. to hear. Vera, true. Vplle, he willed. Ultima, last. Veri, true. Volo, flight. Umana, human. Vermigli, red. Volsero, they turned them- Umilita, humility. Verone, verandah. selves. Umor, moisture. Verra, it will come. Volta. vault, dungeon. Un,uno, una, un',one,an. a. Versar, to pour down, to Volte, times. Uomo, uom, man. bestow. Volto, volti, face, faces. Urna, urn. Verso, towards. Vu9i ? will you ? Vespertina, in the evening. V Vessiilo, standard. Z Va, he, she, it goes. Veste, it clothes. Zaffiro, sapphire. Vago,vaga,beautiful,lovely. Vesti, clothes. Zeffiretto, zephyr, breeze. WORKS BY PROFESSOR N. PERINI. PUBLISHED BY MESSRS. HACHETTE & Co., 18, KING WILLIAM STREET, CHARING CROSS, LONDON, W.C. " La Vita Nnova," by Dante Alighieri, with Notes and Comments in English. Imperial i6mo, cloth lettered, 2s. 6d. " A First Italian Reading Book," containing Prose and Poetry, with Rules for the Pronunciation of the Italian Language, with Notes, .Hints on Italian Versification, and a Complete Vocabulary of all the words con- tained in the Text, in which the "tonic accent" is marked in darker type, and the proper pronunciations of the Letters " E," " O," " S," and " Z " are indicated. Cloth gilt, 2s. 6d. The First Chapters of "I Proinessi Sposi," by Manzoni, followed by a repetition of the text, with an English Interlinear Translation. Cloth gilt, 2s. 6d. " La Clenienza di Tito," by Metastasio, followed by a repetition of the text of the First Act, with an English Interlinear Translation, and numbers indicating the position of the words in the Text. Cloth gilt, 2s. 6d. Questions and Exercises on the Grammar and Idioms of the French Language; with answers to the most Important Questions, and a Repe- tition of all the Questions, for the purpose of Class, or Self-Examina- tion. Ninth edition. Price 2s. The above work, now in the hands of all Candidates preparing for all the Com- petitive Examinations, contains all the most important questions on the Grammar and Idioms of the French Language. Each question is followed by a blank for the answer thereto. "The Bridge," or Exercises on Useful English Words, Phrases and Proverbs, for translation into other languages. On the same plan as the above-mentioned work. Second edition. Price gd. Extracts in English Prose, from the Best Authors; arranged pro- gressively for translation into other languages, The extracts are divided into numbered sections, to facilitate translation at sight, in class. Third edition. Price 2s. Five-and-Twenty Exercises on French Verbs, with an Index for Examina- tion. Large 8vo, 24 pages, in paper cover. Eighth edition. Price 6d. A " Key " to this work, sold to Teachers only. Price is. The above work is intended to meet a want long felt in English Schools. The plan of the book is very simple, and yet it goes thoroughly into the subject. It possesses, moreover, the great advantage of entirely relieving the teacher of the tire- some and laborious task of setting verbs to conjugate. Genealogical and Chronological Tables of the Kings and Princes of France. Price is. LIBRAIRIE HACHETTE & CIE., LONDON : 18, KING WILLIAM STREET, CHARING CROSS. The Catalogue of the firm, containing a complete list of their Classical and Prize Books will be sent free by book-post on application. THE PUBLIC SCHOOL GERMAN GRAMMAR With Exercises for Translation, Composition and Conversation, BY A. L. MEISSNER, M.A., Ph.D., D.Lit., LIBRARIAN AND PROFESSOR OF MODERN LANGUAGES IN QUEEN'S COLLEGE, BELFAST, Mitglied der Gesellschaft, fur das Studium der neueren Sprachen zu Berlin, I Vol. small 8vo, 384 pages, cloth. Price 33. 6d. Teachers and Students of German are to be congratulated upon such an acquisition as Professor Meissner's PUBLIC SCHOOL GERMAN GRAMMAR. It is as thoroughly- well done as the name of its author would lead one to expect. LONDON. HENRY ATTWELL, Die Anlage und Ausftattung gefallen mir fehr. The Reverend A. L. BECKER. The general plan of the book is so good that it is pretty sure to have a wide circulation. LIVERPOOL. E. L. NAFTEL. A new and improved method of learning the German language grammatically and conversationally, if simple and comprehensive, is certain to be welcomed and widely used, and we have no hesitation in saying that this is the best work of the kind we have met with. A look at the preface will fully explain Dr. Meissner's system it could scarcely fail to be successful. Practice in conversation commences once the first principles are mastered, and the. first "conversation lessons are intended to furnish the pupil with the most necessary travel talk for a journey up the Rhine and into Switzerland ; " anyone who has travelled being totally ignorant of the language will appreciate this. The new official spelling has been adopted throughout the book, but it has been sufficiently compared with the old in an introductory chapter to enable the student to read the books printed in the old spelling. 71ie Dublin Evening News. LE MIE PRIGIONI, BY SILVIO PELLICO. Adapted for English Schools, with Grammatical and Explanatory Notes, BY REV. A. C. CLAPIN, M.A. CLOTH, is. 6d. University of California SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388 Return this material to the library from which it was borrowed.